2026-09-29; City Council; 05; Chinquapin Lift Station Improvements Project — Carlsbad City Council, September 29, 2026 (part 7 of 9)

Important: Parameter Object Class code 0x0F is not supported in PowerFlex 750-Series drives. To do a single parameter write, follow the SLC 500 (Generic Attribute Service) single write example on page 6-39
.

Figure 6.38 Example Ladder Logic to Write a Single Parameter Important: If the explicit message single write must be written continuously, use DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 and attribute A (10 decimal; see page 6-40). This writes to RAM— not NVS (EEPROM) memory. This example single write
message using Class code F writes to NVS. Over time,
continuous writes will exceed the EEPROM life cycle and cause the drive to malfunction.

Execute Single Write
Messa~
B3:0
EtherNet/IP Explicit Message
Control Block N l 4:0
Control Block Length 58
Setup Screen <
EN
DN>
ER>-
6-34 Using Explicit Messaging
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

SLC 500 Controller – Formatting a Message to Write a Single Parameter Using Read/Write Parameter Service
Figure 6.39 Write Parameter Message Configuration Screens The following table identifies the data that is required in each box to configure a message to write a single parameter.

General Tab Example Value Description
Size in Words
Data Table Address
Service (1)
Instance (2)
1 (3)
N50:0
Write Parameter
140 (Dec.)
Number of words to be transferred. Each word size is a 16-bit integer.

An unused controller data table address containing the message instruction. This address is the starting word of the source file.

Code for the requested service.

Instance number is the same as the parameter number.

When choosing a Service other than ‘Custom’ from the pull-down menu, an appropriate Hex. value is automatically assigned to the Service Code box which is dimmed (unavailable).
(2) Only drive parameters (Port 0) can be written to using Parameter Object Class code 0x0F . To write to a parameter of a peripheral in another port, use DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 (see page 6-39 ).
(3) In this example, Accel Time 1 is a 16 -bit integer parameter requiring the Size in Words field to be set to ‘1’. If the parameter being written to is a 32-bit integer, the Size in Words must be set to ‘2’. When using a PowerFlex 700S or PowerFlex 750-Series drive, Accel Time 1 is a floating point number requiring the Size in Words to be set to ‘2’. See the drive documentation to determine the size of the parameter and its data type (16-bit or 32-bit integer or REAL). r_• EEM - N14 0 . ( 58 Elements) _Q (Q)~
lns .. AddHop Del "Remove Hop
From Device FromPort ToAdd essT e ToAddress
hisSLC EtherNet Devicelstr:) 10.91.lOIJ.79
,_, EEM - N14 0 , (SB Elements) l'J@J~
r·~--~-~-~-~-·.u MultiHop I Send Data I Receive Data I
This Controller-------------~ I Message Control Bits------=-i Channel: LJ lgnoreiftimed.oot(TOJ:[] I
SlZeinW01ds(ReceiveData~ LJ (SendData): LJ Awa.trigExecuhon(EWJ:[] DataTat:k:AdO"ess(Receive Data): ~ (SendData): ~ ContinuousRun(COJ:[] Error(ERJ:[]
Done (DN): [)
Transmitting(STJ:[]
Enabled(ENJ:[l
Waitingf01QueueSpace :[] [
arget Device Message Timeoot [xl sec]: ~~
'""°'lw,.;,.p,,,m.,,, 1s,,,,,c::~::1 ~
Class(hex): LJ (dee): ~ ~------~
Instance (hex): KJ (dee): [TI[] I ErrOf
Attribute[hext.LJ(dec):LJ I ErrorCode[hexJo
Using Explicit Messaging 6-35
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

SLC 500 Controller Example Write Single Request Data
In this message example, we use the data table address in Figure 6.40 to store the request value (10.0 sec.) that was written to drive parameter 140 - [Accel Time 1]. To determine the data type for the parameter and its required scaling, see the specific drive documentation.

Figure 6.40 Example Write Single Request Data File
Figure 6.41 shows example ladder logic to correctly format the three possible data types for write messages of different parameter types in the SLC 500 controller.

Figure 6.41 Example Ladder Logic to Format Parameter Data Types for Writes For 16-bit Integer
Parameters – All
PowerFlex 7-Class
Drives
For 32-bit Integer
Parameters – All
PowerFlex 7-Class
Drives
For 32-bit REAL
(Floating Point)
Parameters –
PowerFlex 700S
and PowerFlex
750-Series Drives
:CN=5=0=0===================~ Radix:jDecima! ...:J
Symbol: Columns:~
Desc: ~----------------------------~
r;;;;;;;-....:J
I'" " ....:J
MOV ----~
1t io1,,\:

Somce:

Dest
N.51:0
O<
N.50:0
O<
fI1:::r:: is. r.o Dll\"T O:.ti.t}?- ir. rt.:: PLC : s,o to writ:: tt.: d:i.ta w:: wlll 'C,~ (1) 16 bit ir.t::g::r:..

K S l:1 = P=.eter ,,,.,,,. LSW
K51:3 = P=.eter ,,,.,,,. J>.!SW
K5.0: = ~.: t::r 1,,'S.!1r- LS\\" to r.::ti.;·Oft
K5,0: l = ~.: t::r ,, .. .e.!v.?: 1-.!S\\ " to r.::rwort B3:0
6 COP ---~
Copy File
S.Omce:

Dest
La,gth
::;:N.51:2
=N.50:0
2 o ·writ:: a :fl.oe.tir.g poir..t t:.g corr~·tly= yo~ o:"C.s.t fu:.t COP tt.:: :flos.tir.g poir..1 i.r.to (1) i.r.t::g::r:.: tt.~. s.wap tt.:: t.ig.l: ;e.r:(!; ,.,.. 16 bit ir.reg;,r;
F 8::4 = ~ : t:1 Flo.atir.g Poi.r.t ·vi.llr-
N S l :4 = sw,ppat! P,ru,:eter val&e IIISW
N51:5 = :,1,;:·.i:.~ P"i:rarr..: t:!f valv.?: LS\\"
N5.0:0 = PE.1arr.: t::r ,, .. .i:.!1r- LS\\ " to rt: r.:rwort ·5,0: 1 = Ps.n::rr.::t::r ,, .. .i:.!1r- 1-.!SV,." to tl:.:: r.: c,,;·ort B3:0 COP
CopJ.· F ile
=F a:4
,;N 51:4
2 MOV ---~
:t,,fov.:

S-owc-: N51:4
J,5M4<
N50 :l
J,5M4<
MOV ---~
:t,,fovi:

S-owc-: N51:.5
O<
N50 :0
O<
6-36 Using Explicit Messaging
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

SLC 500 Controller Explicit Messaging Using the Generic Get/Set Attribute Service
SLC 500 Controller Example Ladder Logic Program to Read a Single Parameter A Generic Get Attribute Single message is used to read a single parameter.

This read message example reads the value of parameter 003 - [Output Current] in a PowerFlex 7-Class drive.

Important: See Table 6.A on page 6-2
for limitations of PowerFlex 7-Class
and PowerFlex 750-Series drives when using DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x9F for explicit messaging.

Figure 6.42 Example Ladder Logic to Read a Single Parameter Execute Single Read
Message
B3:0
0 Single Read Message
EEM --------~
Ether Net/IP Explicit Message
Control Block Nl3:0
Control Block Length 58
Setup Screen <
Using Explicit Messaging 6-37
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

SLC 500 Controller – Formatting a Message to Read a Single Parameter Using Generic Get/Set Attribute Service
Figure 6.43 Generic Get Attribute Single Message Configuration Screens The following table identifies the data that is required in each box to configure a message to read a single parameter.

General Tab Example Value Description
Size in Words
Data Table Address
Service (1)
Class
Instance (2)
Attribute
2 (3)
N40:0
Generic Get Attribute Single
93 or 9F (Hex.) (4)
3 (Dec.)
9 (Dec.)
Number of words to be transferred. Each word size is a 16-bit integer.

An unused controller data table address containing the message instruction. This address is the starting word of the destination file.

Code for the requested service.

Class ID for the DPI Parameter Object.

Instance number is the same as the parameter number.

Attribute number for the Parameter Value attribute.

MultiHop Tab Example Value Description
To Address 10.91.100.79 IP address of the adapter connected to the drive. (1) The default setting for Service is ‘Custom’, enabling entry of a Service Code not available from the Service pull-down menu. When choosing a Service other than ‘Custom’ from the pull-down menu, an appropriate Hex. value is automatically assigned to the Service Code box which is dimmed (unavailable).
(2) The instance is the parameter number in the drive (Port 0). To read a parameter in another port, see DPI Parameter Object on page C-16 (Class code 0x93) or Host DPI Parameter Object on page C-30 (Class code 0x9F) to determine the instance number. For example, to read parameter 4 of a peripheral in Port 5 of a PowerFlex 750-Series drive, the instance would be 21504 + 4 = 21508 or 5404 (Hex). (3) In this example, Output Current is a 32-bit integer parameter requiring the Size in Words field to be set to ‘2’. If the parameter being read is a 16-bit integer, the Size in Words must be set to ‘1’. When using a PowerFlex 700S or PowerFlex 750-Series drive, Output Current is a floating point number requiring the Size in Words to be set to ‘2’. See the drive documentation to determine the size of the parameter and its data type (16-bit or 32-bit integer or REAL).
(4) See Table 6.A on page 6-2 for limitations of PowerFlex 7-Class and PowerFlex 750-Series drives when using DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x9F for explicit messaging. ;=, EEM N13 0 : (58 Elements) rJ('g]L8)
General l_~_~lt_l_~-~P..i] Send Data ] Receive Data I
lns s AddHop Del• Remove Hop
From Device From Port To Address T e ToAddress
Tl-.iSLC500 EthecNet/lP Oe-.Ulstt 10.91.10079
,_, EEM N13.0: (58 Elements) [~]g]@
["i~eriei0f1J MultiHop I Send Data I Receive Oda I
l
Tt-,Conl,olle,
Channel:LJ
SizeinWOfds(ReceiveDatatLJ
Data TableAd~ess (Receive Data): ~
{SendData)· LJ
(SendData)· ~
[
,,,,,o""" j MessageTimeout[xlsec]:~
MukiHop:~
Service:IGe.neric GetAtt ributeSingle I ServiceCode(hex): D Class (hex): ~ (dee} fil[J
lnstance(hex):LJ(dec}LJ
Attribute(hext.LJ(dec):LJ
I Error Description
l NoeH C(S
I
Message Control Bits-------=i
lgnoie d timed_°ut (TO):[] I
Awa.ting Execution (EW): []
Continuous Run (CO):[]
Error(ERJ:[]
Done(DN):[l
TransmiUing[STJ:rn]
EoaS,d[EN[[j I
'w'aitingfOIQueueSp-,c:e :[l
1'"~
1 ErrorCode(hex):Q
6-38 Using Explicit Messaging
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

SLC 500 Controller Example Get Attribute Single Response Data In this message example, we use the data table address in Figure 6.44 to store the response value (0.13 amps) that was read from drive parameter 003 - [Output Current]. To determine the data type for the parameter and its required scaling, see the specific drive documentation.

Figure 6.44 Example Get Attribute Single Response Data File Figure 6.45 shows example ladder logic to correctly format the three possible data types for get messages of different parameter types in the SLC 500 controller.

Figure 6.45 Example Ladder Logic to Format Parameter Data Types for Gets For 16-bit Integer
Parameters – All
PowerFlex 7-Class
Drives
For 32-bit Integer
Parameters – All
PowerFlex 7-Class
Drives
For 32-bit REAL
(Floating Point)
Parameters –
PowerFlex 700S
and PowerFlex
750-Series Drives
N40:0 Radd Decimal ..:J
Symbol·;:::====================~ Columns:~
Desc: ~----------------------------J
JNio ~ E10perties I ~ ~
TI-.:1'-: i;r.-o 31 bit i.r.t:g~ ; i.r. tl:: SLC. :,,:i d::C.:. t:.r~i .r.; ;pti r ir.to {)) 1 6-bit i.r.1 :g:1" ;..

K4'0: = P.:!a!ri:!l:1' \".E.!Ui: LS\\" :D'cai r.: t,,,;.·Ofk K4'0: l = P.:!a!ri:!l:1' 1,.·a.!Ui: MS"i.\" :D'O!n r.: n,.·vfk K4 1: 1 = P.:!a!ri:!l:1' 1,.·a.lu.-: LS"i.\"
K41 :3 = P.:!a!n:!l:1' 1,.·a.lu.-: MS\\."
MOV
Move
5ou.rc-:

Dest
N :0
O<
N41:0
O<
P ---~
Copy File
5ou.rc-:

Dest
w.g llt
=N :0
=N41:1
1 To r::.t a. :flo.!ti.r.g p:iir.t t!g ,:orr~r ly. you !DU:.t ::ii.1:.t ;wa.p ti-.: 1:igl-. a.1:.t low 16 bir i.r.t-:g:!!i. a:r..t t1:~ COP rt: (J.) i.t:.t:g:!!; ,j.r.10 a. :flo.!ti.r.g poi.r.t a.tGf:;;.. l?-r..gt1: c.f t1:: COP i; 1 ~:;:.u.;: tl:: ::11.o:.ti.r.g p:ii.r.t i; 31 bit:. ar..t ,-..·ill a.u.t-=a:.tk::.lly ta.k: ti-.:
!:~I 1 6 b i t i.r.1:g:1":D'O!D t1: : :.C1'!lf'C-:! (K4 1 : 5 ) K4'0: = P.:!a!ri:!l:1' 1,.·a.!Ui: LS"i.\" :D'cai r.: t,,,;.·Of'k K4'0: l = P.:!a!n:!l:1' 1,.·a.!Ui: MSU." :D'O!D r.: n,;:vfk K41 :4 = ;,,;.·.:_~ P.:!a!ri:!l:1' 1,.·a.lu.-: M::."i.\· K41 :5 = ;w.:.~P.:!a!ri:!l:1' 1,.·a.lu.-:LS'V.."
FS-:3 = P.a.ra!n:l:!!F l0;.1i.r.~PQi:r.t \".!\Ur.!
MOV ---~
1fovi:

Souse::

Dest
N40:0
O<
N41:5
O<
MOV ---~
1fovi:

Souse:~
Dest
Souse:~
Dest
L:1!.51:ll
N40:l
1138]<
N41:4
1 13 ! 2 <
';N41:4
';fg :3
I
Using Explicit Messaging 6-39
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

SLC 500 Controller Example Ladder Logic Program to Write a Single Parameter Using Generic Get/Set Attribute Service
A Generic Set Attribute Single message is used to write to a single parameter. This write message example writes a value to parameter 140 - [Accel Time 1] in a PowerFlex 7-Class drive.

Figure 6.46 Example Ladder Logic to Write a Single Parameter Execute Single Write
Messaae
B3:0
Single Write Message
EEM --------~
EtherNet/IP Explicit Message
Contro l Block N l4:0
Contro l Block Length 58
Setup Screen <
EN
DN>
ER>-
6-40 Using Explicit Messaging
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

SLC 500 Controller – Formatting a Message to Write a Single Parameter Using Generic Get/Set Attribute Service
Figure 6.47 Generic Set Attribute Single Message Configuration Screens The following table identifies the data that is required in each box to configure a message to write a single parameter.

General Tab Example Value Description
Size in Words
Data Table Address
Service (1)
Class
Instance (2)
Attribute (3)
1 (4)
N50:0
Generic Set Attribute Single
93 or 9F (Hex.) (5)
140 (Dec.)
9 or 10 (Dec.)
Number of words to be transferred. Each word size is a 16-bit integer.

An unused controller data table address containing the message instruction. This address is the starting word of the source file.

Code for the requested service.

Class ID for the DPI Parameter Object.

Instance number is the same as the parameter number.

Attribute number for the Parameter Value attribute.

MultiHop Tab Example Value Description
To Address 10.91.100.79 IP address of the adapter connected to the drive. (1) The default setting for Service is ‘Custom’, enabling entry of a Service Code not available from the Service pull-down menu. When choosing a Service other than ‘Custom’ from the pull-down menu, an appropriate Hex. value is automatically assigned to the Service Code box which is dimmed (unavailable).
(2) The instance is the parameter number in the drive (Port 0). To write to a parameter in another port, see DPI Parameter Object on page C-16 (Class code 0x93) or Host DPI Parameter Object on page C-30 (Class code 0x9F) to determine the instance number. For example, to write to parameter 4 of a peripheral in Port 5 of a PowerFlex 750-Series drive, the instance would be 21504 + 4 = 21508 or 5404 (Hex). (3) Setting the Attribute value to ‘9’ will write the parameter value to the drive’s Nonvolatile Storage (EEPROM) memory, which retains the parameter value even after the drive is power cycled. Important: When set to ‘9’, the EEPROM may quickly exceed its life cycle and cause the drive to malfunction. Setting the Attribute value to ‘A’ (10 decimal) will write the parameter value to temporary memory, which deletes the parameter value after the drive is power cycled. When frequent write messages are required, we recommend using the ‘A’ (10 decimal) setting. (4) In this example, Accel Time 1 is a 16-bit integer parameter requiring the Size in Words field to be set to ‘1’. If the parameter being written to is a 32-bit integer, the Size in Words must be set to ‘2’. When using a PowerFlex 700S or PowerFlex 750-Series drive, Accel Time 1 is a floating point number requiring the Size in Words to be set to ‘2’. See the drive documentation to determine the size of the parameter and its data type (16-bit or 32-bit integer or REAL).
(5) See Table 6.A on page 6-2 for limitations of PowerFlex 7-Class and PowerFlex 750-Series drives when using DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x9F for explicit messaging. ,~. EEJ.li N14.0 : (58 Elements) _ _(]@~
General P~(~It~·cpJJ Send Data ] Receive Data I
lns .. AddHop Del-Remove Hop
From Device
TJ-uSLC500
FromPort ToAddres$T e ToAddre$i
1 EtherNeVIPDevice{stJ:) 10.91.100.79
,_, WA N14.0 • (58 Elements) ~ @('g]
[""Geiiei:;r11 MultiHop l Send Data l Receive Data I
l
losCoot,oll~
Charv-iel:LJ
SizeinWords(Receive Data):LJ
OataTableAddress(ReceiveOata): ~
Tarr;ietOevice
(SendDatatLJ
(SendOatat~
Messar;ieTimeout[xl sec]:~
MultiHop: ~
Se1vice: IGene1icSetAtt1ibuteSingle I ServiceCode[heM): ~ Clas$(hex)~(dec)[H[J
lnstance(hex): rnCJ (dee) [HQ]
AttriboJte(hex):LJ(dec) : LJ
I Error Description
l No errors
I
MessageCorl.rolB~s--~
lgnm l timed out (TO): [j
Awa~ing E~ecution (EW): []
Continuous Run (CO):[]
Emx (ER):[]
Done (ONJ:[l
Transmil:tinQ(STJ:[l
EMbod [ENd[] I
Waitin9forQueueSpaee:[l
1'"" I '""coo,[h"ID _J
Using Explicit Messaging 6-41
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

SLC 500 Controller Example Set Attribute Single Request Data In this message example, we use the data table address in Figure 6.48 to store the request value (10.0 sec.) that was written to drive parameter 140 - [Accel Time 1]. To determine the data type for the parameter and its required scaling, see the specific drive documentation.

Figure 6.48 Example Set Attribute SIngle Request Data File Figure 6.49 shows example ladder logic to correctly format the three possible data types for set messages of different parameter types in the SLC 500 controller.

Figure 6.49 Example Ladder Logic to Format Parameter Data Types for Sets For 16-bit Integer
Parameters – All
PowerFlex 7-Class
Drives
For 32-bit Integer
Parameters – All
PowerFlex 7-Class
Drives
For 32-bit REAL
(Floating Point)
Parameters –
PowerFlex 700S
and PowerFlex
750-Series Drives
ill
:'=N::50:::0::::::==================~ Radix: I Decimal i] Symbol: Columns: ~
Desc: ~---------------------------~
~ ...:J
J"uu ...:J
A 16 bit ir.t-:_g-::r ~-,2:1!:,! t-::r-= cl:! &ta to~ ,i.:r i tt'!f.. :!! Si~:- it: N50:0 B3 :0 MOV -----,
llfova
Sowc-2 NS l :O
O<
NSO:O
O<
iT'l: !!! i:, 1:0 D~ "T & tar.:-?- in cl:! PLC : so to v.-rit! tl: ! Oita ,:;.·! wilt 1;.:.! (l ) 16 bit i.r.t!g!:fS .

K51 :l = Powr. !t!< v•li;e LSW
K51 :3 = Powr. ,c.,- v•li;e MSW
)(50:0 = Pow!:!t !< v•li;e LSW to t:!tWOOC
)(50: 1 = Powr. ! t!< v•li;e MSW to r.!twooc
B3:0 COP
Copy File
S01lro, =N 51:2
=N50:0
2 iI'o v.Tit! :a :tloaci..ng poi.t:t rag corr~ tlY: yo-c rr.1;.:.c IDt COP t't! fi(.'t.:ti.r.g poir.t it:to (2) if:c-:g-!:f::: tl:~ :.wap tl:! t igt. u-.~ 1low l O bit ir.t!g-!f:.
!FS::4 = Pa.1an'. ! t!! Flo.aci.r.g Poi1:t vah,-
K5 l :4 = sw•PJ)!<! Patan-.!t!< v•li;e MSW
K5 l : 5 = sw•PJ)!<! Patan-.!t!< v•li;e LSW
K50:0 = Powr. ! t!< v•li;e LSW to tt.• r.!twoo;
K50: 1 = Powr. ! t!< v•li;e MSW to tt.• r.. twoo;
B3:0
MOV
Mcve
Sou.ro,
02st
MOV
Mo,-..

Sou.ro,
D.2st
=F S:4
=N51:4
2 NS !:4
16&44<
NSO:l
161¾4<
NS !:5
O<
NSO:O
O<
6-42 Using Explicit Messaging
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

SLC 500 Controller – Explanation of Request and Response Data for Read/Write Multiple Messaging
The data structures in Figure 6.50 and Figure 6.51 use 16-bit words and can accommodate up to 22 parameters in a single message. In the Response Message, a parameter number with the high bit set indicates that the associated parameter value field contains an error code (parameter number in response data will be negative).

Important: See Table 6.A on page 6-2
for limitations of PowerFlex 7-Class
and PowerFlex 750-Series drives when using Class code 0x93 or Class code 0x9F for explicit messaging.

Figure 6.50 Data Structures for Scattered Read Messages Figure 6.51 Data Structures for Scattered Write Messages Request (Source Data) Response (Destination Data)
Word 0 Parameter Number Word 0 Parameter Number
1 Pad Word 1 Parameter Value LSW
2 Pad Word 2 Parameter Value MSW
3 Parameter Number 3 Parameter Number
4 Pad Word 4 Parameter Value LSW
5 Pad Word 5 Parameter Value MSW
6 Parameter Number 6 Parameter Number
7 Pad Word 7 Parameter Value LSW
8 Pad Word 8 Parameter Value MSW
9 Parameter Number 9 Parameter Number
10 Pad Word 10 Parameter Value LSW
11 Pad Word 11 Parameter Value MSW
12 Parameter Number 12 Parameter Number
13 Pad Word 13 Parameter Value LSW
14 Pad Word 14 Parameter Value MSW
...
...
63 Parameter Number 63 Parameter Number
64 Pad Word 64 Parameter Value LSW
65 Pad Word 65 Parameter Value MSW
Request (Source Data) Response (Destination Data)
Word 0 Parameter Number Word 0 Parameter Number
1 Parameter Value LSW 1 Pad Word
2 Parameter Value MSW 2 Pad Word
3 Parameter Number 3 Parameter Number
4 Parameter Value LSW 4 Pad Word
5 Parameter Value MSW 5 Pad Word
6 Parameter Number 6 Parameter Number
7 Parameter Value LSW 7 Pad Word
8 Parameter Value MSW 8 Pad Word
9 Parameter Number 9 Parameter Number
10 Parameter Value LSW 10 Pad Word
11 Parameter Value MSW 11 Pad Word
12 Parameter Number 12 Parameter Number
13 Parameter Value LSW 13 Pad Word
14 Parameter Value MSW 14 Pad Word
...
...
63 Parameter Number 63 Parameter Number
64 Parameter Value LSW 64 Pad Word
65 Parameter Value MSW 65 Pad Word
Using Explicit Messaging 6-43
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

SLC 500 Controller Example Ladder Logic Program to Read Multiple Parameters Using Generic Get/Set Attribute Service
A Custom scattered read message is used to read the values of multiple parameters. This read message example reads the values of these five parameters.

See DPI Parameter Object on page C-16 (Class code 0x93) or Host DPI Parameter Object on page C-30 (Class code 0x9F) for parameter numbering.

Important: See Table 6.A on page 6-2 for limitations of PowerFlex 7-Class and PowerFlex 750-Series drives when using DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x9F for explicit messaging.

Figure 6.52 Example Ladder Logic to Read Multiple Parameters PowerFlex 7-Class Drive PowerFlex 750-Series Drive
 Parameter 001 - [Output Freq]
 Parameter 003 - [Output Current]
 Parameter 006 - [Output Voltage]
 Parameter 012 - [DC Bus Voltage]
 Parameter 017 - [Analog In1 Value]
 Parameter 001 - [Output Freq]
 Parameter 007 - [Output Current]
 Parameter 137 - [Open Loop Fdbk]
 Parameter 21581 - [Port 5: Analog Out 0 Data]
 Parameter 260 - [Analog In0 Value]
Execute Scattered
Read Message
B3:0
2 Scattered Read
Message
EEM --------~
Ether Net/IP Explicit Message
Contro l Block Nl 5:0
Contro l Block Length 58
Setup Screen <
EN
DN>
ER>-
6-44 Using Explicit Messaging
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

SLC 500 Controller – Formatting a Message to Read Multiple Parameters Using Generic Get/Set Attribute Service
Figure 6.53 Custom Scattered Read Message Configuration Screens The following table identifies the data that is required in each box to configure a message to read multiple parameters.

General Tab Example Value Description
Size in Words
Data Table Address
Service (1)
Service Code
Class
Instance
Attribute
15 (2)
N60:0
Custom
4B (Hex.)
93 or 9F (Hex.) (3)
0 (Dec.)
0 (Dec.)
Number of words to be transferred. Each word size is a 16-bit integer.

An unused controller data table address containing the message instruction. This address is the starting word of the destination file.

Required for scattered messages.

Code for the requested service.

Class ID for the DPI Parameter Object.

Required for scattered messages.

SLC 500 Controller Example Scattered Read Request Data
In this message example, we use the data table addresses in Figure 6.54 or Figure 6.55 to store the request values to be read from these drive parameters.

See DPI Parameter Object on page C-16 (Class code 0x93) or Host DPI Parameter Object on page C-30 (Class code 0x9F) for parameter numbering.

Figure 6.54 Example Scattered Read Request Data File for PowerFlex 7-Class Drive Figure 6.55 Example Scattered Read Request Data File for PowerFlex 750-Series Drive SLC 500 Controller Example Scattered Read Response Data In this message example, we use the data table addresses in Figure 6.56 or
Figure 6.57 to store the response values that were read from the requested drive parameters.

Figure 6.56 Example Scattered Read Response Data File for PowerFlex 7-Class Drive PowerFlex 7-Class Drive PowerFlex 750-Series Drive
 Parameter 001 - [Output Freq]
 Parameter 003 - [Output Current]
 Parameter 006 - [Output Voltage]
 Parameter 012 - [DC Bus Voltage]
 Parameter 017 - [Analog In1 Value]
 Parameter 001 - [Output Freq]
 Parameter 007 - [Output Current]
 Parameter 137 - [Open Loop Fdbk]
 Parameter 21581 - [Port 5: Analog Out 0 Data]
 Parameter 260 - [Analog In0 Value]
.!.LJ ill
:CN:::70':::0":::::===================C:: Radi:,dDecimal ..:J S,Ymbol Columns:~
Desc: ~---------------------------~
r.:;:;;:;- ..,:J
l" 'v ...:.J
.!.LJ ill
:CN:::70=:0":::::===================C:: Radid Decimal ..:J S_ymbol Columns:~
Desc: ~---------------------------~
r,:;:;;:;-..,:J
I"' V ...:.J
.!.LJ ill
N60:0 Radi:-c: I Decimal iJ
Symbol:::=====================~ Columns: ~
Desc: ~---------------------------~
wcn...:.J I"°" ...:.J
6-46 Using Explicit Messaging
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

In this example, the parameters have the following values.

Figure 6.57 Example Scattered Read Response Data File for PowerFlex 750-Series Drive
The PowerFlex 750-Series drive uses 32-bit integer and REAL parameters.

A COP command must be used to copy the N60 integer array to a 16-bit integer or floating tag. Figure 6.58 shows the ladder logic used for this example. If the parameter data type is a 32-bit integer, the data remains split into two 16-bit integers because there are no 32-bit integers in the SLC 500 controller. If the parameter data type is a REAL, then the destination tag is a floating point. In this case, the value must first be swapped with the high and low 16-bit integers, and then the two integers copied (COP) into a floating point address. See the drive documentation to determine the parameter data type (32-bit integer or REAL).

PowerFlex 7-Class Drive Parameter Address Read Value
1 - [Output Freq] N60:1 32.5 Hz
3 - [Output Current] N60:4 0.01 Amp
6 - [Output Voltage] N60:7 118.7V AC
12 - [DC Bus Voltage] N60:10 329.2V DC
17 - [Analog In2 Value] N60:13 8.318 mA
ill ill
:CN'::60::::0:::::::===================C:: Radix:jDecimal ::.:] Symbol: Columns:~
Desc: ~---------------------------~
~ ....:.J I" "" ....:.J
Using Explicit Messaging 6-47
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

Figure 6.58 Example Ladder Logic to Copy Response Data for PowerFlex 750-Series Drive
In this message example, the parameters have the following values.

Parameter 137 -
[Open Loop Fdbk]
PowerFlex
750-Series Drives
Parameter 001 -
[Output Freq]
PowerFlex 750-Series Drive Parameter Read Value Data Type 1 - [Output Freq] 45.0 Hz REAL
7 - [Output Current] 0.04 Amp REAL
137 - [Open Loop Fdbk] 710659711 DINT
21581 - [Port 5: Analog Out 0 Data] 45.0 Hz REAL
260 - [Analog In0 Value] 9.361 Volts REAL
n.~e i3 r.'D 31 bit ir.te!~ ir. t1:: SLC: -;.o tb: di.ti. r~JE.ir:.s split i.r:.to (1) 15-bit ir.te!~ :K: : - = Pa1=.a t~ vali;. LS.,\" torr. ut1.·oo;
K: : B = Pa1=.a t~ vali;. 1 ISW torr. ,:arwoo;
:K- :1 = Pa1=.a t~ v;,li;. LSW
:K- :3 = Pa1=.at~ vali;. U SW
COP
Copy File
Somce
D.:st
V-fi!_gtl!i
,;N,!ii!I:
:2
2 iI'o re.;.G • :ll<>&til:g pou-.t tog c=a.: tly, y,rno rr.i;st first swap th 1:igt . .,._,i lm;· 16 bit u-.tag=, "'.<! ti:~. COP tl:a (2) i,-.teg~ i,-.to a :flos,ti,-.g poi,-.t altd.rass. L~.g tl-. oftl-.a COP is 1 tacai;;e tl-.a :ll<>&ti,:g poi,-.t is 32 bits.,._,: will ai;torriatiaally take tl-.e r.~ t 16 bit u-.teg~ f .:.,o: tl-.e ;oi;rce (:K- :3) K: : 1 = P=-•t~ vali;. LS,\" t orr. r.at1,·"'1:
:K: :l = Pa1=.at~ vdi;. U SW ft•= i:atwl>lk
:K- :o = ;wawa<) ~•t~ vali;. us, \·
:K- : 1 = sws.ppe,: ~et~ vali;. LSW
FB:5 = P=.at~ Fl<>&til:g Poil:t vdi;.

MOV
Mo,1e
S=e NOO:l
O<
!R;t N7:l
O<
MOV
Mo.,a
S.=e N~ :2
1694B<
D:st N7:0
1694B<
GOP
,;N 7:0
D:st ,;FB:.5
Leli!gth l
6-48 Using Explicit Messaging
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

SLC 500 Controller Example Ladder Logic Program to Write Multiple Parameters Using Generic Get/Set Attribute Service
A Custom scattered write message is used to write to multiple parameters.

This write message example writes the following values to these five parameters.

See DPI Parameter Object on page C-16 (Class code 0x93) or Host DPI Parameter Object on page C-30 (Class code 0x9F) for parameter numbering.

Important: See Table 6.A on page 6-2 for limitations of PowerFlex 7-Class and PowerFlex 750-Series drives when using DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x9F for explicit messaging.

Figure 6.59 Example Ladder Logic to Write Multiple Parameters Important: If the explicit message scattered write must be written continuously, then use a separate Generic Set service explicit message single write for each parameter using DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x9F and attribute A (10 decimal; see page 6-40).

Attribute A writes to RAM—not NVS (EEPROM) memory.

This example scattered write message using attribute 0 writes to NVS. Over time, continuous writes will exceed the EEPROM life cycle and cause the drive to malfunction.

PowerFlex 7-Class
Drive Parameter
Write Value PowerFlex 750-Series
Drive Parameter
Write Value
141 - [Accel Time 2] 11.1 Sec. 536 - [Accel Time 2] 11.1 Sec. 143 - [Decel Time 2] 22.2 Sec. 538 - [Decel Time 2] 22.2 Sec. 105 - [Preset Speed 5] 33.3 Hz. 725 - [Zero Position] 33 106 - [Preset Speed 6] 44.4 Hz. 21555 - [Port 5: Analog In0 Hi] 5.5 107 - [Preset Speed 7] 55.5 Hz. 780 - [PTP Setpoint] -75,555 Execute Scattered
Write Message
B3:0
Scattered Write
Message
EEM --------~
Ether Net/IP Explicit Message
Contro l Block Nl6:0
Contro l Block Length 58
Setup Screen <
EN
DN>
ER>-
Using Explicit Messaging 6-49
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

SLC 500 Controller – Formatting a Message to Write Multiple Parameters Using Generic Get/Set Attribute Service
Figure 6.60 Custom Scattered Write Multiple Message Configuration Screens The following table identifies the data that is required in each box to configure a message to write multiple parameters.

General Tab Example Value Description
Size in Words
Data Table Address
Service (1)
Service Code
Class
Instance
Attribute
15 (2)
N80:0
Custom
4C (Hex.)
93 or 9F (Hex.)
(3)
0 (Dec.)
0 (Dec.)
Number of words to be transferred. Each word size is a 16-bit integer.

An unused controller data table address containing the message instruction. This address is the starting word of the source file.

Required for scattered messages.

Code for the requested service.

Class ID for the DPI Parameter Object.

Required for scattered messages.

SLC 500 Controller Example Scattered Write Request Data In this message example, we use the data table addresses in Figure 6.61 or Figure 6.64 to store the request values to be written to these drive parameters.

See DPI Parameter Object on page C-16 (Class code 0x93) or Host DPI Parameter Object on page C-30 (Class code 0x9F) for parameter numbering.

Figure 6.61 or Figure 6.64 shows the parameter values.

Figure 6.61 Example Scattered Write Request Data File for PowerFlex 7-Class Drive SLC 500 Controller Example Scattered Write Response Data In this message example, we use the data table addresses in Figure 6.62 to
store the response values that were written to the requested drive parameters. Values of ‘0’ indicate no errors occurred.

Figure 6.62 Example Scattered Write Response Data File for PowerFlex 7-Class Drive The PowerFlex 750-Series drive uses 32-bit integer and REAL parameters.

A COP command must be used to copy the 16-bit integer or REAL values to the N90 integer array. Figure 6.63 shows the ladder logic used for this example. If the parameter data type is a 32-bit integer, the data remains split into two 16-bit integers since there are no 32-bit integers in the SLC 500 PowerFlex 7-Class
Drive Parameter
Address Write Value PowerFlex 750-Series
Drive Parameter
Write Value Data Type
141 - [Accel Time 2] N90:1 11.1 Sec. 536 - [Accel Time 2] 11.1 Sec. REAL 143 - [Decel Time 2] N90:4 22.2 Sec. 538 - [Decel Time 2] 22.2 Sec. REAL 105 - [Preset Speed 5] N90:7 33.3 Hz. 725 - [Zero Position] 33 32-bit integer 106 - [Preset Speed 6] N90:10 44.4 Hz. 21555 - [Port 5: Analog In0 Hi] 5.5 REAL 107 - [Preset Speed 7] N90:13 55.5 Hz. 780 - [PTP Setpoint] -75,555 32-bit integer ill ill
:CN::90:::0::::::===================C: Radi, loecimal ..:.J S_ymbol: Columns:~
Desc: ~----------------------------
r,:;;;;-...:.J , .. ,v ...:.J ~
ill ill
:CN::80:::0::::::===================C: Rad,d Decimal ..:.J Symbol Columns: ~
Desc: ~----------------------------
r;;;;;;;-...:.J
I""" ...:.J
Using Explicit Messaging 6-51
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

controller. If the parameter data type is a REAL, the floating point value in the SLC 500 controller is copied (COP) to two 16-bit integers. Then the MSW (most significant word) and LSW (least significant word) must be swapped before moving (MOV) the values to the array to be written to. See the drive documentation to determine the parameter data type (32-bit integer or REAL).

Figure 6.63 Example Ladder Logic to Copy Request Data for PowerFlex 750-Series Drive
Parameter 780 -
[PTP Setpoint]
PowerFlex
750-Series Drives
Parameter 536 -
[Accel Time 2]
.ere is r.o DTh"T <!l.~type ir. 11:e SLC , .o to write tt.e a.~ we will i;;e (1) 1: bit : 13 = ~eter v;.li;e LSW to i-.en.·oit
:14 = ~ecer vali;e 1 ISW co r.erw0!1:

COP
,~ -File
S=
De;t
LieBgtlil
,;N7:.5
,;N :13
2 o write a !Lc..tir.g poir.t ·c..g corre.."'tly, y oi; rr.i;;c first COP ct.e !Lc..tir.g poi.t:t if.co (2) • r.ceger, , tt.er. ;w,;.p ct.e l:ig!: ,;a-.:l!, low 1: bit i.t:teger, F&:: = ~.eter Flc..tir.g Poi.t:t v;.li;e
K - :3 = ;w,;.ppeG ~.eter . -..li;e 1ISW
!K- :4 = SWl1.ppeG ~.eter . -..li;e LSW
K. : 1 = ~.eter . -..li;e LS\\. to 11:e r.etw0!1:

K :1 = ~.ecer . -..li;e 1ISW co ct.e r.en.·oit
COP
Copy Fi ve
So=e
De;.1
length
,;F E:
,;N :3
2 MOV ---~
Mov,;,
So=e
MOV ---~
Mov,;,
So=e N :4
-2,6214<
N_. ·:l
-2.6214<
6-52 Using Explicit Messaging
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

Figure 6.64 Example Scattered Write Request Data File f or PowerFlex 750-Series Drive The results of the explicit message appear in the destination tag array N80 (Figure 6.65). Values of ‘0’ indicate no errors occurred.

Figure 6.65 Example Scattered Write Response Data File for PowerFlex 750-Series Drive
..!..lJ ~
:CN=9=0=0===================~ Radi,:lDecimal ..:J
Symbol: Columns: f,"'o3"
Desc: ~----------------------------~
won__:J
I'"" __:J
..!..lJ
N80:0 Radi:,d Decimal ...:J
S_ymbol: :=======================: Columns: f,"'o3"
Desc: ~---------------------------~
[N8o ~ Eroperties I ~ ~
Using Explicit Messaging 6-53
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

MicroLogix 1100/1400
Controller Examples
When using RSLogix 500 software, version 7.10 and earlier, explicit messaging must be performed using the PCCC N-File method. For RSLogix 500 software, version 7.20 and later, the CIP messaging method has been added along with the PCCC N-File method. However, it is recommended to use the CIP method because it is easier to use and understand. For this reason, only instructions for the CIP method are provided. If you must use the PCCC N-File method, see the PLC-5 Controller Examples on page 6-23.

The CIP messaging method provides two ways to perform explicit messaging:
 Read/Write Parameter Service simplifies setup by requiring less data to be entered in message configuration screens. However, the Read/Write Parameter Service can only be used to perform single parameter read or single parameter write explicit messages. (Multiple parameter reads or writes must be performed using the Generic Get/Set Attribute Service described below.)
Important: When performing a Write Parameter message, the data will always be written to the drive’s Nonvolatile Storage (NVS).

Continuous NVS writes may damage the drive’s EEPROM.

If continuous writes are necessary, use the Generic Set Attribute Single Service and attribute A (10 decimal; see page 6-64
).
 Generic Get/Set Attribute Service requires more setup data to be entered in message configuration screens, but can be used to perform single parameter read or write and multiple parameter read or write explicit messages. Also, the Generic Set Attribute Service offers the choice of writing the data to the drive’s Nonvolatile Storage (NVS) or the drive’s Random Access Memory (RAM; for Generic Set Attribute Single service only, see page 6-64
). Note that when selecting the data to be
written to RAM, the data will be lost if the drive loses power.

For supported classes, instances, and attributes, see Appendix C, EtherNet/ IP Objects.
6-54 Using Explicit Messaging
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

MicroLogix 1100/1400 Controller Explicit Messaging Using the Read/ Write Parameter Service
MicroLogix 1100/1400 Controller Example Ladder Logic Program to Read a Single Parameter
A Read Parameter message is used to read a single parameter. This read message example reads the value of parameter 003 - [Output Current] in a PowerFlex 7-Class drive.

Important: Parameter Object Class code 0x0F is not supported in PowerFlex 750-Series drives. To do a single parameter read, follow the MicroLogix 1100/1400 (Generic Attribute Service) single read example on page 6-60
.

Figure 6.66 Example Ladder Logic to Read a Single Parameter Execute Single
Read Message
B3:0
0 Single Read Message
MSG ----~
Read/Write Message
MSGF ile MGl3:0
Setup Screen <
EN~ DN)-
ER)-
Using Explicit Messaging 6-55
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

MicroLogix 1100/1400 Controller – Formatting a Message to Read a Single Parameter Using Read/Write Parameter Service
Figure 6.67 Read Parameter Message Configuration Screens The following table identifies the data that is required in each box to configure a message to read a single parameter.

General Tab Example Value Description
Channel
Comm… Command
Data Table Address
Size in Bytes
Extended Routing…
Service (1)
Instance (2)
1 CIP Generic
N40:0
4 (3)
RIX15:0
Read Parameter
3 (Dec.)
Controller port to which the network is connected.

Used to access the Parameter Object in the adapter.

An unused controller data table address containing the message instruction. This address is the starting word of the destination file.

Number of bytes to be transferred. Each byte size is an 8-bit integer.

An unused routing information file for the controller.

Code for the requested service.

Instance number is the same as the parameter number.

MultiHop Tab Example Value Description
To Address 10.91.100.79 IP address of the adapter connected to the drive. (1) The default setting for Service is ‘Custom’, enabling entry of a Service Code not available from the Service pull-down menu. When choosing a Service other than ‘Custom’ from the pull-down menu, an appropriate Hex. value is automatically assigned to the Service Code box which is dimmed (unavailable).
(2) Only drive parameters (Port 0) can be read using Parameter Object Class code 0x0F . To read a parameter of a peripheral in another port, use DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 (see page 6-60). (3) In this example, Output Current is a 32-bit integer parameter requiring the Size in Bytes field to be set to ‘4’. If the parameter being read is a 16-bit integer, the Size in Bytes must be set to ‘2’. When using a PowerFlex 700S or PowerFlex 750-Series drive, Output Current is a floating point number requiring the Size in Bytes to be set to ‘4’. See the drive documentation to determine the size of the parameter and its data type (16-bit or 32-bit integer or REAL). ;~ MSG ~ MG13:0: (1 Elements) (:;]§~
General L~-~!~i-~-~.P..iJ Send Data I Receive Data J
Ins =Add Hop Del= Remove Hop
F,omPrnt To Address T e To Address
Channel EtherNet/1 Device (~slr,~~~1~0.9~1.100.79
0 MSG - MG13:0: (1 Elements) l'J[gj[g]
r·~--~~~-i.~.iJI MulliHop I Send Data I Receive Data I
This Controller--------------~
Channel: 11 [Integral)
Communication Command lsaCa.lP.;;G,aena,er,aic ______ ~ DataTableAddress[Receive): ~
Size in B}'tes [Receive): ~ (S end): ~
Target Device----~~~~~~~~~-----~
Message Timeout: 1~33~--~
Local/ Remote: !Local I MultiHop· ~
Extended Routing Info File(RIX): ~
Service: !Read Parameter
Class(heM)
Instance (heM)
Attribute(heM)
[ Error Description
No errors
I Service Code (heM): ~
LJ[dec[,IJI:J
LJ [dee[, LJ
D [dee[, D
Control Bits-----~ ,
Ignore if timed out (TO):[[]
Break Connection [BK):[[]
Awaiting EMecution (EW): [[]
Error (EA):[[]
Message done [DN): [[]
Message Transmitting [ST):[[]
Message Enabled (E N):[[]
Error-------~ ,
ErrorCode(HeM): 0
7 6-56 Using Explicit Messaging
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

MicroLogix 1100/1400 Controller Example Read Single Response Data In this message example, we use the data table address in Figure 6.68 to store the response value (0.13 amps) that was read from drive parameter 003 - [Output Current]. To determine the data type for the parameter and its required scaling, see the specific drive documentation.

Figure 6.68 Example Read Single Response Data File
Figure 6.69 shows example ladder logic to correctly format the three possible data types for read messages of different parameter types in the MicroLogix 1100/1400 controller.

Figure 6.69 Example Ladder Logic to Format Parameter Data Types for Reads For 16-bit Integer
Parameters – All
PowerFlex 7-Class
Drives
For 32-bit Integer
Parameters – All
PowerFlex 7-Class
Drives
For 32-bit REAL
(Floating Point)
Parameters –
PowerFlex 700S
and PowerFlex
750-Series Drives
N40:0 Radix: I Decimal 3
Symbol::======================~ Columns: f,o"3
Desc: ~-----------,-------------------~
JN4o :J E1operties I ~ ~

MOV -----,
Mov~
Souroa N-40:0
-14254<
N41:0
-14254<
.::re is t:.o 32 bit ir.t-::_g-::r5 ir. tt.: ?,,!icroLog~= :ID tt.: Oiti rerr..e.ir.:: -s.plit irito (1) 15--bit ir.teg-::r5. 1'40:0 = P!rur. •t~ w.li:2 LS\\" :forr. r.atwort:

K : 1 = P!rur. at~ vsli:2 J\!SW too: r.atwodc
COP
Copy Fila
Sowc~
D.:-s.c
Ler~gtlii
,;N-40:0
,;N41:2
2 o r~ i :8.o.:.tir.g poir.t mg corr-::i-:tl~t": cl:: CP"\\- i.r..s.c:nx:cior. is. 1;.s.-::d to copy tt.: &ti co .:. :fl.OE:tir.g poir.1t. 1'40:0 = P!rur. •t~ ,,,_li:2 LS\\" torr. r.arwort:

K : l = P.,.,,; at~ ,,,_li:2 J\!SW too: r.arwodc
E&:3 = ?=.at~ Flosti.r.• P i.t:.t vd i:2

CPW -----,
Copy\Voro
So=
D:s.c
I.er!gth
,;N-40:0
,;F &:3
2 Using Explicit Messaging 6-57
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

MicroLogix 1100/1400 Controller Example Ladder Logic Program to Write a Single Parameter Using Read/Write Parameter Service
A Write Parameter message is used to write to a single parameter. This write message example writes a value to parameter 140 - [Accel Time 1] in a PowerFlex 7-Class drive.

Figure 6.70 Example Ladder Logic to Write a Single Parameter Important: If the explicit message single write must be written continuously, use DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 and attribute A (10 decimal; see page 6-64). This writes to RAM— not NVS (EEPROM) memory. This example single write
message using Class code F writes to NVS. Over time,
continuous writes will exceed the EEPROM life cycle and cause the drive to malfunction.

Execute Single
Write Message
B3:0
Read/Write Message
MSG File MG 14 :O
Setup Screen <
EN~ DN>-
ER>-
6-58 Using Explicit Messaging
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

MicroLogix 1100/1400 Controller – Formatting a Message to Write a Single Parameter Using Read/Write Parameter Service
Figure 6.71 Write Parameter Message Configuration Screens The following table identifies the data that is required in each box to configure a message to write a single parameter.

General Tab Example Value Description
Channel
Comm… Command
Data Table Address
Size in Bytes
Extended Routing…
Service (1)
Instance (2)
1 CIP Generic
N50:0
2 (3)
RIX16:0
Write Parameter
140 (Dec.)
Controller port to which the network is connected.

Used to access the Parameter Object in the adapter.

An unused controller data table address containing the message instruction. This address is the starting word of the destination file.

Number of bytes to be transferred. Each byte size is an 8-bit integer.

An unused routing information file for the controller.

Code for the requested service.

Instance number is the same as the parameter number.

MicroLogix 1100/1400 Controller Example Write Single Request Data In this message example, we use the data table address in Figure 6.72 to store the request value (10.0 sec.) that was written to drive parameter 140 - [Accel Time 1]. To determine the data type for the parameter and its required scaling, see the specific drive documentation.

Figure 6.72 Example Write Single Request Data File
Figure 6.73 shows example ladder logic to correctly format the three possible data types for write messages in the MicroLogix 1100/1400 controller.

Figure 6.73 Example Ladder Logic to Format Parameter Data Types for Writes For 16-bit Integer
Parameters – All
PowerFlex 7-Class
Drives
For 32-bit Integer
Parameters – All
PowerFlex 7-Class
Drives
For 32-bit REAL
(Floating Point)
Parameters –
PowerFlex 700S
and PowerFlex
750-Series Drives
N50:0 Radi:,d Decimal ...:J
S_ymbol::=:====================~ Columns: r,o-...:]"
Desc: ~---------------------------~
~ ~ _Eroperties I ~ ~
A 16 bi t i.r.teg;,r ~ :t;er, ti-.: di.~ to b: writt;,r. re;i<!,:; i.r. "50:0 B3 :0 MOV ---~
Mo.,;,
S-OBK 1:! N51:0
1234<
N50:0
1K
ITT:.;,re is r::, DIKI' d:.ti!rtjp: i.r, tl:e 1 IicroLogix, ;o to write tl:e d:.~ we ,·ill t,e (1) l : bit i.r.teg;,r;.

K51:1 = ~ .:t;er vi.It: LSW
K51:3 = P..:rsar.:t;er valt: 1ISW
"50: D = ~ .:t;er valt: LSW to r:: twork
K50: l = ~ -:t;er valt: 1ISW to 1".:twon:

B3:0
6 OOP
Cop}· File
Soo.roe
D.e;t
I.er,gth
,;,N51:2
,;,N50:0
1 IT'o write a !loati.r.g p:,i.r.t ~g com,: tly, ti-.: CPW i.r.,tn:ctioo is t;M to copy tt.e !loati.r.g p:,i.r.t dla~ to (l ) i.r.t~_ger:..
"50: = ~.: t;er valt: LSW f ,::,rr_ 1".: twork
K5 : l = ~ .et;,r valt: 1ISW t ,::,rr_ r:etwork
F8:4 = Pawr. : t;er Flrut i.r.g Poi.r.t valt:

B3:0
S=
O :!:.t
~g-th
,.p 3::4
,;,N50:0
1 6-60 Using Explicit Messaging
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

MicroLogix 1100/1400 Controller Explicit Messaging Using the Generic Get/Set Attribute Service
MicroLogix 1100/1400 Controller Example Ladder Logic Program to Read a Single Parameter
A Generic Get Attribute Single message is used to read a single parameter.

This read message example reads the value of parameter 003 - [Output Current] in a PowerFlex 7-Class drive.

Figure 6.74 Example Ladder Logic to Read a Single Parameter Execute Single
Read Message
B3:0
0 SingkEead Message
MSG----
Read/Write Message
MSG File MG13:0
Setup Screen < EN~ I DN)-
ER)-
Using Explicit Messaging 6-61
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

MicroLogix 1100/1400 Controller – Formatting a Message to Read a Single Parameter Using Generic Get/Set Attribute Service
Figure 6.75 Generic Get Attribute Single Message Configuration Screens The following table identifies the data that is required in each box to configure a message to read a single parameter.

General Tab Example Value Description
Channel
Comm… Command
Data Table Address
Size in Bytes
Extended Routing…
Service (1)
Class
Instance (2)
Attribute
1 CIP Generic
N40:0
4 (3)
RIX15:0
Generic Get Attribute Single
93 or 9F (Hex.)
(4)
3 (Dec.)
9 (Dec.)
Controller port to which the network is connected.

Used to access the Parameter Object in the adapter.

An unused controller data table address containing the message instruction. This address is the starting word of the destination file.

Number of bytes to be transferred. Each byte size is an 8-bit integer.

An unused routing information file for the controller.

Code for the requested service.

Class ID for the DPI Parameter Object.

Instance number is the same as the parameter number.

Attribute number for the Parameter Value attribute.

MultiHop Tab Example Value Description
To Address 10.91.100.79 IP address of the adapter connected to the drive. (1) The default setting for Service is ‘Custom’, enabling entry of a Service Code not available from the Service pull-down menu. When choosing a Service other than ‘Custom’ from the pull-down menu, an appropriate Hex. value is automatically assigned to the Service Code box which is dimmed (unavailable).
(2) The instance is the parameter number in the drive (Port 0). For example, to read parameter 4 of a peripheral in Port 5 of a PowerFlex 750-Series drive, the instance would be 21504 + 4 = 21508. See DPI Parameter Object on page C-16 (Class code 0x93) or Host DPI Parameter Object on page C-30 (Class code 0x9F) to determine the instance number. (3) In this example, Output Current is a 32-bit integer parameter requiring the Size in Bytes field to be set to ‘4’. If the parameter being read is a 16-bit integer, the Size in Bytes must be set to ‘2’. When using a PowerFlex 700S or PowerFlex 750-Series drive, Output Current is a floating point number requiring the Size in Bytes to be set to ‘4’. See the drive documentation to determine the size of the parameter and its data type (16-bit or 32-bit integer or REAL).
(4) See Table 6.A on page 6-2 for limitations of PowerFlex 7-Class and PowerFlex 750-Series drives when using DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x9F for explicit messaging. 0 MSG - MG13:0 : (1 Elements) l'J[gj~
General [~.-~!\l_~_?_~_-_1J Send Data J Receive Data I
lns=AddHop Del= Remove Hop
FromPort ToAdd1essT e To Address
Channel 1 ElherNet/lP Device (!!!] 10.91.100. 79
0 MSG - MG13:0 : (1 Elements) l'J§~
-----------------------------
,-_~_-i0.ii~.rn MultiHop I Send Data I Receive Data I
This Controller--------------~
Channel: 11 (Integral)
Communication Command: 1.aCla,Pa,Gaa'"aa••aaic ______ ~ Data Table Address (Receive] ~
Size in Bytes (Receive] ~ [Send): ~
Target Device----- _- _- _- _- _- _- _- _- _-----~
Message Timeout: 1~33~--~
Local/ Remote: !Local I MultiHop: ~
E>ttended Routing Info File[RIX): ~
Service: I Generic Get Attribute Single I Service Code [hei-:J: ~ Class[he,J ~ [dee), [j]zJ
Instance [he:,;): ~ (dee}: ~
Attribute [hex): ~ (dee): ~
[ E"" Dm,,plioo
oerro,s
Control Bits-----~ ,
lgno,e if timed out [TO): I[]
Break Connection (BK): I[]
Awaiting EKecution (EW): I[]
Error[EAJ:[QJ
Message done (DNJ: []
Message Transmitting (ST): I[]
Message Enabled [EN): I[]
6-62 Using Explicit Messaging
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

MicroLogix 1100/1400 Controller Example Get Attribute Single Response Data In this message example, we use the data table address in Figure 6.76 to store the response value (0.13 amps) that was read from drive parameter 003 - [Output Current]. To determine the data type for the parameter and its required scaling, see the specific drive documentation.

Figure 6.76 Example Get Attribute Single Response Data File Figure 6.77 shows example ladder logic to correctly format the three possible data types for read messages in the MicroLogix 1100/1400 controller.

Figure 6.77 Example Ladder Logic to Format Parameter Data Types for Gets For 16-bit Integer
Parameters – All
PowerFlex 7-Class
Drives
For 32-bit Integer
Parameters – All
PowerFlex 7-Class
Drives
For 32-bit REAL
(Floating Point)
Parameters –
PowerFlex 700S
and PowerFlex
750-Series Drives
:CN::4::0:=0===================~ Radix:I Decimal ..:]
S,Ymbol: Columns:~
Desc: ~----------------------------~
r.:;:;;:;-..:.,J
I''"° ..:..J
A 16 bit i.r.te•a:r .eta:r. th <llitai will be i.r. l\ :0 MOV ---~
Mov,a
Sou,ce N :0
-142.54<
N41:0
-142.54<
iTt ~: i:- r.1' 32 bit ir.t-:g-=:rs ir. tt: ldia,N.-Ogix: :.o tt ':! &ts. f:1TJ1:.i:r.:-sp lit i:r.to (2) 16-bit ir.t+::g,::G.

N · :0 = ~ .eta:< v.;.li;a LS.W forr. r.etw<>rt:
l\40 : l = P-.a=. eta:r v. li;a US.W iorr. r.et\•·<>11:
l\41 :l = P-.a=. eta:r V,ili;a LS.W
N41:3 = ~ .eta:r v.;.li;a US.\\"
COP
Copy File
Solli!Ce
D:!:..t
l.eru.g&.
:;N :0
,;N41:2
2 ['o r~~ i fio.itir._g; poir.t ti.g corr<:!l: tty = ct: CP,\" ir.5-trlAtioc. i:- 1;.~ to copy tl:: &ti to i fio.itir._g poir.t.

N · :0 = ~ .eta:r v.;.li;a LS.W fo,r. r.et\;·oo:
l\40 : l = P-.a=.eta:r v. li;a US.W iorr. r.et\,·01k
F 3:3 = P=eta:r F lo.ti.r . .i:; Poi.r.t v.;.li;a
C'PW ---~
Copy Wort!
Souc<oe
D::;c
l.er,,gtl!,
:;N :0
:;F &:3
2 Using Explicit Messaging 6-63
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

MicroLogix 1100/1400 Controller Example Ladder Logic Program to Write a Single Parameter Using Generic Get/Set Attribute Service
A Generic Set Attribute Single message is used to write to a single parameter. This write message example writes a value to parameter 140 - [Accel Time 1] in a PowerFlex 7-Class drive.

Figure 6.78 Example Ladder Logic to Write a Single Parameter Execute Single
Write Message
B3:0
Single Write Message
MSG----~
Read/Write Message
MSG File MG14:0
Setup Screen <
EN~ DN>-
ER>-
6-64 Using Explicit Messaging
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

MicroLogix 1100/1400 Controller – Formatting a Message to Write a Single Parameter Using Generic Get/Set Attribute Service
Figure 6.79 Generic Set Attribute Single Message Configuration Screens The following table identifies the data that is required in each box to configure a message to write a single parameter.

General Tab Example Value Description
Channel
Comm… Command
Data Table Address
Size in Bytes
Extended Routing…
Service (1)
Class
Instance (2)
Attribute (3)
1 CIP Generic
N50:0
2 (4)
RIX16:0
Generic Set Attribute Single
93 or 9F (Hex.)
(5)
140 (Dec.)
9 or 10 (Dec.)
Controller port to which the network is connected.

Used to access the Parameter Object in the adapter.

An unused controller data table address containing the message instruction. This address is the starting word of the destination file.

Number of bytes to be transferred. Each byte size is an 8-bit integer.

An unused routing information file for the controller.

Code for the requested service.

Class ID for the DPI Parameter Object.

Instance number is the same as the parameter number.

Attribute number for the Parameter Value attribute.

MultiHop Tab Example Value Description
To Address 10.91.100.79 IP address of the adapter connected to the drive. (1) The default setting for Service is ‘Custom’, enabling entry of a Service Code not available from the Service pull-down menu. When choosing a Service other than ‘Custom’ from the pull-down menu, an appropriate Hex. value is automatically assigned to the Service Code box which is dimmed (unavailable).
(2) The instance is the parameter number in the drive (Port 0). For example, to write to parameter 4 of a peripheral in Port 5 of a PowerFlex 750-Series drive, the instance would be 21504 + 4 = 21508. See DPI Parameter Object on page C-16 (Class code 0x93) or Host DPI Parameter Object on page C-30 (Class code 0x9F) to determine the instance number. (3) Setting the Attribute value to ‘9’ will write the parameter value to the drive’s Nonvolatile Storage (EEPROM) memory, which retains the parameter value even after the drive is power cycled. Important: When set to ‘9’, the EEPROM may quickly exceed its life cycle and cause the drive to malfunction. Setting the Attribute value to ‘10’ will write the parameter value to temporary memory, which deletes the parameter value after the drive is power cycled. When frequent write messages are required, we recommend using the ‘10’ setting. (4) In this example, Accel Time 1 is a 16-bit integer parameter requiring the Size in Bytes field to be set to ‘2’. If the parameter being written to is a 32-bit integer, the Size in Bytes must be set to ‘4’. When using a PowerFlex 700S or PowerFlex 750-Series drive, Accel Time 1 is a floating point number requiring the Size in Bytes to be set to ‘4’. See the drive documentation to determine the size of the parameter and its data type (16-bit or 32-bit integer or REAL).
(5) See Table 6.A on page 6-2 for limitations of PowerFlex 7-Class and PowerFlex 750-Series drives when using DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x9F for explicit messaging. 0 MSG - MG14:0 : (1 Elements) l"J[gj[gj
General L~.~-!~.\~_?_e.-.11 Send Data I Receive Data 1
Ins =Add Hop Del= Remove Hop
From Port To Address T e To Address
Channel 1 EthesNet/lP Device~ 10.91.100.79
0 MSG - MG14:0: (1 Elements) ~[gj~
-----------------------------
r·~--~~~-i-~.iJI MulliHop I Send Data I Receive Data I
This Controller--------------~
Channel: 11 [Integral)
Communication Command l~C~IP~G~•n~•'~ic_~~~---
1S endJ ~
Size in B}'tes [Receive): ~ (Send): ~
Target Device--------------~
Message Timeout: 1~33~--~
Local/ Remote: !Local I MultiHop· ~
Extended Routing Info File(AIX): ~
Service: I Generic Set Attribute Single I Service Code (he:,:): ~ Class(hex) ~ [dee): ~
Instance (hex) KJ [dee): ~
Attribute (hex) ~ [dee): ~
[ '"o' Desc,,phon
No errors
ControlBits-----~ I
Ignore if timed out (TO):[[]
Break Connection [BK):[[]
Awaiting Execution (EW): [[]
Error (ER]:[[]
Message done [ON]: II]
Message Transmitting [ST):[)
Message Enabled (EN):[)
Error-------, 1
ErrorCode(HeM): 0
7 Using Explicit Messaging 6-65
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

MicroLogix 1100/1400 Controller Example Set Attribute Single Request Data In this message example, we use the data table address in Figure 6.80 to store the request value (10.0 sec.) that was written to drive parameter 140 - [Accel Time 1]. To determine the data type for the parameter and its required scaling, see the specific drive documentation.

Figure 6.80 Example Set Attribute Single Request Data File Figure 6.81 shows example ladder logic to correctly format the three possible data types for write messages in the MicroLogix 1100/1400 controller.

Figure 6.81 Example Ladder Logic to Format Parameter Data Types for Sets For 16-bit Integer
Parameters – All
PowerFlex 7-Class
Drives
For 32-bit Integer
Parameters – All
PowerFlex 7-Class
Drives
For 32-bit REAL
(Floating Point)
Parameters –
PowerFlex 700S
and PowerFlex
750-Series Drives
:':N::50:::0:::::====================; Radid Decimal ..:J Symbol· Columns: ~
Desc: ~---------------------------~
5 r;;;;;;;-....:..J I" "' ....:..J

MOV -----,
Mo.~
S.ou.ro~ N51:0
1234<
N50:0
1K
TI:;,r~ i; r.o DIKT <!:a[.,[)~ i.r. tl:~ 1 Ii.croLo_gix, ;,o to writ~ tl:~ <!:at. w~ will ~~ (l ) 16 bit i.r.t~_g;,n .

K5 l:1 = P=.:ti!r val~ LSW
K5U = P=.:t;er val~ MSW
K50: = P=.~t;,r val~ LSW to r.~twM :

K50:l = P=.:ti!r val~ MSW to r.~twM:

B3:0 OOP
Copy File
8-0lkfC1:!
D~;t
~ _g-th
,;,N51:2
,;N50:0
2 To writ~ a lloatir._g poi.r.t ta_g coo-~:tly, It.: CPW i.r.mv=tior. i; ~~ to copy th lloatir._g poi.r.:t dlata to (1) ir.t~_ger:..

K50: = P=.~t;,r val~ LSW :5-o:rr. r.: rwort;
K50:l = P=.:ti!r val~ 1ISW :5-o:rr. r.: rwort;
F8:4 = Parao:: t;,r Flo.rti.r.g Poi.r.t val~
B3:0
7 CPW -----,
Copy \\ord
Scum;,
D :!s-t
L~_gth
,;F8:4
,;N50:0
2 6-66 Using Explicit Messaging
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

MicroLogix 1100/1400 Controller – Explanation of Request and Response Data for Read/Write Multiple Messaging
The data structures in Figure 6.82 and Figure 6.83 use 16-bit words and can accommodate up to 22 parameters in a single message. In the Response Message, a parameter number with the high bit set indicates that the associated parameter value field contains an error code (parameter number in response data will be negative).

Important: See Table 6.A on page 6-2
for limitations of PowerFlex 7-Class
and PowerFlex 750-Series drives when using Class code 0x93 or Class code 0x9F for explicit messaging.

Figure 6.82 Data Structures for Scattered Read Messages Figure 6.83 Data Structures for Scattered Write Messages Request (Source Data) Response (Destination Data)
Word 0 Parameter Number Word 0 Parameter Number
1 Pad Word 1 Parameter Value LSW
2 Pad Word 2 Parameter Value MSW
3 Parameter Number 3 Parameter Number
4 Pad Word 4 Parameter Value LSW
5 Pad Word 5 Parameter Value MSW
6 Parameter Number 6 Parameter Number
7 Pad Word 7 Parameter Value LSW
8 Pad Word 8 Parameter Value MSW
9 Parameter Number 9 Parameter Number
10 Pad Word 10 Parameter Value LSW
11 Pad Word 11 Parameter Value MSW
12 Parameter Number 12 Parameter Number
13 Pad Word 13 Parameter Value LSW
14 Pad Word 14 Parameter Value MSW
...
...
63 Parameter Number 63 Parameter Number
64 Pad Word 64 Parameter Value LSW
65 Pad Word 65 Parameter Value MSW
Request (Source Data) Response (Destination Data)
Word 0 Parameter Number Word 0 Parameter Number
1 Parameter Value LSW 1 Pad Word
2 Parameter Value MSW 2 Pad Word
3 Parameter Number 3 Parameter Number
4 Parameter Value LSW 4 Pad Word
5 Parameter Value MSW 5 Pad Word
6 Parameter Number 6 Parameter Number
7 Parameter Value LSW 7 Pad Word
8 Parameter Value MSW 8 Pad Word
9 Parameter Number 9 Parameter Number
10 Parameter Value LSW 10 Pad Word
11 Parameter Value MSW 11 Pad Word
12 Parameter Number 12 Parameter Number
13 Parameter Value LSW 13 Pad Word
14 Parameter Value MSW 14 Pad Word
...
...
63 Parameter Number 63 Parameter Number
64 Parameter Value LSW 64 Pad Word
65 Parameter Value MSW 65 Pad Word
Using Explicit Messaging 6-67
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

MicroLogix 1100/1400 Controller Example Ladder Logic Program to Read Multiple Parameters Using Generic Get/Set Attribute Service
A Custom scattered read message is used to read the values of multiple parameters. This read message example reads the values of these five parameters.

See DPI Parameter Object on page C-16 (Class code 0x93) or Host DPI Parameter Object on page C-30 (Class code 0x9F) for parameter numbering.

Important: See Table 6.A on page 6-2 for limitations of PowerFlex 7-Class and PowerFlex 750-Series drives when using DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x9F for explicit messaging.

Figure 6.84 Example Ladder Logic to Read Multiple Parameters PowerFlex 7-Class Drive PowerFlex 750-Series Drive
 Parameter 001 - [Output Freq]
 Parameter 003 - [Output Current]
 Parameter 006 - [Output Voltage]
 Parameter 012 - [DC Bus Voltage]
 Parameter 017 - [Analog In1 Value]
 Parameter 001 - [Output Freq]
 Parameter 007 - [Output Current]
 Parameter 137 - [Open Loop Fdbk]
 Parameter 21581 - [Port 5: Analog Out 0 Data]
 Parameter 260 - [Analog In0 Value]
Execute Scattered
Read Message
B3:0
2 Scattered Read
Message
MSG ----
Read/Write Message
MSG File MGl 7:0
Setup Screen <
EN~ DN>-
ER>-
6-68 Using Explicit Messaging
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

MicroLogix 1100/1400 Controller – Formatting a Message to Read Multiple Parameters Using Generic Get/Set Attribute Service
Figure 6.85 Custom Scattered Read Message Configuration Screens The following table identifies the data that is required in each box to configure a message to read multiple parameters.

General Tab Example Value Description
Channel
Comm… Command
Data Table Address
Size in Bytes
Extended Routing…
Service (1)
Service Code
Class
Instance
Attribute
1 CIP Generic
N60:0
30 (2)
RIX19:0
Custom
4B (Hex.)
93 or 9F (Hex.)
(3)
0 (Dec.)
0 (Dec.)
Controller port to which the network is connected.

Used to access the Parameter Object in the adapter.

An unused controller data table address containing the message instruction. This address is the starting word of the destination file.

Number of bytes to be transferred. Each byte size is an 8-bit integer.

An unused routing information file for the controller.

Required for scattered messages.

Code for the requested service.

Class ID for the DPI Parameter Object.

Required for scattered messages.

MultiHop Tab Example Value Description
To Address 10.91.100.79 IP address of the adapter connected to the drive. (1) The default setting for Service is ‘Custom’, enabling entry of a Service Code not available from the Service pull-down menu. When choosing a Service other than ‘Custom’ from the pull-down menu, an appropriate Hex. value is automatically assigned to the Service Code box which is dimmed (unavailable).
(2) In this example, we are reading five parameters. Each parameter being read requires three contiguous 16-bit words. Scattered read messages always assume that every parameter being read is a 32-bit integer, regardless of its actual data type. Therefore, the Size in Bytes must be set to 30. The data structure format is the same as shown on page 6-66. Maximum length is 66 words (132 bytes), which equates to 22 parameters. For parameter numbering, see DPI Parameter Object on page C-16 (Class code 0x93) or Host DPI Parameter Object on page C-30 (Class code 0x9F).
(3) See Table 6.A on page 6-2 for limitations of PowerFlex 7-Class and PowerFlex 750-Series drives when using DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x9F for explicit messaging. 0 MSG - MG17:0: (1 Elements) l'J[gjr8)
lns=AddHop Del= Remove Hop
From Port
homo thei:Ne
0 MSG - MG17:0 : (1 Elements) ~[gj r8)
L~:~·0.ii.~.rn MultiHop I Send Data I Receive Data I
This Controller--------------~
Channel: 11 [Integral)
Communication Command: leac1 .. P .. G .. ,n .. e, .. ic~~-=--..---, DataTableAddress(Receive) ~ [Send):~
Size in Bytes (Receive) ~ [Send): ~
Target Device-----~- -- _- _- _- _- _- _- ~-----~
Message Timeout: 1=33~--~
Local/ Remote: ~ MultiHop: ~
E:-itended Routing Info File{AIX): ~
Service: !custom I Service Code {he>-:): ~
Class [hei-:J: ~ (dee): Iii[]
Instance [hei-:): ~ (dee): rn:=J
Attribute [hei-:): ~ (dee): rn::=J
[ ,,,o, Oesc,iphon
No errors
Control Bits-----~ ,
Ignore if timed out [TO):[]
Break Connection (BK]:[]
Awaiting EKecution [EW): []
Error [EA):[]
Message done [DN): []
Message Transmitting (ST):[]
Message Enabled [EN):[]
Error-------~ ,
Error Code[He:-:): 0
7 Using Explicit Messaging 6-69
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

MicroLogix 1100/1400 Controller Example Scattered Read Request Data In this message example, we use the data table addresses in Figure 6.86 or Figure 6.87 to store the request values to be read from these drive parameters.

See DPI Parameter Object on page C-16 (Class code 0x93) or Host DPI Parameter Object on page C-30 (Class code 0x9F) for parameter numbering.

Figure 6.86 Example Scattered Read Request Data File for PowerFlex 7-Class Drive Figure 6.87 Example Scattered Read Request Data File for PowerFlex 750-Series Drive MicroLogix 1100/1400 Controller Example Scattered Read Response Data In this message example, we use the data table addresses in Figure 6.88 or
Figure 6.89 to store the response values that were read from the requested drive parameters.

Figure 6.88 Example Scattered Read Response Data File for PowerFlex 7-Class Drive PowerFlex 7-Class Drive PowerFlex 750-Series Drive
 Parameter 001 - [Output Freq]
 Parameter 003 - [Output Current]
 Parameter 006 - [Output Voltage]
 Parameter 012 - [DC Bus Voltage]
 Parameter 017 - [Analog In1 Value]
 Parameter 001 - [Output Freq]
 Parameter 007 - [Output Current]
 Parameter 137 - [Open Loop Fdbk]
 Parameter 21581 - [Port 5: Analog Out 0 Data]
 Parameter 260 - [Analog In0 Value]
N70:0 Radix: I Decimal ...:J
Symbol:::=====================~ Columns: ~
Desc: '--------------------------------'
JN"7o ::1 E1operties I ~ ~
70 : 10 260
ill ill
;:N:::7::0:0==================== :C: Radix:j Decimal ...:J Symbol: Columns:~
Desc: ~---------------------------~
r.:m;- ...:.J
J' "v ...:.J
ill ill
N60:0 Rad;d Decimal ..:J
Symbol·;::::====================~ Columns:~
Desc: '--------------------------------'
fN'6o ::1 E10perties I ~ ~
6-70 Using Explicit Messaging
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

In this example, the parameters have the following values.

Figure 6.89 Example Scattered Read Response Data File for PowerFlex 750-Series Drive
The PowerFlex 750-Series drive uses 32-bit integer and REAL parameters.

A COP or CPW command must be used to copy the N60 integer array to a 16-bit integer or floating tag. Figure 6.90 shows the ladder logic used for this example. If the parameter data type is a 32-bit integer, the data remains split into two 16-bit integers because there are no 32-bit integers in the MicroLogix 1100/1400 controller. If the parameter data type is a REAL, then the destination tag is a floating point. See the drive documentation to determine the parameter data type (32-bit integer or REAL).

Figure 6.90 Example Ladder Logic to Copy Response Data for PowerFlex 750-Series Drive
PowerFlex 7-Class Drive Parameter Address Read Value
1 - [Output Freq] N60:1 32.5 Hz
3 - [Output Current] N60:4 0.01 Amp
6 - [Output Voltage] N60:7 118.7V AC
12 - [DC Bus Voltage] N60:10 329.2V DC
17 - [Analog In2 Value] N60:13 8.318 mA
Parameter 137 -
[Open Loop Fdbk]
PowerFlex
750-Series Drives
Parameter 001 -
[Output Freq]
.!.LJ ill
::CN::60:::0::::::=====================: Radi:,d Decimal ..:J Symbol Columns:~
Desc: ~ ---------------------------~
r;;;:;:;-..,:J
l"uu ...:.J
.~e i;, !:ll 31 bit i:r.t~g= i:r. 11:~ U iaoL-0gix, ;,I) 11:~ <!l..t:e. r;,ir.,;.if:;, ;,plit i:r.to (1) 15-bit er; .
:- = P=.~te,r v..tir- LSW iO:IT. i:~cwoit
: 8: = P=.: te,r v;.lir- USV,: iO:IT. r.:cwort:

K -:1 = PE.l= ~te,r v;.lir- LSW
K- :3 = PE.l=:te,r v;.lir- USW
COP
Copy File
S=
D:;,t
Length
" :7
::; :2
'I'o rew .. !lo..ti.!:g ])lli:r.t r..g corr;cctly, 11:: CPW i.!:;r:nx:tior. i; ~~ to copy 11:: dl..r.. to .. !lo..ti.!:g ])lli:r.t.

K : 13 = P=.:te,r v;.lir- LSW ion: i::t woik
K. :14 = P=.~te,r v;.lir- 1\!SW i •= · i:~cwoit
FS:: 5 = PE.l=:te,r Flo,;,ti:r.g Poi.!:t v;.lir-
CP,\
Copy Woo!
S=
D:;,t
l.engtll.
,;N ,. :13
,;F&:.5
2:

Using Explicit Messaging 6-71
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

In this message example, the parameters have the following values.

MicroLogix 1100/1400 Controller Example Ladder Logic Program to Write Multiple Parameters Using Generic Get/Set Attribute Service
A Custom scattered write message is used to write to multiple parameters.

This write message example writes the following values to these five parameters.

See DPI Parameter Object on page C-16 (Class code 0x93) or Host DPI Parameter Object on page C-30 (Class code 0x9F) for parameter numbering.

Important: See Table 6.A on page 6-2 for limitations of PowerFlex 7-Class and PowerFlex 750-Series drives when using DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x9F for explicit messaging.

Figure 6.91 Example Ladder Logic to Write Multiple Parameters Important: If the explicit message scattered write must be written continuously, then use a separate Generic Set service explicit message single write for each parameter using DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x9F and attribute A (10 decimal; see page 6-64
).

Attribute A writes to RAM—not NVS (EEPROM) memory.

This example scattered write message using attribute 0 writes to NVS. Over time, continuous writes will exceed the EEPROM life cycle and cause the drive to malfunction.

PowerFlex 750-Series Drive Parameter Read Value Data Type 1 - [Output Freq] 45.0 Hz REAL
7 - [Output Current] 0.03 Amp REAL
137 - [Open Loop Fdbk] 3055441 DINT
21581 - [Port 5: Analog Out 0 Data] 45.0 Hz REAL
260 - [Analog In0 Value] 9.377 Volts REAL
PowerFlex 7-Class
Drive Parameter
Write Value PowerFlex 750-Series
Drive Parameter
Write Value
141 - [Accel Time 2] 11.1 Sec. 536 - [Accel Time 2] 11.1 Sec. 143 - [Decel Time 2] 22.2 Sec. 538 - [Decel Time 2] 22.2 Sec. 105 - [Preset Speed 5] 33.3 Hz. 725 - [Zero Position] 33 106 - [Preset Speed 6] 44.4 Hz. 21555 - [Port 5: Analog In0 Hi] 5.5 107 - [Preset Speed 7] 55.5 Hz. 780 - [PTP Setpoint] -75,555 Execute Scattered
Write Messa~
B3:0
Scattered Write
Message
MSG----~
Read/Write Message
MSG File MGl8 :0
Setup Screen <
EN~ DN>-
ER>-
6-72 Using Explicit Messaging
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

MicroLogix 1100/1400 Controller – Formatting a Message to Write Multiple Parameters Using Generic Get/Set Attribute Service
Figure 6.92 Custom Scattered Write Multiple Message Configuration Screens The following table identifies the data that is required in each box to configure a message to write multiple parameters.

General Tab Example Value Description
Channel
Comm… Command
Data Table Address
Size in Bytes
Extended Routing…
Service
(1)
Service Code
Class
Instance
Attribute
1 CIP Generic
N80:0
30 (2)
RIX21:0
Custom
4C (Hex.)
93 or 9F (Hex.)
(3)
0 (Dec.)
0 (Dec.)
Controller port to which the network is connected.

Used to access the Parameter Object in the adapter.

An unused controller data table address containing the message instruction. This address is the starting word of the destination file.

Number of bytes to be transferred. Each byte size is an 8-bit integer.

An unused routing information file for the controller.

Required for scattered messages.

Code for the requested service.

Class ID for the DPI Parameter Object.

Required for scattered messages.

Scattered write messages always assume that every parameter being written to is a 32-bit integer, regardless of its actual data type. Therefore, the Size in Bytes must be set to 30. The data structure format is the same as shown on page 6-12 . Maximum
length is 66 words (132 bytes), which equates to 22 parameters. For parameter numbering, see DPI Parameter Object on page C-16 (Class code 0x93) or Host DPI Parameter Object on page C-30 (Class code 0x9F). (3) See Table 6.A on page 6-2 for limitations of PowerFlex 7-Class and PowerFlex 750-Series drives when using DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x9F for explicit messaging. ;~ MSG · MG18:0: (1 Elements) G]@J[R)
General L~-~!~!-~-~-P.JI Send Data I Receive Data I
ln:s:=AddHop Del= Remove Hop
FromPort ToAddressT e To Address
Chanriel EtherNet/1P: Device (str:l 10.91.100.79
;_:. MSG MG18:0 : (1 Elements) l'J©J~
f_§_~:~~i~.rn MultiHop I Send Data I Receive Data I
This Controller
Channel: 11 (Integral)
Data Table Address (Receive)
Size in Bytes (Receive): ~
Target Device------~~~~~~~~-----~
Message Timeout: ~133~--~
Local/ Remote: ~ MultiHop· ~
EKtended Routing Info File[RIX): ~
Service: !Custom I Service Code [heK): ~
Class [heK): ~ (dee): IT£]
Instance [heK): ~ (dee): ~
Altribute[heK): ~ (dee): ~
Control Bits
Ignore if timed out [TO): [QJ
Break Connection (BK): [QJ
Awaiting EKecution (EW): [QJ
Error[ER):[Q]
Message done (DN): II]
Message Transmitting (ST): [QJ
Message Enabled [EN), IQ] I
Erro,-------~ 1
Error Code[Hex): 0
Using Explicit Messaging 6-73
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

MicroLogix 1100/1400 Controller Example Scattered Write Request Data In this message example, we use the data table addresses in Figure 6.93 to store the request values to be written to these drive parameters.

See DPI Parameter Object on page C-16 (Class code 0x93) or Host DPI Parameter Object on page C-30 (Class code 0x9F) for parameter numbering.

Figure 6.93 or Figure 6.96 shows the parameter values.

Figure 6.93 Example Scattered Write Request Data File for PowerFlex 7-Class Drive MicroLogix 1100/1400 Controller Example Scattered Write Response Data In this message example, we use the data table addresses in Figure 6.94 to
store the response values that were written to the requested drive parameters. Values of ‘0’ indicate no errors occurred.

Figure 6.94 Example Scattered Write Response Data File for PowerFlex 7-Class Drive The PowerFlex 750-Series drive uses 32-bit integer and REAL parameters.

A COP or CPW command must be used to copy the 16-bit integer or REAL values to the N90 integer array. Figure 6.95 shows the ladder logic used for this example. If the parameter data type is a 32-bit integer, the data remains split into two 16-bit integers since there are no 32-bit integers in the PowerFlex 7-Class
Drive Parameter
Address Write Value PowerFlex 750-Series
Drive Parameter
Write Value Data Type
141 - [Accel Time 2] N90:1 11.1 Sec. 536 - [Accel Time 2] 11.1 Sec. REAL 143 - [Decel Time 2] N90:4 22.2 Sec. 538 - [Decel Time 2] 22.2 Sec. REAL 105 - [Preset Speed 5] N90:7 33.3 Hz. 725 - [Zero Position] 33 32-bit integer 106 - [Preset Speed 6] N90:10 44.4 Hz. 21555 - [Port 5: Analog In0 Hi] 5.5 REAL 107 - [Preset Speed 7] N90:13 55.5 Hz. 780 - [PTP Setpoint] -75,555 32-bit integer .!.LJ ill
:C:N:':90':'::0'::::::=====================: Radix:jDecimal ...:J Symbol: Columns:~
Desc: ~---------------------------~
r,:;;;;;-..,:J
I""" ...:J
.!.LJ ill
N80:0 Radix: I Decimal ..:J
Symbol:;:::::====================:::; Columns:~
Desc: ~---------------------------~
r.:;;;;;-..,:J
I""° ...:.J
6-74 Using Explicit Messaging
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

MicroLogix 1100/1400 controller. If the parameter data type is a REAL, then the source tag is a floating point. See the drive documentation to determine the parameter data type (32-bit integer or REAL).

Figure 6.95 Example Ladder Logic to Copy Request Data for PowerFlex 750-Series Drive
Figure 6.96 Example Scattered Write Request Data File f or PowerFlex 750-Series Drive The results of the explicit message appear in the destination tag array N80 (Figure 6.65). Values of ‘0’ indicate no errors occurred.

Figure 6.97 Example Scattered Write Response Data File for PowerFlex 750-Series Drive
Parameter 780 -
[PTP Setpoint]
PowerFlex
750-Series Drives
Parameter 536 -
[Accel Time 2]
[I'l:;,re i, r.o DIKT <lia~typ: i.r. cl:-: Mi.aoLo_g ix, ;o co write tl".: <l;;.~ we will ~ ~ (l ) 16 bit ~,.r[':!_g-=F:..
·- : 5 = Pa.rr.:ter vi!.IV- LS.W
K - : 6 = Pa.rr. ~ter vi!.IV- US.W
1 · _ D:13 = Pai= : ter v;.IV- LS.W to i:.: tw01t
•. D:14 = P'a=: ter vi!.IV- MS.W co r.:tw0!1:

OOP
Coj)J· File
S=e
D~;t
l.eru_gtl!,
,;N7:.5
=.N_· :13
2 o write a lloatii:._g poi.r.t ~_g c=~t ly, ll:: CPW i.r.;cro::c~c,r. is ~.e<! co copy ll:: lloacii:._g poi.r.t &l.t:!. to {l ) ii:.te_g= .

FR:: = Pa.rr.:ter Floacii:._g Poi.r.t vi!.IV-
K. D: l "' Pa.rr. : ter Vi.IV- LS.'\\" forr. r.: tw01t
•. D:.l "' P=.:ter vi!.IV-MSW torr. i:.: tw01t
90 : 10 0 16560 780 - 100 19 - 2
S=e
D~;t
l.eru_gtl!,
=.F &:,15
,;NOO:l
2 ~ ~
;:N:::9::0:=0===================~ Aadix: jDecimal ..:J
Symbol: Columns: ~
Desc: ~----------------------------~
won..:.J l" "v ..:.J
N80:0 Radi:,d Decimal ...:J
S_ymbol:;::::====================~ Columns: ~
Desc: ~---------------------------~
(Nao :J _Eroperties I ~ ~
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
This chapter provides information for diagnosing and troubleshooting potential problems with the adapter and network.

Understanding the Status
Indicators
The adapter has four status indicators. They can be viewed on the adapter or through the drive cover.

Topic Page
Understanding the Status Indicators 7-1
PORT Status Indicator 7-2
MOD Status Indicator 7-2
NET A Status Indicator 7-3
NET B Status Indicator 7-3
Viewing Adapter Diagnostic Items 7-4
Viewing and Clearing Events 7-6
Item Indicator Name Description See
➊ PORT DPI Connection Status page 7-2
➋ MOD Adapter Status page 7-2
➌ NET A EtherNet/IP Connection Status page 7-3
➍ NET B EtherNet/IP Transmit Status page 7-3
➊
➋
➌
➍
➊
➋
➌
➍
Location on
drive may vary.
0 0
~c
111!11~ I
~c
---- lrn
r __ ______..)J
0 00000
00000
00000
00000
00000
0 @ Allen-Bradley
7-2 Troubleshooting
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

PORT Status Indicator This red/green bicolor LED indicates the status of the adapter’s connection to the drive as shown in the table below.

MOD Status Indicator This red/green bicolor LED indicates the status of the adapter as shown in the table below.

Status Cause Corrective Action
Off The adapter is not powered or is not properly
connected to the drive.
 Securely connect the adapter to the drive using the Internal Interface (ribbon) cable.
 Apply power to the drive (or adapter if mounted in a DPI External Comms Kit).

Flashing Red The adapter is not receiving a ping message from the drive.
 Verify that cables are securely connected and not damaged.

Replace cables if necessary.
 Cycle power to the drive (or adapter if mounted in a DPI External Comms Kit).

Steady Red The drive has refused an I/O connection from the adapter.

Another DPI peripheral is using the same DPI port
as the adapter.

Important: Cycle power to the drive (or adapter if mounted in a DPI External Comms Kit) after making any of the following corrections:
 Verify that all DPI cables on the drive are securely connected and not damaged. Replace cables if necessary.
 Verify that the DPI drive supports Datalinks.
 Configure the adapter to use a Datalink that is not already being used by another peripheral.

Steady Orange The adapter is connected to a product that does not support Allen-Bradley DPI communications.

Connect the adapter to a product that supports Allen-Bradley DPI communications (for example, a PowerFlex 7-Class drive).

Flashing Green The adapter is establishing an I/O connection to the drive.

No action required. Normal behavior if no DPI I/O is enabled.

Steady Green The adapter is properly connected and is
communicating with the drive.

No action required.

Flashing Red The adapter has failed the firmware test.

The adapter firmware is being updated.
 Clear faults in the adapter.
 Cycle power to the drive (or adapter if mounted in a DPI External Comms Kit).
 If cycling power does not correct the problem, the adapter parameter settings may have been corrupted. Reset defaults and reconfigure the adapter.
 If resetting defaults does not correct the problem, update the adapter with the latest firmware revision.

Steady Red The adapter has failed the hardware test.  Cycle power to the drive (or adapter if mounted in a DPI External Comms Kit).
 Replace the adapter.

Flashing Green The adapter is operational, but is not transferring I/O data to a controller.
 Place the scanner in RUN mode.
 Program the controller to recognize and transmit I/O to the adapter.  Configure the adapter for the program in the controller.  Normal behavior if no DPI I/O is enabled.

Steady Green The adapter is operational and transferring I/O data to a controller.

No action required.

Troubleshooting 7-3
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

NET A Status Indicator This red/green bicolor LED indicates the status of the network connection as shown in the table below.

NET B Status Indicator This green LED indicates the status of the adapter transmitting on the network as shown in the table below.

Status Cause Corrective Actions
Off The adapter is not powered, the adapter is
not properly connected to the network, the
adapter needs an IP address, or BOOTP is
enabled.
 Securely connect the adapter to the drive using the Internal Interface (ribbon) cable and to the network using an Ethernet cable.  Correctly connect the Ethernet cable to the Ethernet connector.  Set a unique IP address and disable BOOTP using a BOOTP server, or set a unique IP address by using adapter parameters.  Apply power to the drive (or adapter if mounted in a DPI External Comms Kit).

Steady Red The adapter failed the duplicate IP address
detection test.

Configure the adapter to use a unique IP address and cycle power.

Flashing Red An EtherNet/IP connection has timed out.  Place the scanner in RUN mode, or apply power to the peer device that will send I/O.
 Check the IGMP Snooping/Ethernet Switches for correct operation.  Check the amount of traffic on the network.

Flashing Red/
Green
The adapter is performing a self-test. No action required.

Flashing Green The adapter is properly connected, has an IP address, and is connected to an EtherNet/IP
network but does not have an I/O connection.
 Place the controller in RUN mode, or apply power to the peer device that will send I/O.
 Program the controller or peer device to recognize and transmit I/O or make a messaging connection to the adapter.
 Configure the adapter for the program in the controller or the I/O from the peer device.

Steady Green The adapter is properly connected and
communicating on the network to a controller.

No action required.

Status Cause Corrective Actions
Off The adapter is not powered or is not
transmitting on the network.

If NET A indicator is off:
 Securely connect the adapter to the drive using the Internal Interface (ribbon) cable and to the network using an Ethernet cable.  Correctly connect the Ethernet cable to the Ethernet connector.  Set a unique IP address using a BOOTP server or by disabling BOOTP and using adapter parameters.

If NET A indicator is steady red:
 Configure the adapter to use a unique IP address and cycle power.

If NET A indicator is flashing red/green or red:
 Check the IP address in the adapter and scanner, and verify that the controller can communicate with the adapter.
 Ping the adapter.

Normal condition if the adapter is idle.

Flashing Green The adapter is properly connected, BOOTP is enabled, and the adapter is transmitting data
packets on the network.

No action required.
7-4 Troubleshooting
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

Viewing Adapter Diagnostic
Items
If you encounter unexpected communication problems, the adapter’s diagnostic items may help you or Rockwell Automation personnel troubleshoot the problem. Adapter diagnostic items can be viewed with any of these drive configuration tools:
 LCD PowerFlex 7-Class HIM (Diagnostics/Device Items)
 Connected Components Workbench software, version 1.02 or later  DriveExplorer software, version 2.01 or later
 DriveExecutive software, version 3.01 or later
Using the HIM to View Adapter Diagnostic Items

Step Example Screen

1. Access parameters in the adapter.

See Using the PowerFlex 7-Class HIM to Access Parameterson page 3-2.

2. Press the or key to scroll to Diagnostics .

3. Press the (Enter) key to display the Diagnostics menu in the adapter.

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to enter the Device Items option.

5. Press the or key to scroll through the items.

Table 7.A Adapter Diagnostic Items
No. Name Description
1 Common Logic Cmd The present value of the Common Logic Command being transmitted to the drive by this adapter.
2 Prod Logic Cmd The present value of the Product Logic Command being transmitted to the drive by this adapter from the controller.
3 Reference The present value of the Reference being transmitted to the drive by this adapter. Note that a 16-bit value will be sent as the Most Significant Word of the 32-bit field.
4 Common Logic Sts The present value of the Common Logic Status being received from the drive by this adapter.
5 Prod Logic Sts The present value of the Product Logic Status being received from the drive by this adapter to the controller.
6 Feedback The present value of the Feedback being received from the drive by this adapter. Note that a 16-bit value will be sent as the Most Significant Word of the 32-bit field.
7 Datalink A1 In The present value of respective Datalink In being transmitted to the drive by this adapter. (If not using a Datalink, this parameter should have a value of zero.)8 Datalink A2 In
9 Datalink B1 In
10 Datalink B2 In
11 Datalink C1 In
12 Datalink C2 In
13 Datalink D1 In
14 Datalink D2 In
Main Menu:

Diagnostics
Parameter
Device Select
Device Item # 3
Reference
0 0
C
0 0
Troubleshooting 7-5
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

15 Datalink A1 Out The present value of respective Datalink Out being received from the drive by this adapter. (If the drive indicates a 16-bit datalink size, the value appears in the least significant 16 bits of this diagnostic item, and the most significant 16 bits of this diagnostic item are zero.) 16 Datalink A2 Out
17 Datalink B1 Out
18 Datalink B2 Out
19 Datalink C1 Out
20 Datalink C2 Out
21 Datalink D1 Out
22 Datalink D2 Out
23 DPI Rx Errors The present value of the DPI Receive error counter. 24 DPI Rx Error Max The maximum value (since reset) of the DPI Receive error counter. 25 DPI Tx Errors The present value of the DPI Transmit error counter. 26 DPI Tx Error Max The maximum value (since reset) of the DPI Transmit error counter. 27 Boot Flash Count Number of times the boot firmware in the adapter has been updated. 28 App Flash Count Number of times the application firmware in the adapter has been updated.
29 M-S Input Size Size of data transferred from the network to the drive. 30 M-S Output Size Size of data transferred from the drive to the network. 31 32
33 34
35 36
HW Addr 1
HW Addr 2
HW Addr 3
HW Addr 4
HW Addr 5
HW Addr 6
Decimal value of each byte in the adapter’s Ethernet hardware address.
37 38
39 40
IP Addr Act 1
IP Addr Act 2
IP Addr Act 3
IP Addr Act 4
Value of each byte in the adapter’s present IP address. A value of ‘0’ appears if the adapter does not currently have an IP address. 41 42
43 44
Subnet Act 1
Subnet Act 2
Subnet Act 3
Subnet Act 4
Value of each byte in the adapter’s present subnet mask. A value of ‘0’ appears if the adapter does not currently have a subnet mask.

Table 7.A Adapter Diagnostic Items (Continued)
No. Name Description
255:255:255:255:255:255
[HW Addr 1]
[HW Addr 2]
[HW Addr 3]
[HW Addr 4]
HW Addr 5]
[HW Addr 6]
255.255.255.255
[IP Addr Act 1]
[IP Addr Act 2]
[IP Addr Act 3]
[IP Addr Act 4]
255.255.255.255
[Subnet Act 1]
[Subnet Act 2]
[Subnet Act 3]
[Subnet Act 4]
I I
I I
I I
7-6 Troubleshooting
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

Viewing and Clearing
Events
The adapter has an event queue to record significant events that occur in the operation of the adapter. When such an event occurs, an entry is put into the event queue. You can view the event queue with any of these drive configuration tools:
 LCD PowerFlex 7-Class HIM
 Connected Components Workbench software, version 1.02 or later  DriveExplorer software, version 2.01 or later
 DriveExecutive software, version 1.01 or later
The event queue can contain up to 32 entries. Eventually the event queue will become full, since its contents are retained after adapter resets. At that point, a new entry replaces the oldest entry. Only an event queue clear operation or adapter power cycle will clear the event queue contents.

Resetting the adapter to defaults has no effect on the event queue. 45 46
47 48
Gateway Act 1
Gateway Act 2
Gateway Act 3
Gateway Act 4
Value of each byte in the adapter’s present gateway address. A value of ‘0’ appears if the adapter does not currently have a gateway address.
49 EN Rx Overruns Number of receive buffer overruns reported by the Ethernet hardware.
50 EN Rx Packets Number of Ethernet packets that the adapter has received. 51 EN Rx Errors Number of receive errors reported by the Ethernet hardware. 52 EN Tx Packets Number of Ethernet packets that the adapter has sent. 53 EN Tx Errors Number of transmit errors reported by the Ethernet hardware. 54 Last TCP Reset Last reason that the adapter reset or rejected a TCP/IP connection. 55 Missed IO Pkts Number of incoming I/O connection packets that the adapter did not receive.
56 OPT Status The operating status of optional I/O board in DPI External Comms Kit. For the meanings of the individual bits, see Viewing Optional I/O Diagnostic Items on page 9-4.
57 OPT RX Errors Number of optional I/O board receive errors. 58 OPT FW Version Firmware version of optional I/O board (in DPI External Comms Kit).

Table 7.A Adapter Diagnostic Items (Continued)
No. Name Description
255.255.255.255
[Gateway Act 1]
[Gateway Act 2]
[Gateway Act 3]
[Gateway Act 4]
I I
Troubleshooting 7-7
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

Using the HIM to View and Clear Events
Events
Many events in the event queue occur under normal operation. If you encounter unexpected communication problems, the events may help you or Allen-Bradley personnel troubleshoot the problem. The following events may appear in the event queue.

Step Example Screen
Viewing Events

1. Access parameters in the adapter.

See Using the PowerFlex 7-Class HIM to Access Parameterson page 3-2.

2. Press the or key to scroll to Diagnostics .

3. Press the (Enter) key to display the Diagnostics menu in the adapter.

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to enter the Events option and then View Event Queue option.

5. Press the or key to scroll through events.

The most recent event is Event 1.

Clearing Events

1. Access parameters in the adapter.

See Using the PowerFlex 7-Class HIM to Access Parameters on
page 3-2.

2. Press the or key to scroll to Diagnostics .

3. Press the (Enter) key to display the Diagnostics menu in the adapter.

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to enter the Events option and then the Clear Event option or Clr Event Queue option.

A message will pop up to confirm that you want to clear the message or queue.

5. Press the (Enter) key to confirm your request.

If Clr Event Queue was selected, all event queue entries will then display ‘No Event’.

Main Menu:

Diagnostics
Parameter
Device Select
Event Q: 1 E3
Ping Time Flt
Dgn: Events
View Event Queue
Clear Event
Clr Event Queue
Table 7.B Adapter Events
Code Event Description
1 No Event Empty event queue entry.
2 DPI Bus Off Flt A bus-off condition was detected on DPI. This event may be caused by loose or broken cables or by noise. 3 Ping Time Flt A ping message was not received on DPI within the specified time. 4 Port ID Flt The adapter is not connected to a correct port on a DPI product. 5 Port Change Flt The DPI port changed after start up.
6 Host Sent Reset The drive sent a reset event message. 7 EEPROM Sum Flt The EEPROM in the adapter is corrupt. 8 Online @ 125kbps The adapter detected that the drive is communicating at 125 kbps. 9 Online @ 500kbps The adapter detected that the drive is communicating at 500 kbps. 10 Bad Host Flt The adapter was connected to an incompatible product.

I I
0 0
a
0 0
0 0
a
■
7-8 Troubleshooting
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

11 Dup Port Flt Another peripheral with the same port number is already in use. 12 Type 0 Login The adapter has logged in for Type 0 control. 13 Type 0 Time Flt The adapter has not received a Type 0 status message within the specified time. 14 DL Login The adapter has logged into a Datalink.
15 DL Reject Flt The drive rejected an attempt to log in to a Datalink because the Datalink is not supported or is used by anothe r peripheral.
16 DL Time Flt The adapter has not received a Datalink message within the specified time. 17 Reserved Not used.
18 Control Disabled The adapter has sent a ‘Soft Control Disable’ command to the drive. 19 Control Enabled The adapter has sent a ‘Soft Control Enable’ command to the drive. 20 Message Timeout A Client-Server message sent by the adapter was not completed within 1 sec. 21 Flt Cfg Error One of the Flt Cfg xx parameters is set to a value greater than 65535 and the drive requires a 16-bit value. 22 App Updated Startup sequence detected new application firmware. 23 EN Comm Flt The adapter detected a communications fault on the network. 24 EN Sent Reset The adapter received a reset from the network. 25 EN Close Flt An I/O connection from the network to the adapter was closed. 26 EN Idle Flt The adapter is receiving ‘idle’ packets from the network. 27 EN Open An I/O connection from the network to the adapter has been opened. 28 EN Timeout Flt An I/O connection from the network to the adapter has timed out. 29 PCCC IO Close The device sending PCCC Control messages to the adapter has set the PCCC Control Timeout to zero. 30 PCCC IO Open The adapter has begun receiving PCCC control messages (the PCCC Control Timeout was previously set to a non-zero value).
31 PCCC IO Time Flt The adapter has not received a PCCC Control message for longer than the PCCC Control Timeout. 32 Watchdog T/O Flt The software detects a failure.
33 EEPROM Init Startup sequence detec ted a blank EEPROM map revision. 34 Normal Startup The adapter successfully started up.
35 Manual Reset The adapter was reset by changing its Reset Module parameter. 36 EN Link Down The Ethernet link was removed from the adapter. 37 EN Link Up An Ethernet link is available for the adapter. 38 BOOTP Response The adapter received a response to its BOOTP request. 39 Dup IP Addr The adapter uses the same IP address as another device on the network. 40 Peer IO Open The adapter received the first Peer I/O message. 41 Peer IO Time Flt The adapter has not received a Peer I/O message for longer than the Peer I/O Timeout. 42 Email Failed The adapter encountered an error attempting to send a requested e-mail message. 43 Msg Ctrl Open The timeout attribute in either the CIP Register or Assembly object was written with a non-zero value, allowing control messages to be sent to the adapter.
44 Msg Ctrl Close The timeout attribute in either the CIP Register or Assembly object was written with a zero value, disallowing control messages to be sent to the adapter.
45 Msg Ctrl Timeout The timeout attribute in either the CIP Register or Assembly object elapsed between accesses of those objects . 46 OPT Open The adapter began exchanging I/O data with the I/O option of the DPI External Comms Kit. 47 OPT Close The adapter forced a fault condition on the I/O option of the DPI External Comms Kit. 48 OPT Timeout Communication between the adapter and I/O option of the DPI External Comms Kit was disrupted.

Table 7.B Adapter Events (Continued)
Code Event Description
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

Chapter 8
Viewing the Adapter Web Pages
This chapter provides instructions on how to monitor the adapter and connected PowerFlex drive by using the adapter’s web interface.

Future enhancements may result in adapter web pages that look different than the examples shown in this chapter.

Enabling the Adapter Web
Pages
After the adapter is configured and operating, you can view its web pages.

They present information about the adapter, the drive to which it is connected, and the other DPI devices connected to the drive such as a HIM.  Series A adapter, firmware 2.003 or earlier—By default the adapter web pages are enabled. To disable the web pages, use Bit 0 of Parameter 54 - [Access Control]. See Setting Web Access Control on page 3-15 for more information.
 Series B adapter, firmware 3.xxx or later—By default the adapter web pages are disabled. To enable the web pages, set the Web Pages Switch (SW2 in Figure 2.1) to its ‘Enable Web’ position and reset the adapter.

Parameter 55 - [Web Enable] can be used to display the setting (1 = Enabled or 0 = Disabled) of this switch.

Viewing the Web Pages The adapter can be configured to automatically send e-mail messages to desired addresses when selected drive faults occur and/or are cleared, and/or when the adapter takes a communication or idle fault action.

For Series A adapters, Bit 1 of Parameter 54 - [Access Control] can be used to protect the configured settings for the e-mail messaging feature. For Series B adapters, Bit 0 of Parameter 56 - [Web Features] can be used to protect the configured settings. For more details, see Configure E-mail Notification Web Page on page 8-6.

Topic Page
Enabling the Adapter Web Pages 8-1
Viewing the Web Pages 8-1
Process Display Pop-up Window 8-4
TCP/IP Configuration Web Page 8-5
Configure E-mail Notification Web Page 8-6
Device Information Pages 8-9
TIP: Series A adapter web pages are enabled differently than Series B.► 8-2 Viewing the Adapter Web Pages
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

1. On a computer with access to the EtherNet/IP network on which the adapter/drive is installed, launch a web browser such as Microsoft Internet Explorer, version 5.0 or later.

The computer can access the adapter web pages if it is connected to:
– The same network as the drive/adapter.
– A network with access to the drive/adapter’s network via a gateway device (for example, a router).

2. In the Address box, type the IP address of the adapter.

3. Press ENTER.

The adapter web Home Page (Figure 8.1) appears.

Important: From the browser’s View menu, choose Refresh to always re-display the adapter Home Page while viewing any of the adapter’s other web pages.

Figure 8.1 Adapter Web Home Page Example
Title Bar on Adapter Web Pages
The title bar appears on the adapter Home Page and all of the adapter’s other web pages. The title bar consists of three elements as shown in Figure 8.1.

Title Bar Element Description
➊ Allen-Bradley logo This logo is a hyperlink. Click it to view the ab.com web Home Page. ➋ Adapter Title Shows the adapter type or user-configurable title. ➌ Rockwell Automation logo This logo is a hyperlink. Click it to view the Rockwell Automation web Home Page.
➊ ➋ ➌
Adapre:.- 10 COMM F Ethe:.-Net/IP
k@Yislon
JP A<ldress
Elh.,.net Add,ess (MAC)
Scflal Number
Status
1/0 Connection SratlJs
H0<il Pow .-Flex 70 EC )40V 4.)A
Revision
SHH~1S
Commnndcd Oln~ctlon
RotatlOi'I Olrection
Process Status
).OM

10.91. 100.79
OO:OO:BC:08:/C:E2
Ox400186E2
Ope.aUr::111,al
No connection

3.002
Stopped
Forwerd
Forwal"d

0.0 Ill

0.00 Amps
333.2 Bu, voe
Copyright IQ :?005 ROC-kwell AutQm<lltion, Inc All Rights RE""Serve(I.

Viewing the Adapter Web Pages 8-3
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

Navigation Pane on Adapter Web Pages
The navigation pane appears on the left side of the adapter Home Page and all of the adapter’s other web pages. The navigation pane consists of links and link folders which can be expanded or minimized. The following table shows all navigation pane links and link folders.

Information on Adapter Home Page
The adapter Home Page displays the following information for the host drive and its adapter.

Navigation Pane Link/Folder Description
Home link Click this link to view the adapter’s Home Page (Figure 8.1).

Process display link Click this link to view the host drive’s Process Display pop-up window (Figure 8.2).

TCP/IP configuration link Click this link to view the adapter’s TCP/IP Configuration web page showing information about the TCP/IP configuration, such as the adapter’s IP address and the number of packets being sent.

Figure 8.3 shows an example TCP/IP Configuration web page.

Configure e-mail notification
link
Click this link to view the adapter’s Configure E-mail Notification web page (Figure 8.4
) to configure the adapter to send automatic
e-mail messages. E-mail notification can accommodate specific needs such as when only selected faults occur (Figure 8.5). An example e-mail message is shown in Figure 8.7.

Browse DPI devices folder Click this folder to expand and view the Port folders for all present DPI devices, including the drive, adapter, and other devices connected to the drive such as a HIM.

Port x folders Click a respective Port folder to expand and view its device’s various links which take you to related information pages. For Port 0 (PowerFlex 70 Drive) example information pages, see Figure 8.8 ,
Figure 8.9, and Figure 8.10.

Online user manuals link Click this link to view Rockwell Automation’s web page with documentation for drives and other devices.

Software tools Web site link Click this link to view Allen-Bradley’s web page with information about software tools such as DriveExplorer and DriveExecutive.

Launch my DriveExplorer
software link
Click this link to launch the DriveExplorer software already installed on your computer.

Launch my DriveExecutive
software link
Click this link to launch the DriveExecutive software already installed on your computer.

E-mail technical support link Click this link to view a new e-mail message window to send a message to Allen-Bradley’s Technical Support Team.

Device Information
Adapter  Revision
 IP Address
 Ethernet Address (MAC)
 Serial Number
 Status
 I/O Connection Status
Host ‘X’ Drive  Revision
 Status
 Commanded Direction
 Rotation Direction
 Process Status
8-4 Viewing the Adapter Web Pages
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

Process Display Pop-up
Window
The Process Display pop-up window dynamically shows the host drive’s information. To view this window, click the ‘Process display’ link in the navigation pane.

Figure 8.2 Example of Process Display Pop-up Window

Information Description
Product Text Description of host drive.

Status Status of host drive.

Commanded Direction Commanded direction of host drive.

Rotation Direction Rotation direction of host drive.

Process Status
1st Line Dynamic value of the host drive feedback parameter. This parameter is not selectable.

Lines 2 and 3 Dynamic value of each default-displayed host drive parameter. The displayed drive parameters for lines 2 and 3 are selectable by using a HIM, or another drive configuration tool such as Connected Components Workbench, DriveExecutive, or DriveExplorer software.

Product Text
Status
Commanded Direction
Rotation Direction
Process Status
PowerFlex 70 EC 240V 4.2A
Stopped
Forward
Forward

0.0 Hz

0.00 Amps
333 .4 Bus VDC
This page refreshes automatically every 3 seconds .
• Internet
Viewing the Adapter Web Pages 8-5
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

TCP/IP Configuration Web
Page
The TCP/IP Configuration web page provides information about the adapter’s Ethernet settings and network activities. To view this web page, click the ‘TCP/IP configuration’ link (highlighted in Figure 8.3) in the navigation pane.

Figure 8.3 Example of TCP/IP Configuration Web Page

Information Description
IP Address IP address of the adapter.

Subnet Mask Subnet mask for the adapter’s network.

Gateway Address Address for the gateway device on the adapter’s network.

BOOTP Shows status for BOOTP , which may be used to configure the adapter’s network information.

Ethernet Address (MAC) Hardware address for the adapter.

Ethernet Received Packets Number of packets that the adapter has received.

Ethernet Receive Errors Number of receive errors reported by the hardware.

Ethernet Receive Overruns Number of receive buffer overruns reported by the hardware.

Ethernet Transmitted Packets Number of packets that the adapter has sent.

Ethernet Transmit Errors Number of transmit errors reported by the hardware.

EtherNet/IP Missed I/O Packets Number of I/O connection packets that the adapter did not receive.
o- -
Ethomet Address (MAC)
L~net Recetved Pockets
Ethernet Receive Errors
Ethe,net Receive Ovem.ins
Cthcmct lransmittcd Packct5
Ethemel l,a11smlt Eno,s
EthO<Net/lP MJssod 1/0 Pl>cl«!~

10.91.100.79
2S5.255.2d8.0

10.91.96. 1
OJsoblod
OO:OO:BC:08:7C:E2
2881
0 0
1697
0 Copyright C, 1005 Rockwl:!11 Autom,:ltl011. hlr All Rights Reserved. 8-6 Viewing the Adapter Web Pages
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

Configure E-mail
Notification Web Page
The Configure E-mail Notification web page contains selections and data fields for configuring the adapter to automatically send e-mail messages to desired addresses when selected types of events occur. To view this web page, click the ‘Configure e-mail…’ link (highlighted in Figure 8.4) in the navigation pane.

Figure 8.4 Example of Configure E-mail Notification Web Page E-mail configuration for Series A adapters is enabled and disabled differently than Series B adapters.
 Series A adapters, firmware 2.003 and earlier—By default, settings are protected and the user needs to enable configuration by using Parameter 54 - [Access Control] to set the E-mail Config Bit 1 value to ‘1’ (Enabled). After configuration, settings can be protected by changing the E-mail Config Bit 1 value back to ‘0’ (Disabled).
 Series B adapters, firmware 3.xxx and later—By default, settings are not protected. After configuration, settings can be protected by using Parameter 56 - [Web Features] to set E-mail Cfg Bit 0 value to ‘0’ (Disabled). To change a protected configuration, it must first be unprotected by setting the E-mail Cfg Bit 0 value back to ‘1’ (Enabled).

To configure e-mail notification, perform the following steps.

1. Click the desired ‘Send an e-mail message when…’ check boxes you want to occur that will send e-mail notification.

If you only want e-mail notification when selected faults/alarms occur, do the following.
a. Click the respective fault and/or alarm radio buttons. b. Click the ‘selected faults’ link and/or ‘selected alarms’ link.

Figure 8.5 shows an example faults configuration page.
o- ·
@Home
8 l)rocess dJsplsy
[!) TCP/JP con tlg.un)
I!) Coorloure e-mall
Cii &owse OPl devt
Ii) O,,llnP USifJI' m.i;lnU
ID software tools w
e::; Launch my Dr1ve
• launch my Drive
E n,au ted'1111cal
I)
a W 0
□ Se-ml an e-merl message when a fault (trip) Is dttlar@d on the DPI host (dnve):

O For anv foot
OOnly for ,;elected faults
□ Send an ~-mail mes~oe when a (dull 0n the d,1,.,e is dea ,-e:d □ Se:n<f an c·mall message: when an alarm Is declared on the OPI host {drive); O For ttny alarm
0 0n1v tor selected atonns
□ Send en e-mall mess.age when an alarm on the drive Is dea red □ Send an c·mall message when the 20-COMM·E takes Its communication fault action □ ser\d an e m,i1il message when the 20 COMM E takes Its kllc fault action JP addre~s of mall (SMTP) setve,: O O . o
E•mall bddresses to noUry (80 char. max.): r--
S1..1bJett of e m~1It n,essdge (SO char. mcnc.):

I S.v• Changes I
Copyright e JOOS RockwPtl Automation, Inc. All Right-. R~f>rvPd.

Viewing the Adapter Web Pages 8-7
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

Figure 8.5 Example of Selected Faults Configuration Page c. Click the desired fault/alarm check boxes.
d. Click Save Changes.
e. Click the ‘Back to E-mail Configuration Page’ link.

2. Type the following information in their respective boxes. a. On the Windows task bar, click Start > Run to display the Run window.
b. In the Run window Open field, type ‘cmd’.
c. Click OK to display the DOS window.
d. On the c:\ > command line, type ‘nslookup [name of e-mail server]’.

The entry ‘c:\ > nslookup smtp.company.com’ is an example. e. Press ENTER to display the e-mail server IP address (Figure 8.6).

Information Description
‘IP address of…’ Type in the address of the mail server that will be used to deliver the e-mail messages. (When the IP address is
unknown, read the TIP shown below this table to determine the mail server address.)
‘E-mail addresses to notify…’ Type in addresses to where you want e-mail messages to be sent. Multiple addresses can be used, but they must be
separated by commas (comma delimited).
‘Subject of e-mail message…’ Type in the desired subject text for the e-mail message.

TIP: If the IP address of the e-mail server is unknown, you can contact your IT department or use the following DOS command instructions to find its IP address.
►
0 Choose the faults tor which you would like e·mail notification below. □ 1 - No fnult □ 2 • AUXlll&ry Jnput
□ 17 • lnput Phase LOSS
O 19 • No Fault
□ 'J t Output Phase Loss
023 No Fault
0 2~ - Overs~ed Limit
027 • fllo Fault
□ 29 An~log In Loss
031 NO hult
04 - UndcrVoltago
06 Motor Stalled
08 • Hebtslnk OvrTel'np
0 10 - No Fault
0 12 • HW OvcrCurrent
0 14 NoFault
□ 16 - Motor The,mlstor
□ 18 - ShcarPlnNoAcct-I
020 • No Fault
022 No Fault
OJ• Oecel Inhibit
0 26 - No Fault
0 28 • No Fault
~ ) □ 33 • Aulo Rstrl Tries
030 NI) Fault
032' No Fault
0 3~ • NO Faull
il] Nfir./,__~ .. ~
8-8 Viewing the Adapter Web Pages
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

Figure 8.6 DOS Window Example Showing E-mail Server IP Address f. Type the IP address shown in the DOS window (for this example, 131.200.78.4) into the E-mail Notification Web Page (Figure 8.4).

3. Click Save changes.

Important: After configuring E-mail Notification, we recommend protecting the settings. Otherwise the configuration can be changed anytime the web page is accessed with a browser. To protect the settings, do the following:
 Series A Adapters—Use Parameter 54 - [Access Control] to set E-mail Config Bit 1 value to ‘0’ (Disabled).
 Series B Adapters—Use Parameter 56 - [Web Features] to set E-mail Cfg Bit 0 value to ‘0’ (Disabled).

Figure 8.7 shows an example e-mail message automatically sent by the adapter in response to selected events.

Figure 8.7 Example of E-mail Message Sent by the Adapter TIP: To stop e-mail messages, uncheck all of the ‘Send an e-mail message when…’ boxes.
 For Series A adapters, disabling the adapter web pages by setting Parameter 54 - [Access Control] Web Enable Bit 0 to ‘0’ (Disabled) will not stop the adapter from sending e-mail messages.  For Series B adapters, disabling the adapter web pages by setting the Web Pages Switch (SW2 in Figure 2.1) to the ‘Disable Web’ position will not stop the adapter from sending e-mail messages. ►
" Microsoft Windows XP [Uersion 5.1.2600]
(C) Copyright 1985-2001 Microsoft Corp.
c:,>nslookup smtp.rockwell.com
Server: usmkemult004.na.home.ra-int.com
Address: 131.200.78.4
20-COMM-E@ l 0.91 .100.79
0111012007 03,17 PM
Tu lidoe@examp le.com
•
bee ~==================:

Subject !Notice from examp le drive
Seq O - Driv e at 1 0 .9 1 . 1 00 . 7 9 rep o rted fa u lt 81 - Po rt 1 DP I Lo ss Th is i .3 an au tornat.ed mes.::iage from t.he 20 - COMH-E Et. herNec / IP adapt.er at. I P addres.3 10 . 91 . 100 . 7 9 . Please do not. repl y t o c h is message , as c he adapter ca nno t process replies .

Th e DPI h ost h as lo gged t h e fol l o wing fa u lt {trip ) :

Fa u lt c o de : 81
Fa u lt text : Por t 1 D PI Loss
See t hi s de v ice ' s Web page at h ttp : // 1 0 . 9 1 . 1 00 . 7 9 / . a I
Viewing the Adapter Web Pages 8-9
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

Device Information Pages Device information pages are viewed by clicking on the respective links in the navigation pane:

Figure 8.8 Example of Port 0 (PowerFlex 70 Drive) Module Information Page Web Page Description
Module
Information
Shows module information for the respective drive Port device. For example, Figure 8.8
shows module information for the Port 0 device (host drive).

Diagnostics Shows diagnostic item information for the respective drive Port device. For example, Figure 8.9 shows diagnostic items for the Port 0 device (host drive).

Fault Queue Shows fault queue information for the respective drive Port device. For example, Figure 8.10 shows the fault queue for the Port 0 device (host drive).

Alarm Queue (1)
(1) Information shown only when supported by the device.

Shows alarm queue information for the respective drive Port device. For example, Figure 8.11 shows the alarm queue for the Port 0 device (host drive).

Event Queue (1) Shows event queue information for the respective drive Port device. For example, Figure 8.12 shows the event queue for the Port 5 device (22-COMM-E adapter).

Information Description
Product Text Text identifying the device
Vendor ID 1 = Allen-Bradley
Device Type 123 decimal = PowerFlex 70 EC drive
Product Code Code for the product name and its rating
Revision Firmware revision used by the device
Serial Number Serial number of the device
Status Operating status of the device (for example, stopped) ......

O- ·
ID Horne
• Process dlspl&y
[!l TCP/IP conflg.ur-b
Ii) Conrrgu1e e•mall
8rowse OPI d~t
Port O PoWPrfl
ID Module intomu
0 Otagnosucs
F,in.dt queue
Ahumqu~ue
Pott! ICOM
Pott J JJOJ U
Port 3 Not Ava
Pott 4 Not A1-'ii.

Pool S JO COM
Potl 6 Not Avcl;
0 Drlllne user fflllnUl
SOftwarP tOOl<i W
fl: Launch my Or1V~
~ lounch my OrivP
W f man te-chnlca1
Product Text
Vendor 10
Device Type
Product Code
Revision
Setiid Numbe,
Status
Powerflex 70 EC 240V 4. 2A
1 123
Ox0032
J.002
Nol Availabl
SlOl)l)cd
Copyoght :i>OOS Rockwell Autom,1Uon, Int. All Righls A.eserved. 8-10 Viewing the Adapter Web Pages
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

Figure 8.9 Example of Port 0 (PowerFlex 70 Drive) Diagnostic Items Page Figure 8.10 Example of Port 0 (PowerFlex 70 Drive) Fault Queue Page ~ OingnostJcs 4
~ F"ault queue s
Alarm queue 6
Cil Port l • LCD Me< 7 Port 7 1703 U
Ci Port 3 Not Av 8
Ci Port 4 Not Ava 9
Ci Port 5 70 co 10 Ci Port 6 NotAv.t, 11 0 Online use, ,mu SOftwarP tools 12
lounch my Oriv 13
Launch my Dr1v 14 E·mall tcdmlcal IS
16 17
18 ... ... \'cw fh?•IO , ... -o- - i!l ✓
@AJl«t-8-
ID H0rne
8 Process displ
:/IP contlg
nou,e e·m
owse: DPl d
Porto Pow
MO<h.ile Inf
1 Dl&gnosU
Fault que
Alatm <u.ia
Port I ICO
Port 7 170
Port)
"'"'. Pt,,t 5
Pt,,t 6 Nol
nllne US4!1' m
ftwarP. toil)l 12
unch my 13
1-1nth my 14 man technl
IS
16 Description
OP! fm:,, Sl&lu$
Hcats lnk Temp
Active Cui Limit
ActtvePWMFrec:i
Ufe Megawatt Hr
Ufe Run Time:

Life Pwr Up Time
life Pwr Cycles
life MW Fractloo
Life MW Units
Reserved
~w In 1 ma
Raw In l volts
Raw tn 2 plus
k8w In 2 minus
CS Msg Rx Cnt
CS Msg rx Cnt
CS Tlmeoot Cnt
-
F~1.11tood 0 ~ripti()n
49 Orive Powerup
S> Fa1,1I Cleared
85 Po,t 5 OPI Loss
82 Port 2 OPI Loss
S7 Faults Cle41ed
81 Port 1 DPI Less
52 Faulls Cle~ued
81 Port 1 DPI Loss
52 Fauns Cl~red
No Fault
52 Faults Cleared
25 Ov@rspeed Umlt
57 F~1,.1lt$ Cleared
25 Ove(speoed Umlt
52 Faults Cleared
25 Overspeed limit
Value Units

34.S dcgC
6646
12 kHz

22.6 MWh
106.0 11rs
1496 .6 Hrs
~14
56756
414/2
0 5
2 6
l
7053
2061
0 ·-
Time.sH'tmp
288:05:27.0•B
239:37:0J. 472
239:37:00.952
236:51 :56.992
736:S0:41.757
188:07:45 .952
•J:•5:04.797
904:25:18.592
859:13:•6.312
00:00:00.000
854:52 :59.772
854:49:59.992
737:)1 :18.35:Z
737: 10:45.2)2
737:10:41.632
737:10:26.5 12
'c==="---"-"' C"'o"'pyrlght Cl 2005 Rockwcl I Automation. Inc. All RIQhts Reserved. 11-
Viewing the Adapter Web Pages 8-11
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

Figure 8.11 Example of Port 0 (PowerFlex 70 Drive) Alarm Queue Page Figure 8.12 shows an example event queue page for the Port 5 device (20-COMM-E adapter).

Figure 8.12 Example of Port 5 (20-COMM-E Adapter) Event Queue Page TIP: For drives that do not support an alarm queue, the adapter will still display an alarm queue web page (Figure 8.11), but show that the alarm queue is not available.
►
Ht UI \',ffl ' lffllfflel I- "-
f!lHome
8 Proces,; dlsplay
TCP/IP contlqum
I!) Confrgure e·mall
&oW!ie OPl devl
Port O • J>oworF
I!\ Module int
BOl&gnostlC!i
Iii Faull queue
[!°)Alarm Queue
Cai Port 1 • LCD Mo<
Port> ll0JU
~ Port 3 Not Ava
~Pol't4 NOt"AY
!:aPo<tS >0CO
~l)Ol't6 NotAY-1
l!l Onllne user m.anu
sottY,,atP tools w
~ lounc:h my Orive
ll
~ Launch my Or1vc
E·mall technical
... ...
o- -
@ A//f0-8""1q
@Horne
8 Proces~ dlsplsy
(!l TCP/lP conllgu,o
I!) Confrgure e•mall
WSt! OPl dl!Vt
0 Powerfl
I tCD M
} 1JOJU
J Not I\
I 4 Not A
s 20 C
u1e lnrOI
Ucs
tqUl!'U~
-Not A
Sflf"ffl.a
wit1fe tools
nc:h my Orlv
nch my Oi'iv
.:) E•,nillll ledmkol
ll
a W 0
Alarm code Descrip tion Time ~tam 11
Al&rm Queue Nol Available
Copyright (I 7005 Rockwf'II Automation, Inc. All Rlghtf. ReGOrvc-d.

Ent ry no. Fvcn t c;O<lc Oc:scription
1 )/ EN Link Up
2 19 COrltrol Enabled 00:00:00.610
3 14 Ol lOQln 00:00:00.600
4 12 Type O login 00:00:00.595
5 8 Online@ 125kbps 00:00:00 .580
6 22 App Updated 00:00:00.000
7 No Event
8 No l't'ent
9 No event
to No E't'cnt
II No Event
12 No Event
13 No Event
14 No Event
IS No Event
16 No Event
17 No Event
18 No Everll
• ~nil'\
8-12 Viewing the Adapter Web Pages
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

Notes:
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

Chapter 9
Using the Adapter in a DPI External Comms Kit
(20-XCOMM-DC-BASE)
This chapter provides information and examples that explain how to use the adapter in a DPI External Comms Kit (20-XCOMM-DC-BASE).

The adapter is typically installed in the internal communication slot on the PowerFlex 7-Class drive. However, an externally-mounted adapter may be desired when:
 The PowerFlex drive is already connected to an existing network, such as Remote I/O, and a second network is desired for a DriveExplorer or DriveExecutive software tool, data collection, and so forth.  The PowerFlex drive is remotely located next to some I/O devices that also need to be networked. The DPI External Comms Kit has an option slot for general-purpose network I/O that a controller can use. Both the drive and I/O devices are handled as one node on the network to reduce the network node count.

Installing the Adapter The adapter can be installed in a DPI External Comms Kit.

Figure 9.1 Mounting and Connecting the Adapter
For more information, see the DPI External Communications Kit Installation Instructions, publication 20COMM-IN001.

Topic Page
Installing the Adapter 9-1
I/O Board Option (20-XCOMM-IO-OPT1) 9-2
Understanding the I/O Image (Drive + I/O Option) 9-2
Configuring the Adapter to Use the Optional I/O Data 9-3 Viewing Optional I/O Diagnostic Items 9-4
Comms Kit
Enclosure Base
Comms Kit Enclosure Cover
(with adapter mounted inside)

15.24 cm (6 in.) Internal Interface Cable
(connects power supply board
in enclosure base to adapter)
9-2 Using the Adapter in a DPI External Comms Kit (20-XCOMM-DC-BASE) 20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

I/O Board Option
(20-XCOMM-IO-OPT1)
The I/O Board option, when installed in the DPI External Comms Kit, can be used with only a Series B adapter, firmware revision 3.xxx or later. The I/O Board provides six DC inputs and two Relay outputs for use by a controller on the network.

Figure 9.2 I/O Connector Function Descriptions
For more information, see the I/O Board Option Installation Instructions, publication 20COMM-IN002.

Understanding the I/O Image
(Drive + I/O Option)
The data for the optional I/O Board is sent over the I/O connection using Datalink D. When the optional I/O Board is installed in the DPI External Comms Kit, Datalink D is dedicated only for this function and is not available for other uses. When the adapter detects the presence of the optional I/O Board, the I/O image is modified as shown in Figure 9.3.

Figure 9.3 Example I/O Image – Datalink D Dedicated to I/O Board and All I/O Enabled O2 - NO
O2 - COM
O1 - NC
O1 - NO
O1 - COM
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN5
IN6

INPUT COM
OUT2
OUT1
34562 1 9 10 11 128 7
Controller Scanner Adapter Word and I/O
EtherNet/IP
Message
Handler
0 Logic Command
1 Reference
2 Datalink In A1
3 Datalink In A2
4 Datalink In B1
5 Datalink In B2
6 Datalink In C1
7 Datalink In C2
8 Datalink In D1
9 Datalink In D2
Output
Image
(Write)
0 Pad Word (1)
1 Pad Word (1)
2 Logic Status
3 Feedback
4 Datalink Out A1
5 Datalink Out A2
6 Datalink Out B1
7 Datalink Out B2
8 Datalink Out C1
9 Datalink Out C2
10 Datalink Out D1
11 Datalink Out D2
Input
Image
(Read)
Message
Buffer
Logic Command
Reference
Data In A1
Data In A2
Data In B1
Data In B2
Data In C1
Data In C2
Data In D1
Data In D2
Logic Status
Feedback
Data Out A1
Data Out A2
Data Out B1
Data Out B2
Data Out C1
Data Out C2
Data Out D1
Data Out D2
Message
Handler
PowerFlex Drive
DPI
Opt. I/O
Board
(Outputs)
Opt. I/O
Board
(Inputs)
(1) Required by ControlLogix when using the Generic Profile. May or may not be required by other types of controllers. ~_JJJJJ LLLLL_ l l
-~ i..
.... ....
-
t-
-
-
-----~~ r H
Using the Adapter in a DPI External Comms Kit (20-XCOMM-DC-BASE) 9-3 20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

The data from the I/O Board is loaded into the Datalink word starting with bit 0 of Datalink D1 and concluding with bit 14. Bit 15 of Datalink D1 is reserved as an input valid Status flag. When the input data is valid, bit 15 =

1. For example, for the 20-XCOMM-IO-OPT1, the digital inputs and digital outputs are mapped as shown in Figure 9.4 and Figure 9.5 respectively.

Figure 9.4 I/O Board Option Digital Input Mapping
Figure 9.5 I/O Board Option Digital Output Mapping
Important: On power-up or reset, the outputs will be in a ‘non-activated’ state.

Configuring the Adapter to
Use the Optional I/O Data
To configure the adapter to use the optional I/O Board, Parameters 23 - [DPI I/O Cfg], 35 - [M-S Input], and 36 - [M-S Output] must be set. To send input/output data from the optional I/O board to the network, do the following:
 Turn on bit 4 (1xxxx) in Parameter 35 - [M-S Input]
 Turn on bit 4 (1xxxx) in Parameter 36 - [M-S Output]
 Turn off bit 4 (0xxxx) in Parameter 23 - [DPI I/O Cfg] Setting the Datalink D bit 4 in the M-S Input and M-S Output parameters directs the communication adapter to send Datalink D back to the controller.

Turning off bit 4 in the DPI I/O Cfg parameter directs the communication adapter to not send Datalink D data back to the drive. For more information on I/O Messaging and Configuring Datalinks, see Chapter 5, Using the I/O.

If the I/O Board Fault Action Jumper (JMP1) is set to the Fault Configurable position, Parameter 33 - [Flt Cfg D1 In] is used to set the states of the outputs when the I/O Board takes its Fault Action. For details on setting the Fault Action Jumper, see the I/O Board Option Installation Instructions, publication 20COMM-IN002.
0 1 2 3 4 5
IN1
7Bit 68 9 10 11 12 13 15 14
IN6
Datalink Out D1 Word
. . .Status
✷✷ ✷ ✷ ✷ ✷ ✷
0 ✷✷
1 2 3 4 5
OUT1
7Bit 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 15 14
OUT2
Datalink In D1 Word
J
9-4 Using the Adapter in a DPI External Comms Kit (20-XCOMM-DC-BASE) 20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

Viewing Optional I/O
Diagnostic Items
Viewing communication adapter diagnostic item 56 (OPT Status) shows the operating status of the optional I/O board.

Viewing communication adapter diagnostic item 57 (OPT RX Errors) shows the number of I/O board receive errors.

Viewing communication adapter diagnostic item 58 (OPT FW Version) shows the present firmware revision of the optional I/O board.

Diagnostic item 13 (Datalink D1 In) will show the status of the outputs as a combined decimal value. For example, a ‘0’ decimal (‘00’ binary) indicates both outputs are off and a ‘3’ decimal (‘11’ binary) indicates both outputs are on. NOTE: A status bit is not used for outputs.

Diagnostic item 21 (Datalink D1 Out) will show the status of the inputs as a combined decimal value, including the status bit 15. For example, Figure 9.6
shows inputs that are valid and all on, and Figure 9.7 shows inputs that are valid and all off (zero).

Figure 9.6 Valid Inputs All On
Figure 9.7 Valid Inputs All Off
Bit State Status Indication Description
0 1 (On) OPT Present I/O data is being exchanged with the adapter. 1 1 (On) OPT Faulted The I/O board is taking its fault action. 2 1 (On) Hold Last Fault Action is ‘Hold Last’.
3 1 (On) Send Flt Cfg Fault Action is ‘Fault Config’.
0 000000000
1 1 111111
2 3 4 5
IN1
7Bit
32831 decimal =
68 9 10 11 12 13 15 14
IN6
Datalink Out D1 Word
. . .Status
0 000000000000000
1 1
2 3 4 5
IN1
7Bit 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 15 14
IN6
Datalink Out D1 Word
. . .Status
32768 decimal =

I I I I I I

I I I I I I
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

Appendix A
Specifications
This appendix presents the specifications for the adapter.

Communications
Electrical
Topic Page
Communications A-1
Electrical A-1
Mechanical A-2
Environmental A-2
Regulatory Compliance A-2
Network
Protocol
Data Rates
EtherNet/IP
10 Mbps Full Duplex
10 Mbps Half Duplex
100 Mbps Full Duplex
100 Mbps Half Duplex
Connection Limits 30 TCP connections
16 simultaneous CIP connections including 1 exclusive-owner I/O connection
The following activities use a CIP connection:
 Class I I/O connections (for example, from a ControlLogix controller)  Explicit messaging where ‘connected’ is chosen (for example, in a checkbox in RSLogix 5000 software)
 DriveExecutive software connections to the drive
The following activities do not use a CIP connection:
 Explicit messaging-based control using PCCC, or the Register or Assembly objects, including the PLC-5, SLC 500, or MicroLogix 1100 controller examples in Chapter 4
 Explicit messaging where ‘connected’ is not chosen, which is typically the default
 DriveExplorer software connections to the drive
Requested Packet
Interval (RPI)
5 ms minimum
Packet Rate Up to 400 total I/O packets per second (200 in and 200 out) Drive
Protocol
Data Rates
DPI
125 kbps or 500 kbps
Consumption
Drive
Network
350 mA at 5V DC supplied by the host (drive or DPI External Comms Kit) None
A-2 Specifications
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

Mechanical
Environmental
Regulatory Compliance
NOTE: This is a product of category C2 according to IEC 61800-3. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case supplementary mitigation measures may be required.

Dimensions
Height
Length
Width
19 mm (0.75 inches)
86 mm (3.39 inches)

78.5 mm (3.09 inches)
Weight 85 g (3 oz.)
Temperature
Operating
Storage
-10…50 °C (14…122 °F)
-40…85 °C (-40…185 °F)
Relative Humidity 5…95% non-condensing
Atmosphere Important: The adapter must not be installed in an area where the ambient atmosphere contains volatile or corrosive gas, vapors or dust. If the adapter is not going to be installed for a period of time, it must be stored in an area where it will not be exposed to a corrosive atmosphere.

Certification Specification
UL UL508C
cUL CAN / CSA C22.2 No. 14-M91
CE EN50178 and EN61800-3
CTick EN61800-3
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

Appendix B
Adapter Parameters
This appendix provides information about the adapter parameters. For configuration tools to monitor or change parameter values of the drive, adapter, and other connected peripherals, see Configuration Tools on
page 3-1.

Parameter List

Parameter
No. Name and Description Details
01 [DPI Port]
Displays the port to which the adapter is
connected. This will usually be port 5.

Minimum: 0
Maximum: 7
Type: Read Only
02 [DPI Data Rate]
Displays the data rate used by the drive. This data
rate is set in the drive and the adapter detects it.

Values: 0 = 125 kbps
1 = 500 kbps
Type: Read Only
03 [BOOTP]
Configures the adapter to use BOOTP so that you
can set its IP address, subnet mask, and gateway
address with a BOOTP server.

Default: 1 = Enabled
Values: 0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Type: Read/Write
Reset Required: Y es
04 05
06 07
[IP Addr Cfg 1]
[IP Addr Cfg 2]
[IP Addr Cfg 3]
[IP Addr Cfg 4]
Sets the IP address bytes for the adapter’s network
address when Parameter 03 - [BOOTP] is set to
‘0’ (Disabled).

Default: 0
Default: 0
Default: 0
Default: 0
Minimum: 0
Maximum: 255
Type: Read/Write
Reset Required: Y es
08 09
10 11
[Subnet Cfg 1]
[Subnet Cfg 2]
[Subnet Cfg 3]
[Subnet Cfg 4]
Sets the subnet mask bytes for the adapter’s
network address when Parameter 03 - [BOOTP] is
set to ‘0’ (Disabled).

Default: 0
Default: 0
Default: 0
Default: 0
Minimum: 0
Maximum: 255
Type: Read/Write
Reset Required: Y es
255.255.255.255
[IP Addr Cfg 1]
[IP Addr Cfg 2]
[IP Addr Cfg 3]
[IP Addr Cfg 4]
255.255.255.255
[Subnet Cfg 1]
[Subnet Cfg 2]
[Subnet Cfg 3]
[Subnet Cfg 4]
I I
I I
B-2 Adapter Parameters
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

12 13
14 15
[Gateway Cfg 1]
[Gateway Cfg 2]
[Gateway Cfg 3]
[Gateway Cfg 4]
Sets the gateway address bytes for the adapter’s
gateway address when Parameter 03 - [BOOTP]
is set to ‘0’ (Disabled).

Default: 0
Default: 0
Default: 0
Default: 0
Minimum: 0
Maximum: 255
Type: Read/Write
Reset Required: Y es
16 [EN Rate Cfg]
Sets the speed and duplex network data rate at
which the adapter communicates. (Updates
Parameter 17 - [EN Rate Act] after a reset.)
Default: 0 = Autodetect
Values: 0 = Autodetect
1 = 10 Mbps Full
2 = 10 Mbps Half
3 = 100 Mbps Full
4 = 100 Mbps Half
Type: Read/Write
Reset Required: Y es
17 [EN Rate Act]
Displays the actual speed and duplex network data
rate used by the adapter.

Values: 0 = No Link
1 = 10 Mbps Full
2 = 10 Mbps Half
3 = 100 Mbps Full
4 = 100 Mbps Half
Type: Read Only
18 [Ref/Fdbk Size]
Displays the size of the Reference/Feedback. The
drive determines the size of the Reference/
Feedback.

Values: 0 = 16-bit
1 = 32-bit
Type: Read Only
19 [Datalink Size]
Displays the size of each Datalink word. The drive
determines the size of Datalinks.

Values: 0 = 16-bit
1 = 32-bit
Type: Read Only
20 [Reset Module]
No action if set to ‘0’ (Ready). Resets the adapter if
set to ‘1’ (Reset Module). Restores the adapter to
its factory default settings if set to ‘2’ (Set Defaults).

This parameter is a command. It will be reset to ‘0’
(Ready) after the command has been performed.

Default: 0 = Ready
Values: 0 = Ready
1 = Reset Module
2 = Set Defaults
Type: Read/Write
Reset Required: No
Parameter
No. Name and Description Details
255.255.255.255
[Gateway Cfg 1]
[Gateway Cfg 2]
[Gateway Cfg 3]
[Gateway Cfg 4]
!
ATTENTION: Risk of injury or equipment damage exists. If the adapter is transmitting I/O that controls the drive, the drive may fault when you reset the adapter. Determine how your drive will respond before resetting a connected adapter.

I I
Adapter Parameters B-3
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

21 [Comm Flt Action]
Sets the action that the adapter and drive will take
if the adapter detects that I/O communication has
been disrupted. This setting is effective only if I/O
that controls the drive is transmitted through the
adapter. When communication is re-established,
the drive will automatically receive commands over
the network again.

Default: 0 = Fault
Values: 0 = Fault
1 = Stop
2 = Zero Data
3 = Hold Last
4 = Send Flt Cfg
Type: Read/Write
Reset Required: No
22 [Idle Flt Action]
Sets the action that the adapter and drive will take
if the adapter detects that the controller is in
program mode or faulted. This setting is effective
only if I/O that controls the drive is transmitted
through the adapter. When the controller is put
back in Run mode, the drive will automatically
receive commands over the network again.

Default: 0 = Fault
Values: 0 = Fault
1 = Stop
2 = Zero Data
3 = Hold Last
4 = Send Flt Cfg
Type: Read/Write
Reset Required: No
23 [DPI I/O Cfg]
Sets the I/O that is transferred through the adapter.

Default: xxx0 0001
Bit Values: 0 = I/O Disabled
1 = I/O Enabled
Type: Read/Write
Reset Required: Y es
24 [DPI I/O Act]
Displays the I/O that the adapter is actively
transmitting. The value of this parameter will
usually be equal to the value of Parameter 23 -
[DPI I/O Cfg].

Bit Values: 0 = I/O Disabled
1 = I/O Enabled
Type: Read Only
Parameter
No. Name and Description Details
!
ATTENTION: Risk of injury or equipment damage exists. Parameter 21 - [Comm Flt Action] lets you determine the action of the adapter and connected drive if I/O communication is disrupted. By default, this parameter faults the drive. Y ou can set this parameter so that the drive continues to run, however, precautions should be taken to verify that the setting of this parameter does not create a risk of injury or equipment damage. When commissioning the drive, verify that your system responds correctly to various situations (for example, a disconnected cable).
!
ATTENTION: Risk of injury or equipment damage exists. Parameter 22 - [Idle Flt Action] lets you determine the action of the adapter and connected drive when the controller is idle. By default, this parameter faults the drive. Y ou can set this parameter so that the drive continues to run, however, precautions should be taken to verify that the setting of this parameter does not create a risk of injury or equipment damage. When commissioning the drive, verify that your system responds correctly to various situations (for example, a faulted controller).

Bit
Definition
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Datalink D
Datalink C
Datalink B
Datalink A
Cmd/Ref
Default x x x 0 0 0 0 1
B i t 76543210
Bit
Definition
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Datalink D
Datalink C
Datalink B
Datalink A
Cmd/Ref
Default x x x 0 0 0 0 1
B i t 76543210
1 111 1 11
1 111 1 11
B-4 Adapter Parameters
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

25 [Flt Cfg Logic]
Sets the Logic Command data that is sent to the
drive if any of the following is true:
 Parameter 21 - [Comm Flt Action] is set to ‘4’
(Send Flt Cfg) and I/O communication is
disrupted.
 Parameter 22 - [Idle Flt Action] is set to ‘4’
(Send Flt Cfg) and the controller is idle.
 Parameter 41 - [Peer Flt Action] is set to ‘4’
(Send Flt Cfg) and peer I/O communication is
disrupted.

The bit definitions depend on the product to which
the adapter is connected. See Appendix
D or the
documentation for the drive being used.

Default: 0000 0000 0000 0000
Minimum: 0000 0000 0000 0000
Maximum: 1111 1111 1111 1111
Type: Read/Write
Reset Required: No
26 [Flt Cfg Ref]
Sets the Reference data that is sent to the drive if
any of the following is true:
 Parameter 21 - [Comm Flt Action] is set to ‘4’
(Send Flt Cfg) and I/O communication is
disrupted.
 Parameter 22 - [Idle Flt Action] is set to ‘4’
(Send Flt Cfg) and the controller is idle.
 Parameter 41- [Peer Flt Action] is set to ‘4’
(Send Flt Cfg) and peer I/O communication is
disrupted.

Default: 0
Minimum: 0
Maximum: 4294967295
Type: Read/Write
Reset Required: No
Important: If the drive uses a 16-bit
Reference, the most significant word of
this value must be set to zero (0) or a
fault will occur.
27 28
29 30
31 32
33 34
[Flt Cfg A1 In]
[Flt Cfg A2 In]
[Flt Cfg B1 In]
[Flt Cfg B2 In]
[Flt Cfg C1 In]
[Flt Cfg C2 In]
[Flt Cfg D1 In]
[Flt Cfg D2 In]
Sets the data that is sent to the Datalink in the
drive if any of the following is true:
 Parameter 21 - [Comm Flt Action] is set to ‘4’
(Send Flt Cfg) and I/O communication is
disrupted.
 Parameter 22 - [Idle Flt Action] is set to ‘4’
(Send Flt Cfg) and the controller is idle.
 Parameter 41 - [Peer Flt Action] is set to ‘4’
(Send Flt Cfg) and peer I/O communication is
disrupted.

Default: 0
Default: 0
Default: 0
Default: 0
Default: 0
Default: 0
Default: 0
Default: 0
Minimum: 0
Maximum: 4294967295
Type: Read/Write
Reset Required: No
Important: If the drive uses 16-bit
Datalinks, the most significant word of
this value must be set to zero (0) or a
fault will occur.
35 [M-S Input]
Sets the Master-Slave input data. This data is
produced by the scanner and consumed by the
adapter.

Default: xxx0 0001
Bit Values: 0 = I/O disabled
1 = I/O enabled
Type: Read/Write
Reset Required: Y es
Parameter
No. Name and Description Details
Bit
Definition
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Datalink D Input
Datalink C Input
Datalink B Input
Datalink A Input
Cmd/Ref
Default x x x 0 0 0 0 1
B i t 76543210
Adapter Parameters B-5
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

36 [M-S Output]
Sets the Master-Slave output data. This data is
produced by the adapter and consumed by the
Master device (for example, scanner).

Default: xxx0 0001
Bit Values: 0 = I/O disabled
1 = I/O enabled
Type: Read/Write
Reset Required: Y es
37 [Ref Adjust]
Sets the percent scale factor for the Reference
received from the network.

Default: 100.00%
Minimum: 0.00%
Maximum: 200.00%
Type: Read/Write
Reset Required: No
38 39
[Peer A Input]
[Peer B Input]
Sets the destination of the peer I/O input. The
adapter receives this data from the network and
sends it to the drive.

Important: Changes to these parameters are
ignored when Parameter 47 - [Peer Inp Enable] is
set to ‘1’ (On).

Important: If the parameter is set to input a Logic
Command, configure the mask in Parameter 40 -
[Peer Cmd Mask] so that the desired bits from the
peer device are used.

Default: 0 = Off
Default: 0 = Off
Values: 0 = Off
1 = Cmd/Ref
2 = Datalink A Input
3 = Datalink B Input
4 = Datalink C Input
5 = Datalink D Input
Type: Read/Write
Reset Required: No
40 [Peer Cmd Mask]
Sets the mask for the Logic Command word when
it is received through peer input. If the mask bit is
‘0’ (Off), the command bit is ignored and not used.

If the mask bit is ‘1’ (On), the command bit is
checked and used.

Important: If the adapter receives a Logic
Command from both a Master device and a peer
device, each command bit must have only one
source. The source of command bits set to ‘0’ will
be the Master device. The source of command bits
set to ‘1’ will be the peer device.

Default: 0000 0000 0000 0000
Minimum: 0000 0000 0000 0000
Maximum: 1111 1111 1111 1111
Values: 0 = Ignore bit
1 = Check bit
Type: Read/Write
Reset Required: Y es
Parameter
No. Name and Description Details
Bit
Definition
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Datalink D Output
Datalink C Output
Datalink B Output
Datalink A Output
Cmd/Ref
D e f a u l t xxx00001
B i t 76543210
!
ATTENTION: To guard against equipment damage and/or personal injury, note that changes to Parameter 37 - [Ref Adjust] take effect immediately. A drive receiving its Reference from the adapter will receive the newly scaled Reference, resulting in a change of speed.

B-6 Adapter Parameters
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

41 [Peer Flt Action]
Sets the action that the adapter and drive will take
if the adapter detects that peer I/O communication
has been disrupted. This setting is effective only if
I/O is transmitted through the adapter.

Default: 0 = Fault
Values: 0 = Fault
1 = Stop
2 = Zero Data
3 = Hold Last
4 = Send Flt Cfg
Type: Read/Write
Reset Required: No
42 43
44 45
[Peer Inp Addr 1]
[Peer Inp Addr 2]
[Peer Inp Addr 3]
[Peer Inp Addr 4]
Sets the IP address bytes that specifies the device
from which the adapter receives (consumes) peer
I/O data.

Important: The Peer Inp Addr must be on the
same subnet as the 20-COMM-E. See IP
Addresses on page G-5 for more information.

Changes to these parameters are ignored when
Parameter 47 - [Peer Inp Enable] is set to ‘1’ (On).

Default: 0
Default: 0
Default: 0
Default: 0
Minimum: 0
Maximum: 255
Type: Read/Write
Reset Required: No
46 [Peer Inp Timeout]
Sets the timeout for a peer I/O connection. If the
time is reached without the adapter receiving
(consuming) a message, the adapter will respond
with the action specified in Parameter 41 - [Peer
Flt Action].

In an adapter receiving (consuming) peer I/O, the
value of this parameter must be greater than the
product of the value of Parameter 52 - [Peer Out
Time] in the adapter transmitting (producing) peer
I/O multiplied by the value of Parameter 53 - [Peer
Out Skip] in the adapter transmitting (producing)
peer I/O.

Default: 10.00 Seconds
Minimum: 0.01 Seconds
Maximum: 200.00 Seconds
Type: Read/Write
Reset Required: No
47 [Peer Inp Enable]
Determines if peer I/O input is on or off.

Default: 0 = Off
Values: 0 = Off
1 = On
Type: Read/Write
Reset Required: No
Parameter
No. Name and Description Details
!
ATTENTION: Risk of injury or equipment damage exists. Parameter 41 - [Peer Flt Action] lets you determine the action of the adapter and connected drive if the adapter is unable to communicate with the designated peer. By default, this parameter faults the drive. Y ou can set this parameter so that the drive continues to run, however, precautions should be taken to verify that the setting of this parameter does not create a risk of injury or equipment damage. When commissioning the drive, verify that your system responds correctly to various situations (for example, a disconnected cable).
255.255.255.255
[Peer Inp Addr 1]
[Peer Inp Addr 2]
[Peer Inp Addr 3]
[Peer Inp Addr 4]
I I
Adapter Parameters B-7
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

48 [Peer Inp Status]
Displays the status of the consumed peer I/O input
connection.

Values: 0 = Off
1 = Waiting
2 = Running
3 = Faulted
Type: Read Only
49 50
[Peer A Output]
[Peer B Output]
Selects the source of the peer I/O output data. The
adapter transmits this data to the network.

Important: Changes to these parameters are
ignored when Parameter 51 - [Peer Out Enable]
is set to ‘1’ (On).

Default: 0 = Off
Default: 0 = Off
Values: 0 = Off
1 = Cmd/Ref
2 = Datalink A Input
3 = Datalink B Input
4 = Datalink C Input
5 = Datalink D Input
6 = Datalink A Output
7 = Datalink B Output
8 = Datalink C Output
9 = Datalink D Output
Type: Read/Write
Reset Required: No
51 [Peer Out Enable]
Determines if peer I/O output is on or off.

Default: 0 = Off
Values: 0 = Off
1 = On
Type: Read/Write
Reset Required: No
52 [Peer Out Time]
Sets the minimum time that an adapter will wait
when transmitting data to a peer.

Important: Changes to these parameters are
ignored when Parameter 51 - [Peer Out Enable]
is set to ‘1’ (On).

Default: 10.00 Seconds
Minimum: 0.01 Seconds
Maximum: 10.00 Seconds
Type: Read/Write
Reset Required: No
53 [Peer Out Skip]
Sets the maximum time that an adapter will wait
when transmitting data to a peer. The value of
Parameter 52 - [Peer Out Time] is multiplied by
the value of this parameter to set the time.

Important: Changes to these parameters are
ignored when Parameter 51 - [Peer Out Enable]
is set to ‘1’ (On).

Default: 1
Minimum: 1
Maximum: 16
Type: Read/Write
Reset Required: No
54 [Access Control]
This parameter is only available for Series A
adapters, firmware revision 2.003 or earlier.

Sets the access to the Web interface and Web
configurable email notification feature.

Default: xxxx xx01
Bit Values: 0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Type: Read/Write
Reset Required: No

55 [Web Enable]
This parameter is only available for Series B
adapters, firmware revision 3.xxx or later.

Displays the setting of the adapter Web Pages
Switch (SW2) when the adapter was last reset.

Values: 0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Type: Read Only
Parameter
No. Name and Description Details
Bit
Definition
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
E-mail Config
Web Enable
D e f a u l t xxxx … x x x x x x 0 1
B i t 3 1 3 0 2 9 2 8 … 76543210
B-8 Adapter Parameters
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

56 [Web Features]
This parameter is only available for Series B
adapters, firmware revision 3.xxx or later.

Sets the access to the Web interface and Web
configurable email notification feature.

Default: xxxx xxx1
Bit Values: 0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Type: Read/Write
Reset Required: No
59 [PCCC Ctl Timeout]
This diagnostic parameter verifies that the correct
value of the PCCC (Programmable Controller
Communications Command) control timeout is set.

Minimum: 0
Maximum: 65535
Type: Read Only
Parameter
No. Name and Description Details
Bit
Definition
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
E-mail Cfg
D e f a u l t xxxxxxx1
B i t 765432101 111 1 11
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

Appendix C
EtherNet/IP Objects
This appendix presents information about the EtherNet/IP objects that can be accessed using Explicit Messages. For information on the format of Explicit Messages and example ladder logic programs, see Chapter 6, Using Explicit Messaging.

Supported Data Types
Object Class Code Page Object Class Code Page
Hex. Dec. Hex. Dec.

Identity Object 0x01 1 C-2 DPI Fault Object 0x97 151 C-22 Assembly Object 0x04 4 C-3 DPI Alarm Object 0x98 152 C-24 Register Object 0x07 7 C-4 DPI Diagnostic Object 0x99 153 C-26 Parameter Object (1) 0x0F 15 C-5 DPI Time Object 0x9B 155 C-28 Parameter Group Object (1) 0x10 16 C-7 Host DPI Parameter Object (2) 0x9F 159 C-30 PCCC Object 0x67 103 C-8 TCP/IP Interface Object 0xF5 245 C-36 DPI Device Object 0x92 146 C-13 Ethernet Link Object 0xF6 246 C-37 DPI Parameter Object 0x93 147 C-16
(1) These objects are not supported when the adapter is used with a PowerFlex 750-Series drive. (2) This object is only supported when the adapter is used with a PowerFlex 750-Series drive.

TIP: See the EtherNet/IP specification for more information about EtherNet/IP objects. Information about the EtherNet/IP specification is available on the ODV A website (http://www.odva.org).

Data Type Description
BOOL 8-bit value -- low bit is true or false
BOOL[n] Array of n bits
BYTE 8-bit unsigned integer
CONTAINER 32-bit parameter value - sign extended if necessary DINT 32-bit signed integer
DWORD 32-bit unsigned integer
INT 16-bit signed integer
LWORD 64-bit unsigned integer
REAL 32-bit floating point
SHORT_STRING 1-byte length indicator + that many characters SINT 8-bit signed integer
STRING[n] Array of n characters
STRUCT Structure name only - no size in addition to elements TCHAR 8 or 16-bit character
UDINT 32-bit unsigned integer
UINT 16-bit unsigned integer
USINT 8-bit unsigned integer
WORD 16-bit unsigned integer
►
C-2 EtherNet/IP Objects
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

Identity Object Class Code
Services
Instances
The number of instances depends on the number of components in the device connected to the adapter. This number of components can be read in Instance 0, Attribute 2.

Class Attributes
Instance Attributes
Hexadecimal Decimal
0x01 1
Implemented for:

Service Code Class Instance Service Name
0x05 No Y es Reset
0x0E Y es Y es Get_Attribute_Single
0x01 Y es Y es Get_Attributes_All
Instance Description
0C lass
1H ost
2…15 Peripherals on Ports 1…14
Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description
2 Get Max Instance WORD Total number of instances
Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description
1 Get Vendor ID WORD 1 = Allen-Bradley
2 Get Device Type WORD 123
3 Get Product Code WORD Number identifying product name and rating 4 Get Revision:

Major
Minor
STRUCT of:

BYTE
BYTE
Value varies
Value varies
5 Get Status WORD Bit 0 = Owned
Bit 8 = Minor recoverable fault
Bit 10 = Major recoverable fault
6 Get Serial Number DWORD Unique 32-bit number
7 Get Product Name SHORT_STRING Product name and rating EtherNet/IP Objects C-3
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

Assembly Object Class Code
Services
Instances
Class Attributes
Instance Attributes
Important: Setting an assembly object attribute can be done only when the Control Timeout (class attribute 100) has been set to a non-zero value.

Hexadecimal Decimal
0x04 4
Implemented for:

Service Code Class Instance Service Name
0x0E Y es Y es Get_Attribute_Single
0x10 Y es Y es Set_Attribute_Single
Instance Description
1 All I/O data being read from the DPI device (read-only) 2 All I/O data written to the DPI device (read/write)
Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description
1 Get Revision WORD 2
2 Get Max Instance WORD 2
100 Set Control Timeout WORD Control timeout in seconds Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description
1 Get Number of
Members
WORD 1
2 Get Member List ARRAY of STRUCT:

WORD
WORD
Packed EPATH
Size of member data
Size of member path
Member path
3 Conditional
(1)
(1) For instance 1, access rule for the data attribute is Get. For instance 2, it is Get/Set.

Data Array of Bits Data to be transferred
4 Get Size WORD Size of assembly data in bits
C-4 EtherNet/IP Objects
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

Register Object Class Code
Services
Instances
Class Attributes
Instance Attributes
Important: Setting a Register object attribute can be done only when the Control Timeout (class attribute 100) has been set to a non-zero value.

Hexadecimal Decimal
0x07 7
Service Code Implemented for: Service Name
Class Instance
0x0E Y es Y es Get_Attribute_Single
0x10 Y es Y es Set_Attribute_Single
Instance Description
1 All I/O data being read from the DPI device (read-only) 2 All I/O data written to the DPI device (read/write)
3 Logic Status and Feedback data (read-only)
4 Logic Command and Reference data (read/write)
5 Datalink A (input data from device to scanner) (read only) 6 Datalink A (output data from scanner to device) (read/write) 7 Datalink B (input data from device to scanner) (read only) 8 Datalink B (output data from scanner to device) (read/write) 9 Datalink C (input data from device to scanner) (read only) 10 Datalink C (output data from scanner to device) (read/write) 11 Datalink D (input data from device to scanner) (read only) 12 Datalink D (output data from scanner to device) (read/write) 13 Logic Status and Feedback Data (read-only)
14 Mask
(1) (read/write)
(1) The mask command word is set to the value of the first word of the data where there are ones in the second word of the data. Command = (word 1 and not word 2) or (word 1 and word 2). This only controls specified bits in the Logic Command data to the DPI product and does not change the Reference value.
15 Logic Status (read-only)
16 Logic Command (read/write)
17 Feedback (read-only)
18 Reference (read/write)
Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description
100 Set Control Timeout WORD Control timeout in seconds Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description
1 Get Bad Flag BOOL If set to 1, then attribute 4 may contain invalid data. 0 = good
1 = bad
2 Get Direction BOOL Direction of data transfer
0 = Producer Register (drive to network)
1 = Consumer Register (network to drive)
3 Get Size WORD Size of register data in bits
4 Conditional (1) Data ARRAY of BITS Data to be transferred (1) For this attribute, the Access Rule is Get if Direction = 0. The Access Rule is Set if Direction = 1.

EtherNet/IP Objects C-5
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

Parameter Object Class Code
Important: This object is not supported when the adapter is used with a PowerFlex 750-Series drive.

Services
Instances
The number of instances depends on the number of parameters in the DPI drive. The adapter parameters are appended to the list of drive parameters.

The total number of parameters can be read in Instance 0, Attribute 2.

Class Attributes
Hexadecimal Decimal
0x0F 15
Service Code Implemented for: Service Name
Class Instance
0x01 Y es Y es Get_Attributes_All
0x05 Y es No Reset
0x0E Y es Y es Get_Attribute_Single
0x10 Y es Y es Set_Attribute_Single
0x4B No Y es Get_Enum_String
Instance Description
0 Class Attributes
1 Drive Parameter 1 Attributes
…
…
n Last Drive Parameter n Attributes (1)
(1) n represents the number of parameters in the drive. n + 1 Adapter Parameter 1 Attributes…
…
n + m Last Adapter Parameter m Attributes (2)
(2) m represents the number of parameters in the adapter.

Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description
1 Get Revision WORD 1
2 Get Max Instance WORD Number of parameters
8 Get Parameter Class Descriptor WORD 0 = False, 1 = True Bit 0 = Supports parameter instances
Bit 1 = Supports full attributes
Bit 2 = Must do NVS save command
Bit 3 = Parameters are stored in NVS
9 Get Configuration Assembly Instance WORD 0
10 Set Native Language BYTE 0 = English
1 = French
2 = Spanish
3 = Italian
4 = German
5 = Japanese
6 = Portuguese
7 = Mandarin Chinese
8 = Russian
9 = Dutch
C-6 EtherNet/IP Objects
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

Instance Attributes
Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description
1 (1) Parameter Value (2) (3)
2 Get Link Path Size BYTE 0 = No link specified
n = The size of Attribute 3 in bytes
3 Get Link Path (4)
4 Get Descriptor WORD 0 = False, 1 = True
Bit 1 = Supports ENUMs
Bit 2 = Supports scaling
Bit 3 = Supports scaling links
Bit 4 = Read only
Bit 5 = Monitor
Bit 6 = Extended precision scaling
5 Get Data Type BYTE 1 = WORD (16-bit)
2 = UINT (16-bit)
3 = INT (16-bit)
5 = SINT
6 = DINT
8 = USINT
9 = UDINT
11 = REAL
22 = SHORT_STRING
24 = BYTE
25 = DWORD
6 Get Data Size BYTE
(3)
7 Get Parameter Name String SHORT_STRING (3)
8 Get Units String SHORT_STRING (3)
9 Get Help String SHORT_STRING Null string
10 Get Minimum Value (2) (3)
11 Get Maximum Value (2) (3)
12 Get Default Value (2) (3)
13 Get Scaling Multiplier WORD (3)
14 Get Scaling Divisor WORD (3)
15 Get Scaling Base WORD (3)
16 Get Scaling Offset WORD (3)
17 Get Multiplier Link WORD (3)
18 Get Divisor Link WORD (3)
19 Get Base Link WORD (3)
20 Get Offset Link WORD (3)
21 Get Decimal Precision BYTE (3)
(1) Access rule is defined in Bit 4 of instance attribute 4 (0 = Get/Set, 1 = Get). (2) Specified in descriptor, data type, and data size.
(3) Value varies based on parameter instance.
(4) See the EtherNet/IP specification for a description of the link path.

EtherNet/IP Objects C-7
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

Parameter Group Object Class Code
Important: This object is not supported when the adapter is used with a PowerFlex 750-Series drive.

Services
Instances
The number of instances depends on the number of groups in the device. A group of adapter parameters is appended to the list of groups in the device.

The total number of groups can be read in Instance 0, Attribute 2.

Class Attributes
Instance Attributes
Hexadecimal Decimal
0x10 16
Service Code Implemented for: Service Name
Class Instance
0x0E Y es Y es Get_Attribute_Single
0x10 Y es No Set_Attribute_Single
Number Description
0 Class Attributes
1 Drive Group 1 Attributes
…
…
n Last Drive Group Attributes
n + 1 Adapter Group Attributes
Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description
1 Get Parameter group version WORD 1
2 Get Max Instance WORD Total number of groups
8 Set Native Language BYTE 0 = English
1 = French
2 = Spanish
3 = Italian
4 = German
5 = Japanese
6 = Portuguese
7 = Mandarin Chinese
8 = Russian
9 = Dutch
Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description
1 Get Group Name String SHORT_STRING Group name
2 Get Number of Members in Group WORD Number of parameters in group 3 Get 1st Parameter Number in Group WORD (1)
4 Get 2nd Parameter Number in Group WORD (1)
nG e t
… WORD (1)
(1) Value varies based on group instance.

C-8 EtherNet/IP Objects
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

PCCC Object Class Code
Services
Instances
Supports Instance 1.

Class Attributes
Not supported.

Instance Attributes
Not supported.

Message Structure for Execute_PCCC
Hexadecimal Decimal
0x67 103
Service Code Implemented for: Service Name
Class Instance
0x4B No Y es Execute_PCCC
0x4C No Y es Execute_DH+
Request Response
Name Data Type Description Name Data Type Description
Length USINT Length of requestor ID Length USINT Length of requestor ID Vendor UINT Vendor number of requestor Vendor UINT Vendor number of requestor Serial
Number
UDINT ASA serial number of requestor Serial
Number
UDINT ASA serial number of requestor
Other Product
Specific
Identifier of user, task, etc. on the
requestor
Other Product
Specific
Identifier of user, task, etc. on the requestor
CMD USINT Command byte CMD USINT Command byte
STS USINT 0 STS USINT Status byte
TNSW UINT Transport word TNSW UINT Transport word. Same value as the request.

FNC USINT Function code; not used for all CMDs. EXT_STS USINT Extended status; not used for all CMDs.

PCCC_
params
ARRAY of
USINT
CMD/FNC specific parameters PCCC_
results
ARRAY of
USINT
CMD/FNC specific result data
EtherNet/IP Objects C-9
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

Message Structure for Execute_DH+
The adapter supports the following PCCC command types:

For more information regarding PCCC commands, see DF1 Protocol and Command Set Manual, publication 1770-6.5.16
Request Response
Name Data Type Description Name Data Type Description
DLink UINT Destination Link ID DLink UINT Destination Link ID DSta USINT Destination Station number DSta USINT Destination Station number DUser USINT Destination “User” number DUser USINT Destination “User” number SLink UINT Source Link ID SLink UINT Source Link ID
SSta USINT Source Station number SSta USINT Source Station number SUser USINT Source User number SUser USINT Source User number CMD USINT Command byte CMD USINT Command byte
STS USINT 0 STS USINT Status byte
TNSW UINT Transport word TNSW UINT Transport word. Same value as the request.

FNC USINT Function code; not used for all CMDs EXT_STS USINT Extended status; not used for all CMDs PCCC_
params
ARRAY of
USINT
CMD/FNC specific parameters PCCC_
results
ARRAY of
USINT
CMD/FNC specific result data
CMD FNC Description
0x06 0x03 Identify host and some status
0x0F 0x67 PLC-5 typed write
0x0F 0x68 PLC-5 typed read
0x0F 0x95 Encapsulate other protocol
0x0F 0xA2 SLC 500 protected typed read with 3 address fields 0x0F 0xAA SLC 500 protected typed write with 3 address fields 0x0F 0xA1 SLC 500 protected typed read with 2 address fields 0x0F 0xA9 SLC 500 protected typed write with 2 address fields 0x0F 0x00 Word range read
0x0F 0x01 Word range write
C-10 EtherNet/IP Objects
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

N-Files
N-File Description
N40 This N-file lets you use Emulated Block Transfer messages to read and write many types of DPI messages. To use Emulated Block Transfer messages, you send a Write message to N40:0…N40:63, wait until the adapter responds with a reply message, and then read the response data in N40:0…N40:63 with a Read message.

For details about Block Transfer messages and the data required for each byte in the N-File, see the Remote I/O Adapter User Manual, publication 20COMM-UM004.

Bits 15…8 are the Most Significant Byte. Bits 7…0 are the Least Significant Byte.

Write Read
Bits 15 0 15 0
N40:0 0x00 Length (in Bytes) 0x00 Length (in Bytes)
N40:1 DPI Port 0x81 Status Size Status Type
N40:2 0x00 CIP Service Data
(length varies based on message)N40:3 CIP Class
N40:4 CIP Instance
N40:5 CIP Attribute
N40:6 Data
(length varies based on message)
…
N40:63
N41 This N-file lets you read and write control I/O messages. Y ou can write control I/O messages only when all of the following conditions are true:
 The adapter is not receiving I/O from a scanner. For example, there is no scanner on the network, the scanner is in idle (program) mode, the scanner is faulted, or the adapter is not mapped to the scanner.
 The adapter is not receiving peer I/O from another adapter.  The value of N42:3 is set to a non-zero value.

Write Read
N41:0
N41:1
N41:2
N41:3
N41:4
N41:5
N41:6
N41:7
N41:8
N41:9
N41:10
N41:11
N41:12
N41:13
N41:14
N41:15
N41:16
N41:17
N41:18
Logic Command Word
Reference (least significant word)
Reference (most significant word)
Datalink A1 (least significant word)
Datalink A1 (most significant word)
Datalink A2 (least significant word)
Datalink A2 (most significant word)
Datalink B1 (least significant word)
Datalink B1 (most significant word)
Datalink B2 (least significant word)
Datalink B2 (most significant word)
Datalink C1 (least significant word)
Datalink C1 (most significant word)
Datalink C2 (least significant word)
Datalink C2 (most significant word)
Datalink D1 (least significant word)
Datalink D1 (most significant word)
Datalink D2 (least significant word)
Datalink D2 (most significant word)
Logic Status Word
Feedback (least significant word)
Feedback (most significant word)
Datalink A1 (least significant word)
Datalink A1 (most significant word)
Datalink A2 (least significant word)
Datalink A2 (most significant word)
Datalink B1 (least significant word)
Datalink B1 (most significant word)
Datalink B2 (least significant word)
Datalink B2 (most significant word)
Datalink C1 (least significant word)
Datalink C1 (most significant word)
Datalink C2 (least significant word)
Datalink C2 (most significant word)
Datalink D1 (least significant word)
Datalink D1 (most significant word)
Datalink D2 (least significant word)
Datalink D2 (most significant word)
N42 This N-file lets you read and write some values configuring the port.

N42:3 Time-out (read/write): Time (in seconds) allowed between messages to the N41 file. If the adapter does not receive a message in the specified time, it performs the fault action configured in its [Comm Flt Action] parameter. A valid setting is between 1 and 32767 seconds (5…20 seconds is recommended).

N42:7 Adapter Port Number (read only): DPI port on the drive to which the adapter is connected.

N42:8 Peer Adapters (read only): Bit field of devices having DPI Peer capabilities.

I
I
EtherNet/IP Objects C-11
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

Important: If your controller or HMI platform supports CIP messaging, use the CIP Parameter object to get and set parameters.

N45 This N-file lets you read and write control I/O messages. Y ou can write control I/O messages only when all of the following conditions are true:
 The adapter is not receiving I/O from a scanner. For example, there is no scanner on the network, the scanner is in idle (program) mode, the scanner is faulted, or the adapter is not mapped to the scanner.
 The adapter is not receiving peer I/O from another adapter.  The value of N42:3 is set to a non-zero value.

Write Read
N45:0
N45:1
N45:2
N45:3
N45:4
N45:5
N45:6
N45:7
N45:8
N45:9
N45:10
N45:11
N45:12
N45:13
N45:14
N45:15
N45:16
N45:17
N45:18
N45:19
N45:20
N45:21
N45:22
N45:23
N45:24
N45:25
N45:26
N45:27
N45:28
N45:29
N45:30
N45:31
N45:32
N45:33
N45:34
N45:35
Logic Command (least significant)
Logic Command (most significant)
Reference (least significant)
Reference (most significant)
DL From Net 01 (least significant)
DL From Net 01 (most significant)
DL From Net 02 (least significant)
DL From Net 02 (most significant)
DL From Net 03 (least significant)
DL From Net 03 (most significant)
DL From Net 04 (least significant)
DL From Net 04 (most significant)
DL From Net 05 (least significant)
DL From Net 05 (most significant)
DL From Net 06 (least significant)
DL From Net 06 (most significant)
DL From Net 07 (least significant)
DL From Net 07 (most significant)
DL From Net 08 (least significant)
DL From Net 08 (most significant)
DL From Net 09 (least significant)
DL From Net 09 (most significant)
DL From Net 10 (least significant)
DL From Net 10 (most significant)
DL From Net 11 (least significant)
DL From Net 11 (most significant)
DL From Net 12 (least significant)
DL From Net 12 (most significant)
DL From Net 13 (least significant)
DL From Net 13 (most significant)
DL From Net 14 (least significant)
DL From Net 14 (most significant)
DL From Net 15 (least significant)
DL From Net 15 (most significant)
DL From Net 16 (least significant)
DL From Net 16 (most significant)
Logic Status (least significant)
Logic Status (most significant)
Feedback (least significant)
Feedback (most significant)
DL To Net 01 (least significant)
DL To Net 01 (most significant)
DL To Net 02 (least significant)
DL To Net 02 (most significant)
DL To Net 03 (least significant)
DL To Net 03 (most significant)
DL To Net 04 (least significant)
DL To Net 04 (most significant)
DL To Net 05 (least significant)
DL To Net 05 (most significant)
DL To Net 06 (least significant)
DL To Net 06 (most significant)
DL To Net 07 (least significant)
DL To Net 07 (most significant)
DL To Net 08 (least significant)
DL To Net 08 (most significant)
DL To Net 09 (least significant)
DL To Net 09 (most significant)
DL To Net 10 (least significant)
DL To Net 10 (most significant)
DL To Net 11 (least significant)
DL To Net 11 (most significant)
DL To Net 12 (least significant)
DL To Net 12 (most significant)
DL To Net 13 (least significant)
DL To Net 13 (most significant)
DL To Net 14 (least significant)
DL To Net 14 (most significant)
DL To Net 15 (least significant)
DL To Net 15 (most significant)
DL To Net 16 (least significant)
DL To Net 16 (most significant)
N-File Description
N150…N199 These N-files let you read and write parameter values in DPI Port 0 (the host PowerFlex drive) as 32-bit double words. Y ou can interpret the data in various ways (for example, 32-bit real, 32-bit integer) To read a parameter, you need to send a message with two elements. For example, to read parameter 1, read two elements beginning at N150:2. As another example, to read parameters 2…6, read ten elements beginning at N150:4.

N150:0…1
N150:2…249
N151:0…249
N152:0…249
N153:0…249
Number of parameters in the drive
Drive parameters 1…124
Drive parameters 125…249
Drive parameters 250…374
Drive parameters 375…499
...
...

N199:0…249 Drive parameters 6125…6249
C-12 EtherNet/IP Objects
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

N201…N212 These N-files let you read and write values to DPI and Host parameters in Ports 1…14 (for example, a HIM or adapter) as 32-bit double words. Y ou can interpret the data in various ways (for example, 32-bit real, 32-bit integer) To read a parameter, you need to send a message with two elements. For example, to read parameter 1 in the peripheral connected to DPI port 1, read two elements beginning at N201:2. As another example, to read parameters 2…6 in the peripheral connected to DPI port 5 (the adapter), read ten elements beginning at N209:4.

N201:0…1
N201:2…249
N202:0…249
N203:0…1
N203:2…249
N204:0…249
N205:0…1
N205:2…249
N206:0…249
N207:0…1
N207:2…249
N208:0…249
N209:0…1
N209:2…249
N210:0…249
N211:0…1
N211:2…249
N212:0…249
Number of parameters in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 1 Parameters 1…124 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 1
Parameters 125…249 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 1
Number of parameters in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 2 Parameters 1…124 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 2
Parameters 125…249 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 2
Number of parameters in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 3 Parameters 1…124 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 3
Parameters 125…249 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 3
Number of parameters in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 4 Parameters 1…124 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 4
Parameters 125…249 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 4
Number of parameters in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 5 Parameters 1…124 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 5
Parameters 125…249 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 5
Number of parameters in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 6 Parameters 1…124 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 6
Parameters 125…249 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 6
The following N-Files are supported only when the adapter is used with a PowerFlex 750-Series drive.

N213:0…1
N213:2…249
N214:0…249
N215:0…1
N215:2…249
N216:0…249
N217:0…1
N217:2…249
N218:0…249
N219:0…1
N219:2…249
N220:0…249
N221:0…1
N221:2…249
N222:0…249
N223:0…1
N223:2…249
N224:0…249
N225:0…1
N225:2…249
N226:0…249
N227:0…1
N227:2…249
N228:0…249
Number of parameters in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 7 Parameters 1…124 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 7
Parameters 125…249 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 7
Number of parameters in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 8 Parameters 1…124 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 8
Parameters 125…249 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 8
Number of parameters in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 9 Parameters 1…124 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 9
Parameters 125…249 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 9
Number of parameters in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 10 Parameters 1…124 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 10
Parameters 125…249 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 10 Number of parameters in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 11 Parameters 1…124 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 11
Parameters 125…249 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 11 Number of parameters in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 12 Parameters 1…124 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 12
Parameters 125…249 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 12 Number of parameters in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 13 Parameters 1…124 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 13
Parameters 125…249 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 13 Number of parameters in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 14 Parameters 1…124 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 14
Parameters 125…249 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 14 N-File Description
EtherNet/IP Objects C-13
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

DPI Device Object Class Code
Services
Instances
The number of instances depends on the number of components in the device. The total number of components can be read in Instance 0, Class Attribute 4.

Class Attributes
Hexadecimal Decimal
0x92 146
Service Code Implemented for: Service Name
Class Instance
0x0E Y es Y es Get_Attribute_Single
0x10 Y es Y es Set_Attribute_Single
Instances (Hex.) (Dec.) Device Example Description
0x0000…0x3FFF 0…16383 Host 0 Class Attributes (Drive)
0x4000…0x43FF 16384…17407 Adapter 1 Drive Component 1
0x4400…0x47FF 17408…18431 DPI Port 1 2 Drive Component 2 0x4800…0x4BFF 18432…19455 DPI Port 2
…
…
0x4C00…0x4FFF 19456…20479 DPI Port 3 16384 Class Attributes (Adapter) 0x5000…0x53FF 20480…21503 DPI Port 4 16385 Adapter Component 1 0x5400…0x57FF 21504…22527 DPI Port 5
…
…
0x5800…0x5BFF 22528…23551 DPI Port 6
0x5C00…0x5FFF (1)
(1) These instances are supported only when the adapter is used with a PowerFlex 750-Series drive. 22552…24575 DPI Port 7
0x6000…0x63FF (1) 24576…25599 DPI Port 8
0x6400…0x67FF (1) 25600…26623 DPI Port 9
0x6800…0x6BFF (1) 26624…27647 DPI Port 10
0x6C00…0x6FFF (1) 27648…28671 DPI Port 11
0x7000…0x73FF (1) 28672…29695 DPI Port 12
0x7400…0x77FF (1) 29696…30719 DPI Port 13
0x7800…0x7BFF (1) 30720…31743 DPI Port 14
Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description
0 Get Family Code BYTE 0x00 = DPI Peripheral
0x30 = PowerFlex 70
0x34 = PowerFlex 700H
0x38, 0x39, or 0x3A= PowerFlex 700
0x40 = PowerFlex 7000
0x48, 0x49, or 0x4A = PowerFlex 700S
0x5A = SMC Flex
0x68, 0x69, or 0x6A = PowerFlex 700VC
0x90 = PowerFlex 753/755
0xA0 = 20-750-xxx Option Module
0xFF = HIM
1 Get Family Text STRING[16] Text identifying the device.

C-14 EtherNet/IP Objects
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

2 Set Language Code BYTE 0 = English
1 = French
2 = Spanish
3 = Italian
4 = German
5 = Japanese
6 = Portuguese
7 = Mandarin Chinese
8 = Russian
9 = Dutch
3 Get Product Series BYTE 1 = A
2 = B …
4 Get Number of Components BYTE Number of components (for example, main control board, I/O boards, and so forth) in the device.
5 Set User Definable Text STRING[16] Text identifying the device with a user-supplied name. 6 Get Status Text STRING[12] Text describing the status of the device. 7 Get Configuration Code BYTE Identification of variations. 8 Get Configuration Text STRING[16] Text identifying a variation of a family device. 9 Get Brand Code WORD 0x0001 = Allen-Bradley
11 Get NVS Checksum WORD Checksum of the Nonvolatile Storage in a device. 12 Get Class Revision WORD 2 = DPI
13 Get Character Set Code BYTE 0 = SCANport HIM
1 = ISO 8859-1 (Latin 1)
2 = ISO 8859-2 (Latin 2)
3 = ISO 8859-3 (Latin 3)
4 = ISO 8859-4 (Latin 4)
5 = ISO 8859-5 (Cyrillic)
6 = ISO 8859-6 (Arabic)
7 = ISO 8859-7 (Greek)
8 = ISO 8859-8 (Hebrew)
9 = ISO 8859-9 (Turkish)
10 = ISO 8859-10 (Nordic)
255 = ISO 10646 (Unicode)
14 Get Product Option Support BOOL[64]
15 Get Languages Supported STRUCT of:

BYTE
BYTE[n]
Number of Languages
Language Codes (see Class Attribute 2)
16 Get Date of Manufacture STRUCT of:

WORD
BYTE
BYTE
Ye a r
Month
Day
17 Get Product Revision STRUCT of:

BYTE
BYTE
Major Firmware Release
Minor Firmware Release
18 Get Serial Number DWORD Value between 0x00000000 and 0xFFFFFFFF 19 Set Language Selected BYTE 0 = Default (HIM will prompt at start up) 1 = Language was selected (no prompt)
20 Set Customer-Generated Firmware STRING[36] GUID (Globally Unique Identifier) identifying customer firmware flashed into the device.
30 Get International Status Text STRINGN Text describing the status of device with support for Unicode. 31 Get/Set International User Definable Text STRINGN Text identifying the device with a user-supplied name with support for Unicode.

Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description
EtherNet/IP Objects C-15
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

Instance Attributes
34 Get Key Information STRUCT of:

DWORD
DWORD
WORD
WORD
WORD
BYTE
BYTE
BYTE
BYTE
BYTE
BYTE[16]
Rating Code
Device Serial Number
Customization Code
Customization Revision
Brand Code
Family Code
Config Code
Language Code
Major Revision
Minor Revision
Customer-Generated Firmware UUID
35 Get NVS CRC DWORD A 32-bit CRC of the Non-Volatile Storage in a device. 39 Get SI Driver Code WORD Code identifying the protocol between the device and host. 128 Get Customization Code WORD Code identifying the customized device. 129 Get Customization Revision Number WORD Revision of the customized device. 130 Get Customization Device Text STRING[32] Text identifying the customized device.

Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description
Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description
3 Get Component Name STRING[32] Name of the component
4 Get Component Firmware Revision STRUCT of:

BYTE
BYTE
Major Revision
Minor Revision
8 Get Component Serial Number DWORD Value between 0x00000000 and 0xFFFFFFFF 9 Get International Component Name STRINGN Name of the component with support for Unicode.

C-16 EtherNet/IP Objects
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

DPI Parameter Object Class Code
To access ‘Host Config’ parameters, use the HOST DPI Parameter Object (Class code 0x9F).

Instances
The number of instances depends on the number of parameters in the device. The total number of parameters can be read in Instance 0, Attribute

0. Class Attributes
Hexadecimal Decimal
0x93 147
Instances (Hex.) (Dec.) Device Example Description
0x0000…0x3FFF 0…16383 Host 0 Class Attributes (Drive)
0x4000…0x43FF 16384…17407 Adapter 1 Drive Parameter 1 Attributes 0x4400…0x47FF 17408…18431 DPI Port 1 2 Drive Parameter 2 Attributes 0x4800…0x4BFF 18432…19455 DPI Port 2
…
…
0x4C00…0x4FFF 19456…20479 DPI Port 3 16384 Class Attributes (Adapter) 0x5000…0x53FF 20480…21503 DPI Port 4 16385 Adapter Parameter 1 Attributes 0x5400…0x57FF 21504…22527 DPI Port 5
…
…
0x5800…0x5BFF 22528…23551 DPI Port 6
0x5C00…0x5FFF (1)
(1) These instances are supported only when the adapter is used with a PowerFlex 750-Series drive. 23552…24575 DPI Port 7
0x6000…0x63FF (1) 24576…25599 DPI Port 8
0x6400…0x67FF (1) 25600…26623 DPI Port 9
0x6800…0x6BFF (1) 26624…27647 DPI Port 10
0x6C00…0x6FFF (1) 27648…28671 DPI Port 11
0x7000…0x73FF (1) 28672…29695 DPI Port 12
0x7400…0x77FF (1) 29696…30719 DPI Port 13
0x7800…0x7BFF (1) 30720…31743 DPI Port 14
Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description
0 Get Number of Instances WORD Number of parameters in the device 1 Set Write Protect Password WORD 0 = Password disabled n = Password
2 Set NVS Command Write BYTE 0 = No Operation
1 = Store values in active memory to NVS
2 = Load values in NVS to active memory
3 = Load default values to active memory
3 Get NVS Parameter Value Checksum WORD Checksum of all parameter values in a user set in NVS 4 Get NVS Link Value Checksum WORD Checksum of parameter links in a user set in NVS 5 Get First Accessible Parameter WORD First parameter available if parameters are protected by passwords. A ‘0’ indicates all parameters are protected. 7 Get Class Revision WORD 2 = DPI
8 Get First Parameter Processing Error WORD The first parameter that has been written with a value outside of its range. A ‘0’ indicates no errors.
9 Set Link Command BYTE 0 = No Operation
1 = Clear All Parameter Links (This does not clear links to function blocks.)
EtherNet/IP Objects C-17
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

Instance Attributes
Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description
6 Get DPI Offline Read Full STRUCT of:

BOOL[32]

CONTAINER

CONTAINER
STRING[16]
STRING[4]
WORD
WORD
WORD
WORD
WORD
WORD
WORD
BYTE
BYTE
WORD
WORD

CONTAINER
WORD
WORD
WORD
INT
Descriptor
Offline minimum value
Offline maximum value
Offline default value
Parameter name
Offline parameter units
Online minimum parameter instance
Online maximum parameter instance
Online default parameter instance
Multiple parameter instance
Divisor parameter instance
Base parameter instance
Offset parameter instance
Formula number
Pad byte (always zero)
Help instance
Pad word (always a value of zero)
Parameter value
Multiplier
Divisor
Base
Offset
7 Get DPI Online Read Full STRUCT of:

BOOL[32]

CONTAINER
(1)

CONTAINER

CONTAINER
WORD
WORD
STRING[4]
WORD
WORD
WORD
INT
BYTE[3]
BYTE
STRING[16]
Descriptor (see page C-19
)
Parameter value
Minimum value
Maximum value
Default value
Next parameter
Previous parameter
Units (for example, Amp, Hz)
Multiplier
(2)
Divisor (2)
Base (2)
Offset (2)
Link (source of the value) (0 = no link)
Always zero (0)
Parameter name
8 Get DPI Descriptor BOOL[32] Descriptor (see page C-19 ) 9 Get/Set DPI Parameter Value Various Parameter value in NVS. (3) 10 Get/Set DPI RAM Parameter Value Various Parameter value in temporary memory.

Valid only for DPI drives.
11 Get/Set DPI Link BYTE[3] Link (parameter or function block that is the source of the value) (0 = no link)
12 Get Help Object Instance WORD ID for help text for this parameter 13 Get DPI Read Basic STRUCT of:

BOOL[32]

CONTAINER

CONTAINER
STRING[16]
STRING[4]
Descriptor (see page C-19
)
Parameter value
Minimum value
Maximum value
Default value
Parameter name
Units (for example, Amp, Hz)
14 Get DPI Parameter Name STRING[16] Parameter name
15 Get DPI Parameter Alias STRING[16] Customer supplied parameter name. 16 Get Parameter Processing Error BYTE 0 = No error
1 = Value is less than the minimum
2 = Value is greater than the maximum
C-18 EtherNet/IP Objects
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

18 Get International DPI Offline
Parameter Text
STRUCT of:

STRINGN

STRINGN
International parameter name
International offline units
19 Get International DPI Online
Parameter Text
STRUCT of:

STRINGN

STRINGN
International parameter name
International offline units
20 Get International DPI Online
Read Full
STRUCT of:

BOOL[32]

CONTAINER

CONTAINER
WORD
WORD
WORD
WORD
WORD
INT
BYTE[3]
BYTE
BOOL[32]

STRINGN

STRINGN
Descriptor
Parameter value
Online minimum value
Online maximum value
Online default value
Next
Previous
Multiplier
Divisor
Base
Offset
Link
Pad word (always zero)
Extended descriptor
International parameter name
International online parameter units
21 Get DPI Extended Descriptor DWORD Extended descriptor (see page C-20 )
22 Get International DPI Offline
Read Full
STRUCT of:

BOOL

CONTAINER

CONTAINER
WORD
WORD
WORD
WORD
WORD
WORD
WORD
BYTE
BYTE
WORD
WORD

CONTAINER
WORD
WORD
WORD
INT
BOOL[32]

STRINGN

Padding is used in the CONTAINER to ensure that it is always 32-bits. (2) This value is used in the formulas used to convert the parameter value between display units and internal units. See Formulas for Converting on page C-21.
(3) Do not continually write parameter data to NVS. See the attention on page 6-1.

Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description
EtherNet/IP Objects C-19
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

Descriptor Attributes
Bit Name Description
0 Data Type (Bit 1) Right bit is least significant bit (0). 000 = BYTE used as an array of Boolean
001 = WORD used as an array of Boolean
010 = BYTE (8-bit integer)
011 = WORD (16-bit integer)
100 = DWORD (32-bit integer)
101 = TCHAR (8-bit (not unicode) or 16-bits (unicode)
110 = REAL (32-bit floating point value)
111 = Use bits 16, 17, 18
1 Data Type (Bit 2)
2 Data Type (Bit 3)
3 Sign Type 0 = Unsigned
1 = Signed
4 Hidden 0 = Visible
1 = Hidden
5 Not a Link Sink 0 = Parameter can sink a link
1 = Parameter cannot sink a link
6 Not Recallable 0 = Recallable from NVS
1 = Not Recallable from NVS
7 ENUM 0 = No ENUM text
1 = ENUM text
8 Writable 0 = Read only
1 = Read/write
9 Not Writable When Enabled 0 = Writable when enabled (for example, drive running) 1 = Not writable when enabled
10 Instance 0 = Parameter value is not a Reference to another parameter 1 = Parameter value refers to another parameter
11 Uses Bit ENUM Mask This parameter instance supports the Bit ENUM Mask attribute.

For more information, see the definition of the attribute. 12 Decimal Place (Bit 0) Number of digits to the right of the decimal point. 0000 = 0
1111 = 15
13 Decimal Place (Bit 1)
14 Decimal Place (Bit 2)
15 Decimal Place (Bit 3)
16 Extended Data Type (Bit 4) Right bit is least significant bit (16). 000 = Reserved
001 = DWORD used as an array of Boolean
010 = Reserved
011 = Reserved
100 = Reserved
101 = Reserved
110 = Reserved
111 = Reserved
17 Extended Data Type (Bit 5)
18 Extended Data Type (Bit 6)
19 Parameter Exists Used to mark parameters that are not available to network tools. 20 Not Used Reserved
21 Formula Links Indicates the Formula Data is derived from other parameters. 22 Access Level (Bit 1) A 3-bit field used to control access to parameter data. 23 Access Level (Bit 2)
24 Access Level (Bit 3)
25 Writable ENUM ENUM text: 0 = Read Only, 1 = Read/Write 26 Not a Link Source 0 = May be the source end of a link 1 = May not be the source end of a link
27 Enhanced Bit ENUM Parameter supports enhanced bit ENUMs. 28 Enhanced ENUM Parameter supports enhanced ENUMs.
29 Uses DPI Limits Object Parameter uses the DPI LImits Object. 30 Extended Descriptor Parameter uses Extended Descriptor bits, which can be obtained by reading the DPI Extended Descriptor attribute for this parameter.
31 Always Upload/Download Parameter shall always be included in uploads and downloads.

C-20 EtherNet/IP Objects
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

Extended Descriptor Attributes
Bit Name Description
0 Indirect Mode 0 = Analog (selects entire parameters)
1 = Digital (selects individual bits within parameters) 1 Indirect Type 0 Analog input list (Instance 0xFFFF)
2 Indirect Type 1 Digital input list (Instance 0xFFFE)
3 Indirect Type 2 Feedback list (Instance 0xFFFD)
4 Indirect Type 3 Analog output list (Instance 0xFFFC)
5 Indirect Type 4 Digital output list (Instance 0xFFFB) 6 Indirect Type 5 Undefined (Instance 0xFFFA)
7 Indirect Type 6 Undefined (Instance 0xFFF9)
8 Indirect Type 7 Undefined (Instance 0xFFF8)
9 Indirect Type 8 Undefined (Instance 0xFFF7)
10 Indirect Type 9 Undefined (Instance 0xFFF6)
11 Indirect Type 10 Undefined (Instance 0xFFF5)
12 Indirect Type 11 Undefined (Instance 0xFFF4)
13 Indirect Type 12 Undefined (Instance 0xFFF3)
14 Indirect Type 13 Undefined (Instance 0xFFF2)
15 Indirect Type 14 Parameter-specific list
16 FP Max Decimals Bit 0 These four bits are used on REAL parameters only. They indicate the maximum number of decimal places to be displayed for small values. A value of 0 indicates to not limit the number of decimal places used.
17 FP Max Decimals Bit 1
18 FP Max Decimals Bit 2
19 FP Max Decimals Bit 1
20 Extended Parameter
Reference
0 = Not an Extended Parameter Reference
1 = Extended Parameter Reference
An Extended Parameter Reference contains a reference to another parameter. The value is formatted the same as an analog mode Indirect Selector parameter (SSpppp, where SS = slot number of device to which this Extended Parameter Reference is pointing, and pppp = number of the parameter or diagnostic item to which this Extended Parameter Reference is pointing). Note that an Extended Parameter Reference can only select parameters unlike an Indirect Selector. An Extended Parameter Reference could be used to configure a Datalink or show the source of a Reference (among other uses). 21 Uses Rating Table Object This parameter has rating-dependent defaults and limits that can be obtained from the Rating Table Object. The Offline Read Full will include the default value for the smallest rating and limits that will accommodate the full range of values allowed in the family of devices using this particular combination of Family Code and Config Code. The Online Read Full will include the rating-dependent default and limit values for this particular combination of Family Code, Config Code, and Rating Code. 22 Writable Referenced
Parameter
This bit must be zero unless the parameter is an Extended Parameter Reference. If the parameter is an Extended Parameter Reference, then:
0 = The referenced parameter may be read-only or writable. 1 = The referenced parameter must always be writable (including while running). 23 Disallow Zero This bit must be zero unless the parameter is an Indirect Selector or Extended Parameter Reference. If the parameter is an Indirect Selector or Extended Parameter Reference, then:
0 = Allow zero
1 = Disallow zero
If this bit is cleared (indicating that a value of zero is allowed), the device must support the ‘Zero Text’ parameter attribute so that a software tool or HIM can obtain text from the Zero Text parameter attribute.

If this bit is set (indicating that a value of zero is disallowed), a software tool or HIM will not allow the user to enter a value of zero.
24 Datalink Out This bit is used by offline tools and indicates that this is a Datalink Out parameter. Bit 20 must also be set.
25 Datalink In This bit is used by offline tools and indicates that this is a Datalink In parameter. Bits 20 and 22 must also be set.
26 Not Writable While IO Active This parameter cannot be written if the I/O data being exchanged between the Host and the peripheral is valid.

EtherNet/IP Objects C-21
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

Formulas for Converting
Display Value = ((Internal Value + Offset) x Multiplier x Base) / (Divisor x 10Decimal Places) Internal Value = ((Display Value x Divisor x 10Decimal Places) / (Multiplier x Base)) - Offset Common Services
Object Specific Services
The table below lists the parameters for the Get_Attributes_Scattered and Set_Attributes_Scattered object-specific service.
27 Command Parameter This parameter commands the drive to take an action, such as ‘Reset Defaults’ or ‘Autotune’, and then returns to a value of zero. Offline software tools will not allow setting this parameter to anything other than a value of zero. If an offline file contains a Command Parameter with a non-zero value, the offline software tool will change the value to zero.

Note that command parameters cannot have values that do not return to zero. 28 Current Value Is Default This bit identifies a parameter that will not change if a ‘Reset Defaults’ is commanded. For example, if a drive contains a Language parameter that is set to German, setting defaults will leave the parameter set to German. Likewise, if the parameter is set to French, setting defaults will leave the parameter set to French.
29 Use Zero Text If the ‘Disallow Zero’ bit is set, this bit must be cleared. If the ‘Disallow Zero’ bit is cleared, then:
0 = Use Disabled Text parameter class attribute.
1 = Use Zero Text parameter instance attribute.
30-31 Reserved Reserved
Bit Name Description
Service Code Implemented for: Service Name
Class Instance
0x0E Y es Y es Get_Attribute_Single
0x10 Y es Y es Set_Attribute_Single
Service Code Implemented for: Service Name Allocation Size (in bytes) Class Instance Par. Number Par. Value
0x4B Y es No Get_Attributes_Scattered 2 2
0x4C Y es No Set_Attributes_Scattered 2 2
0x4D (1)
(1) These services are supported only when the adapter is used with a PowerFlex 750-Series drive.

Y es No Get_Attributes_Scattered 4 4
0x4E (1) Y es No Set_Attributes_Scattered 4 4
Name Data Type Description
Parameter Number DWORD Parameter to read or write
Parameter Value DWORD Parameter value to read or write (zero when reading) C-22 EtherNet/IP Objects
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

DPI Fault Object Class Code
Products such as PowerFlex drives use this object for faults. Adapters use this object for events.

Services
Instances
The number of instances depends on the maximum number of faults or events supported in the queue. The maximum number of faults/events can be read in Instance 0, Attribute 2.

Class Attributes
Hexadecimal Decimal
0x97 151
Service Code Implemented for: Service Name
Class Instance
0x0E Y es Y es Get_Attribute_Single
0x10 Y es Y es Set_Attribute_Single
Instances (Hex.) (Dec.) Device Example Description
0x0000…0x3FFF 0…16383 Host 0 Class Attributes (Drive)
0x4000…0x43FF 16384…17407 Adapter 1 Most Recent Drive Fault 0x4400…0x47FF 17408…18431 DPI Port 1 2 Second Most Recent Drive Fault 0x4800…0x4BFF 18432…19455 DPI Port 2
…
…
0x4C00…0x4FFF 19456…20479 DPI Port 3 16384 Class Attributes (Adapter) 0x5000…0x53FF 20480…21503 DPI Port 4 16385 Most Recent Adapter Event 0x5400…0x57FF 21504…22527 DPI Port 5
…
…
0x5800…0x5BFF 22528…23551 DPI Port 6
0x5C00…0x5FFF (1)
(1) These instances are supported only when the adapter is used with a PowerFlex 750-Series drive. 23552…24575 DPI Port 7
0x6000…0x63FF (1) 24576…25599 DPI Port 8
0x6400…0x67FF (1) 25600…26623 DPI Port 9
0x6800…0x6BFF (1) 26624…27647 DPI Port 10
0x6C00…0x6FFF (1) 27648…28671 DPI Port 11
0x7000…0x73FF (1) 28672…29695 DPI Port 12
0x7400…0x77FF (1) 29696…30719 DPI Port 13
0x7800…0x7BFF (1) 30720…31743 DPI Port 14
Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description
1 Get Class Revision WORD Revision of object
2 Get Number of Instances WORD Maximum number of faults/events that the device can record in its queue
3 Set Fault Command Write BYTE 0 = No Operation
1 = Clear Fault/Event
2 = Clear Fault/Event Queue
3 = Reset Device
4 Get Fault Trip Instance Read WORD Fault that tripped the device. For adapters, this value is always 1 when faulted.

EtherNet/IP Objects C-23
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

Instance Attributes
5 Get Fault Data List STRUCT of:

BYTE
BYTE
WORD[n]
Number of faults/events in the queue. A ‘0’
indicates the fault queue is empty.
6 Get Number of Recorded Faults WORD Number of faults/events in the queue. A ‘0’ indicates the fault queue is empty.
7 Get Fault Parameter Reference WORD Number of faults/events in the queue. A ‘0’ indicates the fault queue is empty.

Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description
Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description
0 Get Full/All Information STRUCT of WORD
STRUCT of:

BYTE
BYTE
STRING[16]
STRUCT of:

LWORD
BOOL[16]
WORD
CONTAINER[n]
Fault code
Fault source
DPI port
DPI Device Object
Fault text
Fault time stamp
Timer value (0 = timer not supported)
BOOL[0]: (0 = invalid data, 1 = valid data)
BOOL[1]: (0 = elapsed time, 1 = real time)
BOOL[2…15]: Not used
Reserved
Reserved
1 Get Basic Information STRUCT of WORD
STRUCT of:

BYTE
BYTE
STRUCT of:

LWORD
BOOL[16]
Fault code
Fault source
DPI port
DPI Device Object
Fault time stamp
Timer value (0 = timer not supported)
BOOL[0]: (0 = invalid data, 1 = valid data)
BOOL[1]: (0 = elapsed time, 1 = real time)
BOOL[2…15]: Not used
2 Get International Fault Text STRINGN Text describing the fault with support for Unicode.

C-24 EtherNet/IP Objects
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

DPI Alarm Object Class Code
Products such as PowerFlex drives use this object for alarms or warnings.

Adapters do not support this object.

Services
Instances
The number of instances depends on the maximum number of alarms supported by the queue. The maximum number of alarms can be read in Instance 0, Attribute 2.

Class Attributes
Hexadecimal Decimal
0x98 152
Service Code Implemented for: Service Name
Class Instance
0x0E Y es Y es Get_Attribute_Single
0x10 Y es Y es Set_Attribute_Single
Instances (Hex.) (Dec.) Device Example Description
0x0000…0x3FFF 0…16383 Host 0 Class Attributes (Drive)
Only host devices can have alarms. 1 Most Recent Alarm
2 Second Most Recent Alarm…
…
Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description
1 Get Class Revision WORD Revision of object
2 Get Number of Instances WORD Maximum number of alarms that the device can record in its queue
3 Set Alarm Command Write BYTE 0 = No Operation
1 = Clear Alarm
2 = Clear Alarm Queue
3 = Reset Device
4 Get Fault Data List STRUCT of:

BYTE
BYTE
WORD[n]
Reserved
5 Get Number of Recorded Alarms WORD Number of alarms in the queue. A ‘0’ indicates the alarm queue is empty.

EtherNet/IP Objects C-25
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

Instance Attributes
Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description
0 Get Full/All Information STRUCT of WORD
STRUCT of:

BYTE
BYTE
STRING[16]
STRUCT of:

LWORD
BOOL[16]
WORD
CONTAINER[n]
Alarm code
Alarm source
DPI port
DPI Device Object
Alarm text
Alarm time stamp
Timer value (0 = timer not supported)
BOOL[0]: (0 = invalid data, 1 = valid data)
BOOL[1]: (0 = elapsed time, 1 = real time)
BOOL[2…15] Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
1 Get Basic Information STRUCT of WORD
STRUCT of:

BYTE
BYTE
STRUCT of:

LWORD
BOOL[16]
Alarm code
Alarm source
DPI port
DPI Device Object
Alarm time stamp
Timer value (0 = timer not supported)
BOOL[0]: (0 = invalid data, 1 = valid data)
BOOL[1]: (0 = elapsed time, 1 = real time)
BOOL[2…15] Reserved
2 Get International Alarm Text STRINGN Text describing the alarm with support for Unicode.

C-26 EtherNet/IP Objects
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

DPI Diagnostic Object Class Code
Services
Instances
The number of instances depends on the maximum number of diagnostic items in the device. The total number of diagnostic items can be read in Instance 0, Attribute 2.

Class Attributes
Hexadecimal Decimal
0x99 153
Service Code Implemented for: Service Name
Class Instance
0x0E Y es Y es Get_Attribute_Single
0x10 Y es Y es Set_Attribute_Single
Instances (Hex.) (Dec.) Device Example Description
0x0000…0x3FFF 0…16383 Host 0 Class Attributes (Drive)
0x4000…0x43FF 16384…17407 Adapter 1 Drive Diagnostic Item 1 0x4400…0x47FF 17408…18431 DPI Port 1 2 Drive Diagnostic Item 2 0x4800…0x4BFF 18432…19455 DPI Port 2
…
…
0x4C00…0x4FFF 19456…20479 DPI Port 3 16384 Class Attributes (Adapter) 0x5000…0x53FF 20480…21503 DPI Port 4 16385 Adapter Diagnostic Item1 0x5400…0x57FF 21504…22527 DPI Port 5
…
…
0x5800…0x5BFF 22528…23551 DPI Port 6
0x5C00…0x5FFF (1)
(1) These instances are supported only when the adapter is used with a PowerFlex 750-Series drive. 23552…24575 DPI Port 7
0x6000…0x63FF (1) 24576…25599 DPI Port 8
0x6400…0x67FF (1) 25600…26623 DPI Port 9
0x6800…0x6BFF (1) 26624…27647 DPI Port 10
0x6C00…0x6FFF (1) 27648…28671 DPI Port 11
0x7000…0x73FF (1) 28672…29695 DPI Port 12
0x7400…0x77FF (1) 29696…30719 DPI Port 13
0x7800…0x7BFF (1) 30720…31743 DPI Port 14
Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description
1 Get Class Revision WORD 1
2 Get Number of Instances WORD Number of diagnostic items in the device. 3 Get ENUM Offset WORD DPI ENUM object instance offset
EtherNet/IP Objects C-27
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

Instance Attributes
Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description
0 Get Full/All Information STRUCT of:

BOOL[32]
CONTAINER (1)

CONTAINER

CONTAINER
WORD
WORD
STRING[4]
WORD
WORD
WORD
INT
DWORD
STRING[16]
Descriptor (see page C-19
)
Value
Minimum value
Maximum value
Default value
Pad Word
Pad Word
Units (for example, Amp, Hz)
Multiplier
(2)
Divisor (2)
Base (2)
Offset (2)
Link (source of the value) (0 = no link)
Diagnostic name text
1 Get/Set Value Various Diagnostic item value
2 Get International Diagnostic Item Text STRUCT of:

STRINGN

STRINGN
Diagnostic name text
Diagnostic units text
3 Get International Full Read All STRUCT of:

BOOL[32]

CONTAINER

CONTAINER
WORD
WORD
WORD
WORD
WORD
INT
DWORD
BOOL[32]

STRINGN

STRINGN
Descriptor
Value
Minimum
Maximum
Default
Pad Word
Pad Word
Multiplier
Divisor
Base
Offset
Pad
Extended descriptor
Diagnostic name text
Diagnostic units text
(1) A CONTAINER is a 32-bit block of data that contains the data type used by a value. If signed, the value is sign extended. Padding is used in the CONTAINER to ensure that it is always 32-bits.
(2) This value is used in the formulas used to convert the value between display units and internal units. See Formulas for Converting on page C-21.

C-28 EtherNet/IP Objects
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

DPI Time Object Class Code
Services
Instances
The number of instances depends on the number of timers in the device.

Instance 1 is always reserved for a real-time clock although a device may not support it. The total number of timers can be read in Instance 0, Attribute 2.

Class Attributes
Hexadecimal Decimal
0x9B 155
Service Code Implemented for: Service Name
Class Instance
0x0E Y es Y es Get_Attribute_Single
0x10 Y es Y es Set_Attribute_Single
Instances (Hex.) (Dec.) Device Example Description
0x0000…0x3FFF 0…16383 Host 0 Class Attributes (Drive)
0x4000…0x43FF 16384…17407 Adapter 1 Real Time Clock (Predefined) (not always supported)
0x4400…0x47FF 17408…18431 DPI Port 1 2 Timer 1
0x4800…0x4BFF 18432…19455 DPI Port 2 3 Timer 2
0x4C00…0x4FFF 19456…20479 DPI Port 3
…
…
0x5000…0x53FF 20480…21503 DPI Port 4
0x5400…0x57FF 21504…22527 DPI Port 5
0x5800…0x5BFF 22528…23551 DPI Port 6
0x5C00…0x5FFF
(1)
(1) These instances are supported only when the adapter is used with a PowerFlex 750-Series drive. 23552…24575 DPI Port 7
0x6000…0x63FF (1) 24576…25599 DPI Port 8
0x6400…0x67FF (1) 25600…26623 DPI Port 9
0x6800…0x6BFF (1) 26624…27647 DPI Port 10
0x6C00…0x6FFF (1) 27648…28671 DPI Port 11
0x7000…0x73FF (1) 28672…29695 DPI Port 12
0x7400…0x77FF (1) 29696…30719 DPI Port 13
0x7800…0x7BFF (1) 30720…31743 DPI Port 14
Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description
1 Get Class Revision WORD Revision of object
2 Get Number of Instances WORD Number of timers in the object, excluding the real-time clock that is predefined.
3 Get First Device Specific Timer WORD Instance of the first timer that is not predefined. 4 Set Time Command Write BYTE 0 = No Operation
1 = Clear all timers (Does not clear the real-time
clock or read only timers)
5 Get Number of Supported Time
Zones
WORD Number of time zones described in the Time
Zone List attribute.
6 Get Time Zone List STRUCT Identifies a time zone.
7 Get/Set Active Time Zone ID WORD The ID field of the Time Zone List structure for the desired time zone.

EtherNet/IP Objects C-29
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

Instance Attributes
8 Get Active Time Zone Data STRUCT of:

INT
BYTE
BYTE
BYTE
BYTE
BYTE
BYTE
INT
BYTE
BYTE
BYTE
BYTE
BYTE
BYTE
Standard bias
Standard month
Standard day of week
Standard week
Standard hour
Standard minute
Standard second
Daylight offset
Daylight month
Daylight day of week
Daylight week
Daylight hour
Daylight minute
Daylight second
9 Get/Set Custom Time Zone Data STRUCT of:

STRING[16]
LWORD or
STRUCT
BOOL[16]
Name of the timer
Elapsed time in milliseconds unless timer is a
real-time clock (see attribute 2)
See attribute 3
1 Get Timer Text STRING[16] Name of the timer
2 Get/Set Timer Value LWORD
-or-
STRUCT of:

WORD
BYTE
BYTE
BYTE
BYTE
BYTE
BYTE
Elapsed time in milliseconds unless the timer is a
real-time clock.

Real-Time Clock Data:

Milliseconds (0…999)
Seconds (0…59)
Minutes (0…59)
Hours (0…23)
Days (1…31)
Months (1 = January, 12 = December)
Y ears (since 1972)
3 Get Timer Descriptor BOOL[16] BOOL[0]: (0 = invalid data, 1 = valid data) BOOL[1]: (0 = elapsed time, 1 = real time)
BOOL[2…15]: Not used
4 Get International Read Full STRUCT of:

STRINGN
STRUCT
BOOL[16]
International timer text
Timer value
Timer descriptor
5 Get International Timer Text STRINGN Name of this timer 6 Get Clock Status BOOL[32] Identifies clock status
8 Get/Set Number of Leap Seconds INT Identifies the current number of Leap Seconds. 9 Get Clock Options BOOL[32] Identifies the optional functionality available in the device’s System Clock.
10 Get/Set Clock Options Enable BOOL[32] Identifies which of the clock’s options are enabled.

C-30 EtherNet/IP Objects
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

Host DPI Parameter Object Class Code
To access ‘Device’ parameters, use the DPI Parameter Object (Class Code 0x93).

Important: The Host DPI Parameter Object is supported only when the adapter is used with a PowerFlex 750-Series drive.

Instances
The number of instances depends on the number of parameters in the device.

The total number of parameters can be read in Instance 0, Attribute 0.

Class Attributes
Hexadecimal Decimal
0x9F 159
Instances (Hex.) (Dec.) Device Example Description
0x0000…0x3FFF 0…16383 Reserved 16384 Class Attributes (Adapter) 0x4000…0x43FF 16384…17407 Adapter 16385 Adapter Parameter 1 Attributes 0x4400…0x47FF 17408…18431 DPI Port 1 16386 Adapter Parameter 2 Attributes 0x4800…0x4BFF 18432…19455 DPI Port 2
…
…
0x4C00…0x4FFF 19456…20479 DPI Port 3 17408 Class Attributes (HIM) 0x5000…0x53FF 20480…21503 DPI Port 4 17409 HIM Parameter 1 Attributes 0x5400…0x57FF 21504…22527 DPI Port 5 17410 HIM Parameter 2 Attributes 0x5800…0x5BFF 22528…23551 DPI Port 6
…
…
0x5C00…0x5FFF 23552…24575 DPI Port 7
0x6000…0x63FF 24576…25599 DPI Port 8
0x6400…0x67FF 25600…26623 DPI Port 9
0x6800…0x6BFF 26624…27647 DPI Port 10
0x6C00…0x6FFF 27648…28671 DPI Port 11
0x7000…0x73FF 28672…29695 DPI Port 12
0x7400…0x77FF 29696…30719 DPI Port 13
0x7800…0x7BFF 30720…31743 DPI Port 14
Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description
0 Get Number of Instances WORD Number of parameters in the device 1 Set Write Protect Password WORD 0 = Password disabled n = Password
2 Set NVS Command Write BYTE 0 = No Operation
1 = Store values in active memory to NVS
2 = Load values in NVS to active memory
3 = Load default values to active memory
3 Get NVS Parameter Value Checksum WORD Checksum of all parameter values in a user set in NVS 4 Get NVS Link Value Checksum WORD Checksum of parameter links in a user set in NVS 5 Get First Accessible Parameter WORD First parameter available if parameters are protected by passwords. A ‘0’ indicates all parameters are protected. 7 Get Class Revision WORD 2 = DPI
8 Get First Parameter Processing Error WORD The first parameter that has been written with a value outside of its range. A ‘0’ indicates no errors.
9 Set Link Command BYTE 0 = No Operation
1 = Clear All Parameter Links (This does not clear links to function blocks.)
EtherNet/IP Objects C-31
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

Instance Attributes
Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description
6 Get DPI Offline Read Full STRUCT of:

BOOL[32]

CONTAINER

CONTAINER
STRING[16]
STRING[4]
WORD
WORD
WORD
WORD
WORD
WORD
WORD
BYTE
BYTE
WORD
WORD

CONTAINER
WORD
WORD
WORD
INT
Descriptor
Offline Minimum value
Offline Maximum value
Offline Default value
Parameter name
Offline parameter units
Online minimum parameter instance
Online maximum parameter instance
Online default parameter instance
Multiplier parameter instance
Divisor parameter instance
Base parameter instance
Offset parameter instance
Formula number
Pad byte (always zero)
Help instance
Pad word (always a value of zero)
Parameter value
Multiplier
Divisor
Base
Offset
7 Get DPI Online Read Full STRUCT of:

BOOL[32]

CONTAINER
(1)

CONTAINER

CONTAINER
WORD
WORD
STRING[4]
WORD
WORD
WORD
INT
BYTE[3]
BYTE
STRING[16]
Descriptor (see page C-33
)
Parameter value
Minimum value
Maximum value
Default value
Next parameter
Previous parameter
Units (for example, Amps, Hz)
Multiplier
(2)
Divisor (2)
Base (2)
Offset (2)
Link (source of the value) (0 = no link)
Always zero (0)
Parameter name
8 Get DPI Descriptor BOOL[32] Descriptor (see page C-33 )
9 Get/Set DPI Parameter Value Various Parameter value in NVS. (3) 10 Get/Set DPI RAM Parameter Value Various Parameter value in temporary memory. Valid only for DPI drives.
11 Get/Set DPI Link BYTE[3] Link (parameter or function block that is the source of the value) (0 = no link)
12 Get Help Object Instance WORD ID for help text for this parameter 13 Get DPI Read Basic STRUCT of:

BOOL[32]

CONTAINER

CONTAINER
STRING[16]
STRING[4]
Descriptor (see page C-33
)
Parameter value
Minimum value
Maximum value
Default value
Parameter name
Units (for example, Amps, Hz)
14 Get DPI Parameter Name STRING[16] Parameter name
15 Get DPI Parameter Alias STRING[16] Customer supplied parameter name. 16 Get Parameter Processing Error BYTE 0 = No error
1 = Value is less than the minimum
2 = Value is greater than the maximum
C-32 EtherNet/IP Objects
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

18 Get International DPI Offline Parameter Text Struct of:

STRINGN

STRINGN
International parameter name
International offline units
19 Get International DPI Online Parameter Text Struct of:

STRINGN

STRINGN
International parameter name
International online units
20 Get International DPI Online Read Full Struct of:

BOOL[32]

CONTAINER

CONTAINER
WORD
WORD
WORD
WORD
WORD
INT
BYTE[3]
BYTE
BOOL[32]

STRINGN

STRINGN
Descriptor
Parameter value
Online minimum value
Online maximum value
Online default value
Next
Previous
Multiplier
Divisor
Base
Offset
Link
Pad word (always zero)
Extended descriptor
International parameter name
International online parameter units
21 Get DPI Extended Descriptor UDINT Extended Descriptor (see page C-34 )
22 Get International DPI Offline Read Full Struct of:

BOOL

CONTAINER

CONTAINER
WORD
WORD
WORD
WORD
WORD
WORD
WORD
BYTE
BYTE
WORD
WORD

CONTAINER
WORD
WORD
WORD
INT
BOOL[32]

STRINGN

STRINGN
Descriptor
Offline minimum value
Offline maximum value
Offline default value
Online minimum parameter instance
Online maximum parameter instance
Online default parameter instance
Multiplier parameter instance
Divisor parameter instance
Base parameter instance
Offset parameter instance
Formula number
Pad word (always zero)
Help instance
Pad word (always a value of zero)
Parameter value
Multiplier
Divisor
Base
Offset
Extended DPI descriptor
International DPI parameter name
International DPI offline parameter units
(1) A CONTAINER is a 32-bit block of data that contains the data type used by a parameter value. If signed, the value is sign extended. Padding is used in the CONTAINER to ensure that it is always 32-bits.
(2) This value is used in the formulas used to convert the parameter value between display units and internal units. See Formulas for Converting on page C-35. (3) Do not continually write parameter data to NVS. See the attention on page 6-1.

Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description
EtherNet/IP Objects C-33
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

Descriptor Attributes
Bit Name Description
0 Data Type (Bit 1) Right bit is least significant bit (0). 000 = USINT used as an array of Boolean
001 = UINT used as an array of Boolean
010 = USINT (8-bit integer)
011 = UINT (16-bit integer)
100 = UDINT (32-bit integer)
101 = TCHAR ((8-bit (not Unicode) or 16-bits (Unicode)) 110 = REAL (32-bit floating point value)
111 = Use bits 16, 17, 18
1 Data Type (Bit 2)
2 Data Type (Bit 3)
3 Sign Type 0 = unsigned
1 = signed
4H i d d e n 0 = v i s i b l e
1 = hidden
5 Not a Link Sink 0 = May be the sink end of a link
1 = May not be the sink end of a link
6 Not Recallable 0 = Recallable from NVS
1 = Not Recallable from NVS
7 ENUM 0 = No ENUM text
1 = ENUM text
8 Writable 0 = Read only
1 = Read/write
9 Not Writable When Enabled 0 = Writable when enabled (for example, drive running) 1 = Not writable when enabled
10 Instance 0 = Parameter value is not a Reference to another parameter 1 = Parameter value refers to another parameter
11 Uses Bit ENUM Mask This parameter instance supports the Bit ENUM Mask attribute. For more information, see the definition of the attribute.
12 Decimal Place (Bit 0) Number of digits to the right of the decimal point. 0000 = 0
1111 = 15
13 Decimal Place (Bit 1)
14 Decimal Place (Bit 2)
15 Decimal Place (Bit 3)
16 Extended Data Type (Bit 4) Bit 16 is the least significant bit. 000 = Reserved
001 = UDINT used as an array of Boolean
010 = Reserved
011 = Reserved
100 = Reserved
101 = Reserved
110 = Reserved
111 = Reserved
17 Extended Data Type (Bit 5)
18 Extended Data Type (Bit 6)
19 Parameter Exists Used to mark parameters that are not available to network tools. 20 Not Used Reserved
21 Formula Links Indicates the Formula Data is derived from other parameters. 22 Access Level (Bit 1) A 3-bit field used to control access to parameter data. 23 Access Level (Bit 2)
24 Access Level (Bit 3)
25 Writable ENUM ENUM text: 0 = Read Only, 1 = Read/Write 26 Not a Link Source 0 = May be the source end of a link 1 = May not be the source end of a link
27 Enhanced Bit ENUM Parameter supports enhanced bit ENUMs. 28 Enhanced ENUM Parameter supports enhanced ENUMs.
29 Uses DPI Limits Object Parameter uses the DPI Limits Object.

Intelligent offline tools make use of the Limits Object to select limits and units. 30 Extended Descriptor Parameter uses Extended Descriptor bits, which can be obtained by reading the DPI Extended Descriptor attribute for this parameter.
31 Always Upload/Download Parameter shall always be included in uploads and downloads.

C-34 EtherNet/IP Objects
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

EtherNet/IP Objects C-35
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

Formulas for Converting
Display Value = ((Internal Value + Offset) x Multiplier x Base) / (Divisor x 10Decimal Places)) Internal Value = ((Display Value x Divisor x 10Decimal Places) / (Multiplier x Base)) - Offset Common Services
Object Specific Services
The table below lists the parameters for the Get_Attributes_Scattered and Set_Attributes_Scattered object-specific service.
27 Command Parameter This parameter commands the drive to take an action, such as ‘Reset Defaults’ or ‘Autotune’, and then returns to a value of zero. Offline software tools will not allow setting this parameter to anything other than a value of zero. If an offline file contains a Command Parameter with a non-zero value, the offline software tool will change the value to zero.

Note that command parameters cannot have values that do not return to zero. 28 Current Value Is Default This bit identifies a parameter that will not change if a ‘Reset Defaults’ is commanded. For example, if a drive contains a Language parameter that is set to German, setting defaults will leave the parameter set to German. Likewise, if the parameter is set to French, setting defaults will leave the parameter set to French.
29 Use Zero Text If the ‘Disallow Zero’ bit is set, this bit must be cleared. If the ‘Disallow Zero’ bit is cleared, then:
0 = Use Disabled Text parameter class attribute.
1 = Use Zero Text parameter instance attribute.
30-31 Reserved Reserved
Bit Name Description
Service Code Implemented for: Service Name
Class Instance
0x0E Y es Y es Get_Attribute_Single
0x10 Y es Y es Set_Attribute_Single
Service Code Implemented for: Service Name Allocation Size (in bytes) Class Instance Par. Number Par. Value
0x4D Y es No Get_Attributes_Scattered 4 4
0x4E Y es No Set_Attributes_Scattered 4 4
Name Data Type Description
Parameter Number UDINT Parameter to read or write
Parameter Value UDINT Parameter value to read or write (zero when reading) I I I
C-36 EtherNet/IP Objects
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

TCP/IP Interface Object Class Code
Services
Instances
The adapter supports one instance of the TCP/IP Interface object.

Class Attributes
Instance Attributes
Hexadecimal Decimal
0xF5 245
Service Code Implemented for: Service Name
Class Instance
0x0E Y es Y es Get_Attribute_Single
0x10 No Y es Set_Attribute_Single
Number Description
0 Class Attributes
1 Object Attributes
Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description
1 Get Revision WORD The revision of this object
Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description
1 Get Status of TCP/IP
Network
Interface
DWORD 0 = Not configured
1 = Valid configuration
2…15 = Reserved
2 Get Configuration
Capability
DWORD Bit | Value (0 = False, 1 = True)
0 = Supports BOOTP
1 = DNS Client (able to resolve host names by query to DNS server) 2 = DHCP Client (able to obtain network configuration through DHCP) 3 = DHCP-DNS Update (able to send its host name in the DHCP request) 4 = Configuration Settable (able to set the network configuration via TCP/IP) 5…31 = Reserved
3 Set Configuration
Control
DWORD Bit | Value
1…3 = Startup configuration
0 = Use configuration saved in NVS
1 = Obtain configuration via BOOTP
2 = Obtain configuration via DHCP
3…15 = Reserved
4 = DNS Enabled (resolves host names by query to DNS server) 5…31 = Reserved
4 Get Physical Link
Object
STRUCT of:

WORD
Padded EPATH
Path size
Path
5 Get Interface
Configuration
STRUCT of:

DWORD
DWORD
DWORD
DWORD
DWORD
STRING
Adapter’s IP address
Adapter’s subnet mask
Adapter’s gateway address
Primary name server
Secondary name server
Default domain name
6 Get Host Name STRING Host name when using DHCP
EtherNet/IP Objects C-37
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

Ethernet Link Object Class Code
Services
Instances
The adapter supports one instance of the TCP/IP Interface object.

Class Attributes
Instance Attributes
Hexadecimal Decimal
0xF6 246
Service Code Implemented for: Service Name
Class Instance
0x0E Y es Y es Get_Attribute_Single
0x4C No Y es Get_and_Clear
Number Description
0 Class Attributes
1 Object Attributes
Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description
1 Get Revision WORD The revision of this object
Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description
1 Get Interface Speed DWORD Speed in megabits per second (Mbs) 2 Get Interface Flags DWORD Bit | Value
0 = Link status (0 = inactive, 1 = active)
1 = Duplex (0 = half duplex, 1 = full duplex)
2…31 = Reserved
3 Get Physical Address BYTE[6] MAC address (XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX) The first octet (USINT[0]) is on the left.
4 Get Interface Counters STRUCT of:

DWORD
DWORD
DWORD
DWORD
DWORD
DWORD
DWORD
DWORD
DWORD
DWORD
DWORD
Octets received
Unicast packets received
Non-unicast packets received
Inbound packets received but discarded
Inbound packets with errors (not discarded)
Inbound packets with unknown protocol
Octets sent
Unicast packets sent
Non-unicast packets sent
Outbound packets discarded
Outbound packets with errors
C-38 EtherNet/IP Objects
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

5 Get Media Counters STRUCT of:

DWORD
DWORD
DWORD
DWORD
DWORD
DWORD
DWORD
DWORD
DWORD
DWORD
DWORD
DWORD
RX = Received, TX = Transmitted
RX frames not having integral number of octets long
RX frames not passing FCS check
TX frames having one collision
TX frames having multiple collisions
Number of times of SQE test error message
TX Frames delayed first attempt by busy medium
Collisions detected later than 512 bit-times in trans.

TX frames failing due to excessive collisions
TX frames failing due to intern MAC sublayer TX error
Times of carrier sense condition loss during trans.

RX frames exceeding the maximum frame size
RX frames failing due to intern MAC sublayer RX error
Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

Appendix D
Logic Command/Status Words
This appendix presents the definitions of the Logic Command and Logic Status words that are used for some products that can be connected to the adapter. If the Logic Command/Logic Status for the product that you are using is not listed, see your product’s documentation.

PowerFlex 70/700/700H, and
700L (with 700 Control)
Drives
Logic Command Word
Logic Bits
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Command Description x Stop (1) 0 = Not Stop
1 = Stop
xS t a r t (1)(2) 0 = Not Start
1 = Start
x Jog 0 = Not Jog (Par. 100)
1 = Jog
x Clear Faults 0 = Not Clear Faults
1 = Clear Faults
x x Direction 00 = No Command
01 = Forward Command
10 = Reverse Command
11 = Hold Direction Control
x Local Control 0 = No Local Control
1 = Local Control
x MOP Increment 0 = Not Increment
1 = Increment
x x Accel Rate 00 = No Command
01 = Accel Rate 1 Command (Par. 140)
10 = Accel Rate 2 Command (Par. 141)
11 = Hold Accel Rate
x x Decel Rate 00 = No Command
01 = Decel Rate 1 Command (Par. 142)
10 = Decel Rate 2 Command (Par. 143)
11 = Hold Decel Rate
xxx R e f e r e n c e S e l e c t
(3) 000 = No Command
001 = Ref A Select (Par. 90)
010 = Ref B Select (Par. 93)
011 = Preset 3 (Par. 103)
100 = Preset 4 (Par. 104)
101 = Preset 5 (Par. 105)
110 = Preset 6 (Par. 106)
111 = Preset 7 (Par. 107)
x MOP Decrement 0 = Not Decrement
1 = Decrement
(1) A ‘0 = Not Stop’ condition (logic 0) must first be present before a ‘1 = Start’ condition will start the drive. The Start comma nd acts as a momentary Start command. A ‘1’ will start the drive, but returning to ‘0’ will not stop the drive. (2) This Start will not function if a digital input (parameters 361…366) is programmed for 2-Wire Control (option 7, 8, or 9). (3) This Reference Select will not function if a digital input (parameters 361…366) is programmed for ‘Speed Sel 1, 2, or 3’ (option 15, 16, or 17). Note that Reference Select is ‘Exclusive Ownership’ – see drive User Manual for more information.

D-2 Logic Command/Status Words
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

Logic Status Word
Logic Bits
1 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 9876543210 S t a t u s D e s c r i p t i o n x Ready 0 = Not Ready (Par. 214)
1 = Ready
x Active 0 = Not Active (Running)
1 = Active
xC o m m a n d
Direction
0 = Reverse
1 = Forward
x Actual Direction 0 = Reverse
1 = Forward
x Accel 0 = Not Accelerating
1 = Accelerating
x Decel 0 = Not Decelerating
1 = Decelerating
x Alarm 0 = No Alarm (Par. 211 and 212)
1 = Alarm
x Fault 0 = No Fault (Par. 243)
1 = Fault
x At Speed 0 = Not At Reference
1 = At Reference
x x x Local Control (1) 000 = Port 0 (TB)
001 = Port 1
010 = Port 2
011 = Port 3
100 = Port 4
101 = Port 5
110 = Port 6
111 = No Local
x x x x Reference 0000 = Ref A Auto (Par. 90)
0001 = Ref B Auto (Par. 93)
0010 = Preset 2 Auto
0011 = Preset 3 Auto
0100 = Preset 4 Auto
0101 = Preset 5 Auto
0110 = Preset 6 Auto
0111 = Preset 7 Auto
1000 = Term Blk Manual
1001 = DPI 1 Manual
1010 = DPI 2 Manual
1011 = DPI 3 Manual
1100 = DPI 4 Manual
1101 = DPI 5 Manual
1110 = DPI 6 Manual
1111 = Jog Ref
(1) See ‘Owners’ in drive User Manual for further information.

Logic Command/Status Words D-3
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

PowerFlex 700S (Phase II
Control) and 700L (with
700S Control) Drives
Logic Command Word
Logic Bits
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Command Description x Normal Stop 0 = Not Normal Stop
1 = Normal Stop
xS t a r t (1) 0 = Not Start
1 = Start
x Jog 1 0 = Not Jog using [Jog Speed 1] (Par. 29)
1 = Jog using [Jog Speed 1] (Par. 29)
x Clear Fault (2) 0 = Not Clear Fault
1 = Clear Fault
x x Unipolar Direction 00 = No Command
01 = Forward Command
10 = Reverse Command
11 = Hold Direction Control
xR e s e r v e d
x Jog 2 0 = Not Jog using [Jog Speed 2] (Par. 39)
1 = Jog using [Jog Speed 2] (Par. 39)
x Current Limit Stop 0 = Not Current Limit Stop
1 = Current Limit Stop
x Coast Stop 0 = Not Coast to Stop
1 = Coast to Stop
xR e s e r v e d
xR e s e r v e d
x Spd Ref Sel0
x Spd Ref Sel1
x Spd Ref Sel2
xR e s e r v e d
(1) A Not Stop condition (logic bit 0 = 0, logic bit 8 = 0, and logic bit 9 = 0) must first be present before a 1 = Start condition will start the drive. (2) To perform this command, the value must switch from ‘0’ to ‘1’.

Bits
14 13 12
0 0 0 = Spd Ref A (Par. 27)
0 0 1 = Spd Ref B (Par. 28)
0 1 0 = Preset 2 (Par. 15)
0 1 1 = Preset 3 (Par. 16)
1 0 0 = Preset 4 (Par. 17)
1 0 1 = Preset 5 (Par. 18)
1 1 0 = Preset 6 (Par. 19)
1 1 1 = Preset 7 (Par. 20)
D-4 Logic Command/Status Words
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

Logic Status Word
Logic Bits
1 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 9876543210 S t a t u s D e s c r i p t i o n x Active 0 = Not Active
1 = Active
x Running 0 = Not Running
1 = Running
xC o m m a n d
Direction
0 = Reverse
1 = Forward
x Actual Direction 0 = Reverse
1 = Forward
x Accel 0 = Not Accelerating
1 = Accelerating
x Decel 0 = Not Decelerating
1 = Decelerating
x Jogging 0 = Not Jogging
1 = Jogging
x Fault 0 = No Fault (Par. 323, 324, 325)
1 = Fault
x Alarm 0 = No Alarm (Par. 326, 327, 328)
1 = Alarm
x Flash Mode 0 = Not in Flash Mode
1 = In Flash Mode
x Run Ready 0 = Not Ready to Run (Par. 156)
1 = Ready to Run
xA t Limit (1) 0 = Not At Limit (Par. 304)
1 = At Limit
x Tach Loss Sw 0 = Not Tach Loss Sw
1 = Tach Loss Sw
x At Zero Spd 0 = Not At Zero Speed
1 = At Zero Speed
x At Setpt Spd 0 = Not At Setpoint Speed
1= At Setpoint Speed
x Enable 0 = Not Enabled
1 = Enabled
(1) See Parameter 304 - [Limit Status] in the PowerFlex 700S drive User Manual for a description of the limit status conditions.

Logic Command/Status Words D-5
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

PowerFlex 750-Series Drives Important: When using a 20-COMM-E adapter with a PowerFlex 750-Series drive, the upper word (bits 16…31) of the Logic Command and Logic Status words are not accessible and
cannot be used. Only when using a PowerFlex 750-Series drive with a 20-750 communication Option Module, or the
PowerFlex 755 drive’s embedded EtherNet/IP adapter, is the upper word accessible and used.

Logic Command Word

Logic Bits
3 1 … 1 51 41 31 21 11 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 C o m m a n d D e s c r i p t i o n x Normal Stop 0 = Not Normal Stop
1 = Normal Stop
xS t a r t (1) 0 = Not Start
1 = Start
x Jog 1 (2) 0 = Not Jog 1 (Par. 556)
1 = Jog 1
x Clear Fault (3) 0 = Not Clear Fault
1 = Clear Fault
x x Unipolar
Direction
00 = No Command
01 = Forward Command
10 = Reverse Command
11 = Hold Direction Control
x Manual 0 = Not Manual
1 = Manual
x Reserved
x x Accel Time 00 = No Command
01 = Use Accel Time 1 (Par. 535)
10 = Use Accel Time 2 (Par. 536)
11 = Use Present Time
x x Decel Time 00 = No Command
01 = Use Decel Time 1 (Par. 537)
10 = Use Decel Time 2 (Par. 538)
11 = Use Present Time
x Ref Select 1 000 = No Command
001 = Ref A Select (Par. 545)
010 = Ref B Select (Par. 550)
011 = Preset 3 (Par. 573)
100 = Preset 4 (Par. 574)
101 = Preset 5 (Par. 575)
110 = Preset 6 (Par. 576)
111 = Preset 7 (Par. 577)
xR e f Select 2
xR ef Select 3
x Reserved
(1) A Not Stop condition (logic bit 0 = 0) must first be present before a 1 = Start condition will start the drive. (2) A Not Stop condition (logic bit 0 = 0) must first be present before a 1 = Jog 1/Jog 2 condition will jog the drive. A transition to a ‘0’ will stop the drive.
(3) To perform this command, the value must switch from ‘0’ to ‘1’.

D-6 Logic Command/Status Words
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

Logic Status Word
Logic Bits
3 1 … 1 51 41 31 21 11 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 C o m m a n d D e s c r i p t i o n x Run Ready 0 = Not Ready to Run (Par. 933)
1 = Ready to Run
x Active 0 = Not Active
1 = Active
x Command
Direction
0 = Reverse
1 = Forward
xA ctual
Direction
0 = Reverse
1 = Forward
x Accelerating 0 = Not Accelerating
1 = Accelerating
x Decelerating 0 = Not Decelerating
1 = Decelerating
x Alarm 0 = No Alarm (Par. 959 and 960)
1 = Alarm
x Fault 0 = No Fault (Par. 952 and 953)
1 = Fault
x At Setpt Spd 0 = Not at Setpoint Speed
1 = At Setpoint Speed
x Manual 0 = Manual Mode Not Active
1 = Manual Mode Active
x Spd Ref ID 0 00000 = Reserved
00001 = Auto Ref A (Par. 545)
00010 = Auto Ref B (Par. 550)
00011 = Auto Preset Speed 3 (Par. 573)
00100 = Auto Preset Speed 4 (Par. 574)
00101 = Auto Preset Speed 5 (Par. 575)
00110 = Auto Preset Speed 6 (Par. 576)
00111 = Auto Preset Speed 7 (Par. 577)
01000 = Reserved
01001 = Reserved
01010 = Reserved
01011 = Reserved
01100 = Reserved
01101 = Reserved
01110 = Reserved
01111 = Reserved
10000 = Man Port 0
10001 = Man Port 1
10010 = Man Port 2
10011 = Man Port 3
10100 = Man Port 4
10101 = Man Port 5
10110 = Man Port 6
10111 = Reserved
11000 = Reserved
11001 = Reserved
11010 = Reserved
11011 = Reserved
11100 = Reserved
11101 = Man Port 13 (embedded ENET)
11110 = Man Port 14 (Drive Logix)
11111 = Alternate Man Ref Sel
x Spd Ref ID 1
x Spd Ref ID 2
x Spd Ref ID 3
x Spd Ref ID 4
xR eserved
Logic Command/Status Words D-7
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

PowerFlex Digital DC Drives Logic Command Word
Logic Bits
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Command Description x Stop (1) 0 = Not Stop
1 = Stop
xS t a r t (1)(2) 0 = Not Start
1 = Start
x Jog 0 = Not Jog (Par. 266)
1 = Jog
x Clear Faults 0 = Not Clear Faults
1 = Clear Faults
x x Direction 00 = No Command
01 = Forward Command
10 = Reverse Command
11 = Hold Direction Control
x Local Control 0 = No Local Control
1 = Local Control
x MOP Increment 0 = Not Increment
1 = Increment
x x Accel Rate 00 = No Command
01 = Use Accel Rate 1 (Par. 660)
10 = Use Accel Rate 2 (Par. 24)
11 = Use Present Time
x x Decel Rate 00 = No Command
01 = Use Decel Rate 1 (Par. 662)
10 = Use Decel Rate 2 (Par. 32)
11 = Use Present Time
x x x Reference Select
(3) 000 = No Command
001 = Ref. 1 (Spd Ref A, Par. 44)
010 = Ref. 2 (Spd Ref B, Par. 48)
011 = Ref. 3 (Preset Spd 3, Par. 156)
100 = Ref. 4 (Preset Spd 4, Par. 157)
101 = Ref. 5 (Preset Spd 5, Par. 158)
110 = Ref. 6 (Preset Spd 6, Par. 159)
111 = Ref. 7 (Preset Spd 7, Par. 160)
x MOP Decrement 0 = Not Decrement
1 = Decrement
(1) A ‘0 = Not Stop’ condition (logic 0) must first be present before a ‘1 = Start’ condition will start the drive. The Start comma nd acts as a momentary Start command. A ‘1’ will start the drive, but returning to ‘0’ will not stop the drive. (2) This Start will not function if a digital input (parameters 133…144) is programmed for 2-Wire Control (option 5 ‘Run’, 6 ‘Run Forward’, or 7 ‘Run Reverse’).
(3) This Reference Select will not function if a digital input (parameters 133…144) is programmed for ‘Speed Sel 1, 2, or 3’ (option 17, 18, or 19). Note that Reference Select is ‘Exclusive Ownership’ – see drive User Manual for more information.

D-8 Logic Command/Status Words
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

Logic Status Word
Logic Bits
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Status Description x Ready 0 = Not Ready (Par. 1403)
1 = Ready
x Active 0 = Not Active (Running)
1 = Active
x Command
Direction
0 = Reverse
1 = Forward
x Actual Direction 0 = Reverse
1 = Forward
x Accel 0 = Not Accelerating
1 = Accelerating
x Decel 0 = Not Decelerating
1 = Decelerating
x Alarm 0 = No Alarm (Par. 1380)
1 = Alarm
x Fault 0 = No Fault (Par. 1351)
1 = Fault
x At Speed 0 = Not At Reference
1 = At Reference
x x x Local Control (1) 000 = Port 0 (TB)
001 = Port 1
010 = Port 2
011 = Port 3
100 = Port 4
101 = Port 5
110 = Reserved
111 = No Local
x x x x Reference Source 0000 = Spd Ref A Auto (Par. 44) 0001 = Spd Ref B Auto (Par. 48)
0010 = Preset Spd 2 Auto
0011 = Preset Spd 3 Auto
0100 = Preset Spd 4 Auto
0101 = Preset Spd 5 Auto
0110 = Preset Spd 6 Auto
0111 = Preset Spd 7 Auto
1000 = Term Blk Manual
1001 = DPI 1 Manual
1010 = DPI 2 Manual
1011 = DPI 3 Manual
1100 = DPI 4 Manual
1101 = DPI 5 Manual
1110 = Reserved
1111 = Jog Ref
(1) See ‘Owners’ in drive User Manual for further information. 20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

Glossary
A Adapter
Devices such as drives, controllers, and computers usually require a network communication adapter to provide a communication interface between them and a network such as EtherNet/IP. An adapter reads data on the network and transmits it to the connected device. It also reads data in the device and transmits it to the network.

The 20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP adapter connects PowerFlex 7-Class drives to an EtherNet/IP network. Adapters are sometimes also called ‘cards’, ‘embedded communication options’, ‘gateways’, ‘modules’, or ‘peripherals’.

B BOOTP (Bootstrap Protocol)
BOOTP lets the adapter configure itself dynamically at restart if the network has a BOOTP server. The BOOTP server assigns the adapter a preconfigured IP address, a subnet mask, and a gateway address; therefore, you do not have to configure these with the parameters in the adapter.

BOOTP can make it easier to administer an Ethernet network. A free version of the Rockwell Software
® BOOTP Server can be obtained at
http://www.software.rockwell.com/support/download/detail.cfm?ID=3390.

Bridge
A network device that can route messages from one network to another. A bridge also refers to a communication module in a ControlLogix controller that connects the controller to a network. See also Scanner.

C CIP (Common Industrial Protocol)
CIP is the transport and application layer protocol used for messaging over EtherNet/IP, ControlNet, and DeviceNet networks. The protocol is used for implicit messaging (real-time I/O) and explicit messaging (configuration, data collection, and diagnostics).

Connected Components Workbench Software
The recommended tool for monitoring and configuring Allen-Bradley products and network communication adapters. It can be used on computers running various Microsoft operating systems. You can obtain a free copy of Connect Components Workbench software at http://www.ab.com/support/ abdrives/webupdate/software.html.

ControlFLASH
A free software tool used to electronically update firmware of Allen-Bradley products and network communication adapters.

ControlFLASH software is downloaded automatically when the firmware revision file for the product being updated is downloaded from the Allen-Bradley updates website to your computer.

G-2 Glossary
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

Controller
A controller, also called programmable logic controller, is a solid-state control system that has a user-programmable memory for storage of instructions to implement specific functions such as I/O control, logic, timing, counting, report generation, communication, arithmetic, and data file manipulation. A controller consists of a central processor, input/output interface, and memory. See also Scanner.

D Data Rate
The speed at which data is transferred on the EtherNet/IP network. You can set the adapter to a data rate of 10 Mbps Full-Duplex, 10 Mbps Half-Duplex, 100 Mbps Full-Duplex, or 100 Mbps Half-Duplex. If another device on the network sets or auto-negotiates the data rate, you can set the adapter to automatically detect the data rate.

Datalinks
A Datalink is a type of pointer used by PowerFlex 7-Class drives to transfer data to and from the controller. Datalinks allow specified parameters to be read or written to without using explicit messages. When enabled, each Datalink consumes either four bytes or eight bytes in both the input and output image table of the controller. The drive determines the size of Datalinks.

DPI (Drive Peripheral Interface)
A second generation peripheral communication interface used by various Allen-Bradley drives and power products, such as PowerFlex 7-Class drives. It is a functional enhancement to SCANport.

DPI Peripheral
A device that provides an interface between DPI and a network or user.

Peripheral devices are also referred to as ‘adapters’ or ‘modules’. The 20-COMM-E adapter, 1203-USB or 1203-SSS converter, and PowerFlex 7-Class HIMs (catalog number 20-HIM-xxx) are examples of DPI peripherals.

DPI Product
A device that uses the DPI communication interface to communicate with one or more peripheral devices. For example, a motor drive such as a PowerFlex 7-Class drive is a DPI product. In this manual, a DPI product is also referred to as ‘drive’ or ‘host’.

Glossary G-3
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

DriveExplorer Software
A tool for monitoring and configuring Allen-Bradley products and network communication adapters. It can be used on computers running various Microsoft Windows operating systems. DriveExplorer software, version

3.xx or later, can be used to configure this adapter and PowerFlex drives.

This software tool has been discontinued and is now available as freeware at http://www.ab.com/support/abdrives/webupdate/software.html. There are no plans to provide future updates to this tool and the download is being provided ‘as-is’ for users that lost their DriveExplorer CD, or need to configure legacy products not supported by Connected Components Workbench software.

DriveTools SP Software
A software suite designed for running on various Microsoft Windows operating systems. This software suite provides a family of tools, including DriveExecutive software (version 3.01 or later), that you can use to program, monitor, control, troubleshoot, and maintain Allen-Bradley products. DriveTools SP software can be used with PowerFlex 7-Class and PowerFlex 4-Class drives, and legacy drives that implement the SCANport communication interface. Information about DriveTools SP software can be accessed at http://www.ab.com/drives/drivetools
.

Duplex
Duplex describes the mode of communication. ‘Full-duplex’ communication lets a device exchange data in both directions at the same time. ‘Half-duplex’ communication lets a device exchange data only in one direction at a time. The duplex used by the adapter depends on the type of duplex that other network devices, such as switches, support.

E EDS (Electronic Data Sheet) Files
Simple text files that are used by network configuration tools to describe products so that you can easily commission them on a network. EDS files describe a product device type and revision. EDS files for many Allen-Bradley products can be found at http://www.ab.com/networks/eds.

EtherNet/IP Network
EtherNet/IP (Industrial Protocol) is an open producer-consumer communication network based on the Ethernet standard (IEEE 802.3), TCP/ IP, UDP/IP, and CIP. Designed for industrial communication, both I/O and explicit messages can be transmitted over the network. Each device is assigned a unique IP address and transmits data on the network. The number of devices that an EtherNet/IP network can support depends on the class of IP address. For example, a network with a Class C IP address can have 254 nodes.

General information about EtherNet/IP and the EtherNet/IP specification are maintained by the Open DeviceNet Vendor’s Association (ODV A).

ODV A is online at http://www.odva.org
.

G-4 Glossary
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

Explicit Messaging
Explicit Messages are used to transfer data that does not require continuous updates. They are typically used to configure, monitor, and diagnose devices over the network.

F Fault Action
A fault action determines how the adapter and connected drive act when a communication fault (for example, a disconnected cable) occurs or when the controller is switched out of run mode. The former uses a communication fault action, and the latter uses an idle fault action.

Fault Configuration
When communication is disrupted (for example, a cable is disconnected), the adapter and PowerFlex drive can respond with a user-defined fault configuration. The user sets the data that is sent to the drive using specific fault configuration parameters in the adapter. When a fault action parameter is set to use the fault configuration data and a fault occurs, the data from these parameters is sent as the Logic Command, Reference, and/or Datalinks.

G Gateway
A device on a network that connects an individual network to a system of networks. When a node needs to communicate with a node on another network, a gateway transfers the data between the two networks. You need to configure the address for the gateway device in the adapter if you want the adapter to communicate with devices that are not on its network.

H Hardware Address
Each Ethernet device has a unique hardware address (sometimes called a MAC address) that is 48 bits. The address appears as six digits separated by colons (for example, xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx). Each digit has a value between 0 and 255 (0x00 and 0xFF). This address is assigned in the hardware and cannot be changed. It is required to identify the device if you are using a BOOTP server.

HIM (Human Interface Module)
A device that can be used to configure and control a drive. PowerFlex 7-Class HIMs (catalog number 20-HIM-xx) can be used to configure PowerFlex 7-Class drives and their connected peripherals.

Hold Last
When communication is disrupted (for example, a cable is disconnected), the adapter and PowerFlex drive can respond by holding last. Hold last results in the drive receiving the last data received via the network connection before the disruption. If the drive was running and using the Reference from the adapter, it will continue to run at the same Reference.

Glossary G-5
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

Host Parameters (only PowerFlex 750-Series drives)
Host parameters are used to configure peripherals connected to a PowerFlex 750-Series drive. When using a PowerFlex 7-Class HIM (catalog number 20-HIM-A3/-A5/-C3S/-C5S), Host parameters do not appear. When using a PowerFlex 750-Series HIM (catalog number 20-HIM-A6/-C6S), Host parameters appear in the HOST PARAM folder. You can also view Host parameters with any of the following drive configuration tools:
 Connected Components Workbench software—click the tab for the option module at the bottom of the window, click the Parameters icon in the tool bar, and open the Host parameters folder.
 DriveExplorer software—find the op tion module in the treeview and open its Parameters folder.
 DriveExecutive software—find the option module in the treeview, expand the module in the tree, and open its Parameters folder.

I Idle Action
An idle action determines how the adapter and connected drive act when the controller is switched out of run mode.

I/O Data
I/O data, sometimes called ‘implicit messages’ or ‘input/output’, is time-critical data such as a Logic Command and Reference. The terms ‘input’ and ‘output’ are defined from the controller’s point of view. Output is produced by the controller and consumed by the adapter. Input is produced by the adapter and consumed by the controller.

IP Addresses
A unique IP address identifies each node on an EtherNet/IP network. An IP address consists of 32 bits that are divided into four segments of one byte each. It appears as four decimal integers separated by periods (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx). Each ‘xxx’ can have a decimal value from 0 to 255. For example, an IP address could be 192.168.0.1.

An IP address has two parts: a network ID and a host ID. The class of network determines the format of the address.

The number of devices on your EtherNet/IP network will vary depending on the number of bytes that are used for the network address. In many cases you are given a network with a Class C address, in which the first three bytes contain the network address (subnet mask = 255.255.255.0). This 01 7 1 5 2 3 3 1
Class A 0 Network ID Host ID
01 7 1 5 2 3 3 1
Class B 1 0 Network ID Host ID
0 1 2 7 15 23 31
Class C 1 1 0 Network ID Host ID
G-6 Glossary
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

leaves 8 bits or 256 addresses on your network. Because two addresses are reserved for special uses (0 is an address for the network usually used by the router, and 255 is an address for broadcast messages to all network devices), you have 254 addresses to use on a Class C address block.

To ensure that each device on the Internet has a unique address, contact your network administrator or Internet Service Provider for unique fixed IP addresses. You can then set the unique IP address for the adapter by using a BOOTP server or by manually configuring parameters in the adapter. The adapter reads the values of these parameters only at powerup.

L Logic Command/Logic Status
The Logic Command is used to control the PowerFlex 7-Class drive (for example, start, stop, and direction). It consists of one 16-bit word of output to the adapter from the network. The definitions of the bits in this word depend on the drive, and are shown in Appendix D.

The Logic Status is used to monitor the PowerFlex 7-Class drive (for example, operating state and motor direction). It consists of one 16-bit word of input from the adapter to the network. The definitions of the bits in this word depend on the drive, and are shown in Appendix
D.

M Master-Slave Hierarchy
An adapter configured for a master-slave hierarchy exchanges data with the master device. Usually, a network has one scanner which is the master device, and all other devices (for example, drives connected to EtherNet/IP adapters) are slave devices.

On a network with multiple scanners (called a multimaster hierarchy), each slave device must have a scanner specified as a master.

N NVS (Nonvolatile Storage)
NVS is the permanent memory of a device. Devices such as the adapter and drive store parameters and other information in NVS so that they are not lost when the device loses power. NVS is sometimes called ‘EEPROM’.

P PCCC (Programmable Controller Communications Command) PCCC is the protocol used by some controllers to communicate with devices on a network. Some software products (for example, DriveExplorer and DriveExecutive software) also use PCCC to communicate.

Peer-to-Peer Hierarchy
An adapter that is configured for a peer-to-peer hierarchy can exchange data with a device on the network that is not a scanner. This type of hierarchy can be set up so that a scanner configures or transmits data to one PowerFlex 7-Class drive which then sends the same configuration or data to other PowerFlex 7-Class drives on the network. To use a peer-to-peer hierarchy, you configure one adapter to transmit data (2 or 4 words) and one or more adapters to receive the data.

Glossary G-7
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

Ping
A message that is sent by a DPI product to its peripheral devices. They use the ping to gather data about the product, including whether it can receive messages and whether they can log in for control. On EtherNet/IP, a ping can be used to determine if a node exists.

PowerFlex 7-Class (Architecture Class) Drives
The Allen-Bradley PowerFlex 7-Class family of drives supports DPI and, at the time of publication, includes the PowerFlex 70, PowerFlex 700, PowerFlex 700H, PowerFlex 700S, PowerFlex 700L, and PowerFlex 7000 drives.

PowerFlex 750-Series (Architecture Class) Drives
The Allen-Bradley PowerFlex 750-Series of drives supports DPI and, at the time of publication, includes the PowerFlex 753 and PowerFlex 755 drives.

R Reference/Feedback
The Reference is used to send a setpoint (for example, speed, frequency, and torque) to the drive. It consists of one word of output to the adapter from the network. The size of the word (either a 16-bit word or 32-bit word) is determined by the drive.

Feedback is used to monitor the speed of the drive. It consists of one word of input from the adapter to the network. The size of the word (either a 16-bit word or 32-bit word) is determined by the drive.

RSLogix 5/500/5000 Software
RSLogix software is a tool for configuring and monitoring controllers to communicate with connected devices. It is a 32-bit application that runs on various Windows operating systems. Information about RSLogix software can be found at http://www.software.rockwell.com/rslogix .

S Scanner
A scanner is a separate module (of a multi-module controller) or a built-in component (of a single-module controller) that provides communication with adapters connected to a network. See also Controller.

Status Indicators
LEDs that are used to report the status of the adapter, network, and drive.

They are on the adapter and can be viewed on the front cover of the drive when the drive is powered.

Subnet Mask
An extension to the IP addressing scheme that lets you use a single network ID for multiple physical networks. A bit mask identifies the part of the address that specifies the network and the part of the address that specifies the unique node on the network. A ‘1’ in the subnet mask indicates the bit is used to specify the network. A ‘0’ in the subnet mask indicates that the bit is used to specify the node.

G-8 Glossary
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P

For example, a subnet mask on a network may appear as follows: 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 (255.255.255.192). This mask indicates that 26 bits are used to identify the network and 6 bits are used to identify devices on each network. Instead of a single physical Class C network with 254 devices, this subnet mask divides it into four networks with up to 62 devices each.

Switches
Network devices that provide virtual connections that help to control collisions and reduce traffic on the network. They are able to reduce network congestion by transmitting packets to an individual port only if they are destined for the connected device. In a control application, in which real time data access is critical, network switches may be required in place of hubs.

T TCP (Transmission Control Protocol)
EtherNet/IP uses this protocol to transfer Explicit Messaging packets using IP. TCP guarantees delivery of data through the use of retries.

U UDP (User Datagram Protocol)
EtherNet/IP uses this protocol to transfer I/O packets using IP. UDP provides a simple, but fast capability to send I/O messaging packets between devices. This protocol verifies that adapters transmit the most recent data because it does not use acknowledgements or retries.

UDDT (User-Defined Data Type)
A structure data type that you define during the development of an application (for example, to convert 32-bit REAL parameter data for written and read values to correctly display them in human readable format).

Update
The process of updating firmware in a device. The adapter and its connected PowerFlex 7-Class host drive and its peripherals can be updated using various Allen-Bradley software tools. See Updating the Adapter Firmware on page 3-17 for more information.

Z Zero Data
When communication is disrupted (for example, a cable is disconnected), the adapter and drive can respond with zero data. Zero data results in the drive receiving zero as values for Logic Command, Reference, and Datalink data. If the drive was running and using the Reference from the adapter, it will stay running but at zero Reference.

20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Index
A
Access Control parameter, B-7
adapter
applying power, 2-6
commissioning, 2-8
compatible products, 1-3
components, 1-1
configuration tools, 3-1
configuring to use with optional I/O data, 9-3
connecting to the
drive, 2-3
network, 2-6
definition, G-1
features, 1-2
firmware updating, 3-17
grounding, 2-5
hardware address label, 3-3
installation, 2-1 to 2-8
IP address, 3-3, 3-5
mounting on the drive, 2-5
parameters, B-1 to B-8
resetting, 3-16
specifications, A-1
using in a DPI External Comms Kit, 9-1
viewing its status, 3-17
viewing optional I/O diagnostic items, 9-4
web pages, 8-1 to 8-11
applying power to the adapter, 2-6
Assembly object, C-3
attentions, 1-5
B
baud rate, see data rate
bit definitions of Logic Command/Status word for
PowerFlex 70/700/700H, and 700L (with 700
Control) drives, D-1
PowerFlex 700S (Phase II Control) and 700L
(with 700S Control) drives, D-3
PowerFlex 750-Series drives, D-5
PowerFlex Digital DC drives, D-7
BOOTP (Bootstrap Protocol)
definition, G-1
disabling, 3-5
free server application, G-1
using to set adapter IP address, 3-3
BOOTP parameter, B-1
bridge, G-1
C
cables
DPI Internal Interface, 2-3, 2-4
Ethernet, 2-6
CIP (Common Industrial Protocol), G-1
classes of IP addresses, G-5
Comm Flt Action parameter, B-3
commissioning the adapter, 2-8
communication module, see adapter
compatible products, 1-3
components of the adapter, 1-1
configuration tools, 3-1
Connected Components Workbench software
adapter configuration tool, 1-4, 3-1
definition/website, G-1
connecting adapter to the
drive, 2-3
network, 2-6
ControlFLASH software, G-1
controller, G-2
ControlLogix controller
configuring the I/O, 4-2
explicit messaging, 6-4
using the I/O, 5-11
D
data rate
definition, G-2
setting, 3-7
Datalink Size parameter, B-2
Datalinks
definition, G-2
in I/O image, 5-2
using, 5-9
using Datalink D to send optional I/O Board
data, 9-2
diagnostic items, 7-4
dimensions, A-2
DPI
connector on adapter, 1-1
data rates, A-1
definition, G-2
Internal Interface cable, 2-3, 2-4
peripheral, G-2
products, 1-3, G-2
DPI Alarm object, C-24
Index-2

20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
DPI Data Rate parameter, B-1
DPI Device object, C-13
DPI Diagnostic object, C-26
DPI External Comms Kit - using adapter in, 9-1
DPI Fault object, C-22
DPI I/O Act parameter, B-3
DPI I/O Cfg parameter, B-3
DPI Parameter object, C-16
DPI Port parameter, B-1
DPI Time object, C-28
DriveExecutive software
adapter configuration tool, 1-4, 3-1
definition/website, G-3
DriveExplorer software
adapter configuration tool, 1-4, 3-1
definition/website, G-3
drives, see PowerFlex drives
DriveTools SP software, G-3
duplex communication mode
definition, G-3
selecting, 3-7
E
EDS (Electronic Data Sheet) files, G-3
EEPROM, see Nonvolatile Storage (NVS)
EN Rate Act parameter, B-2
EN Rate Cfg parameter, B-2
environmental specifications, A-2
equipment required, 1-3
Ethernet
cable, 2-6
connector on adapter, 1-1
switch, 2-6
Ethernet Link object, C-37
EtherNet/IP
data rates, A-1
example network for
ControlLogix controller, 4-2
MicroLogix 1100/1400 controller, 4-39
PLC-5 controller, 4-23
SLC 500 controller, 4-31
network definition, G-3
objects - list of, C-1 to C-38
specification, G-3
events
list of, 7-7
viewing/clearing, 7-6
explicit messaging
about, 6-2
configuring for
ControlLogix controller, 6-4
MicroLogix 1100/1400 controller, 6-53
PLC-5 controller, 6-23
SLC 500 controller, 6-29
definition, G-4
performing, 6-3
F
fault action
configuring the adapter for, 3-14
definition, G-4
fault configuration
configuring the adapter for, 3-15
definition, G-4
faults, see events
features, 1-2
firmware
revision, P-1
update guidelines, 3-17
Flt Cfg A1-D2 In parameters, B-4
Flt Cfg Logic parameter, B-4
Flt Cfg Ref parameter, B-4
full duplex, see duplex
G
gateway - definition, G-4
gateway address
setting with BOOTP server, 3-3
setting with parameters, 3-5
Gateway Cfg 1-4 parameters, B-2
grounding the adapter, 2-5
H
half duplex, see duplex
hardware address
definition, G-4
in diagnostic item, 7-5
on adapter label, 3-3
HIM (Human Interface Module)
accessing parameters with, 3-2
definition, G-4
LCD model, 3-2
LED model, 3-2
Index-3

20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
hold last
configuring the adapter for, 3-14
definition, G-4
Host DPI Parameter object, C-30
host IDs, G-5
I
I/O
about, 5-1
configuring for
ControlLogix controller, 4-2
MicroLogix 1100/1400 controller, 4-39
PLC-5 controller, 4-23
SLC 500 controller, 4-31
configuring the adapter for, 3-7
definition, G-5
limitations when using PLC-5, SLC 500, or
MicroLogix 1100/1400 controller, 4-22
understanding the I/O image, 5-2
using with
ControlLogix controller, 5-11
MicroLogix 1100/1400 controller, 5-21
PLC-5 controller, 5-21
SLC 500 controller, 5-21
I/O Board option - in DPI External Comms Kit
configuring adapter to use optional I/O data,
9-3
understanding the I/O image, 9-2
using Datalink D to send I/O data, 9-2
viewing optional I/O diagnostic data, 9-4
Identity object, C-2
idle action, G-5
Idle Flt Action parameter, B-3
installation
applying power to the adapter, 2-6
commissioning the adapter, 2-8
connecting to the
drive, 2-3
network, 2-6
preparing for, 2-1
Internal Interface cables
connecting to the
adapter, 2-4
drive, 2-4
illustration, 2-4
IP Addr Cfg 1-4 parameters, B-1
IP address
definition/classes, G-5
setting with BOOTP server, 3-3
setting with parameters, 3-5
L
LCD HIM, 3-2
LED HIM, 3-2
LEDs, see status indicators or name of indicator
Logic Command/Status
bit definitions for
PowerFlex 70/700/700H, and 700L (with
700 Control) drives, D-1
PowerFlex 700S (Phase II Control) and
700L (with 700S Control) drives, D-3
PowerFlex 750-Series drives, D-5
PowerFlex Digital DC drives, D-7
definition, G-6
in I/O image for
ControlLogix controller, 5-2
PLC-5, SLC 500, or MicroLogix 1100/1400
controllers, 5-4
using, 5-6
M
MAC address, see hardware address
manual
conventions, P-1
related documentation, P-2
website, P-2
Master-Slave hierarchy
configuring adapter for, 3-8
definition, G-6
mechanical dimensions, A-2
messages, see explicit messaging or I/O
MicroLogix 1100/1400 controller
configuring the I/O, 4-39
explicit messaging, 6-53
limitations when using the I/O, 4-22
using the I/O, 5-21
MOD status indicator
locating, 7-1
troubleshooting with, 7-2
mounting the adapter, 2-5
M-S Input parameter, B-4
M-S Input parameter configurations, 3-8
M-S Output parameter, B-5
Index-4

20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
M-S Output parameter configurations, 3-9
N
NET A status indicator
locating, 7-1
troubleshooting with, 7-3
NET B status indicator
locating, 7-1
troubleshooting with, 7-3
network
cable, 2-6
IDs, G-5
Nonvolatile Storage (NVS)
definition, G-6
in adapter, 3-1
in drive, 5-9
O
objects - list of, C-1 to C-38
ODVA EtherNet/IP specification, G-3
P
Parameter Group object, C-7
Parameter object, C-5
parameters
accessing, 3-1
convention, P-1
list of, B-1 to B-8
restoring to factory-default settings, 3-16
PCCC (Programmable Controller
Communications Command), G-6
PCCC object, C-8
Peer A Input parameter, B-5
Peer A Output parameter, B-7
Peer B Input parameter, B-5
Peer B Output parameter, B-7
Peer Cmd Mask parameter, B-5
Peer Flt Action parameter, B-6
Peer Inp Addr 1-4 parameters, B-6
Peer Inp Enable parameter, B-6
Peer Inp Status parameter, B-7
Peer Inp Timeout parameter, B-6
Peer Out Enable parameter, B-7
Peer Out Skip parameter, B-7
Peer Out Time parameter, B-7
Peer-to-Peer hierarchy
configuring adapter to
receive data, 3-11
transmit data, 3-9
definition, G-6
ping, G-7
PLC-5 controller
configuring the I/O, 4-23
explicit messaging, 6-23
limitations when using the I/O, 4-22
using the I/O, 5-21
PORT status indicator
locating, 7-1
troubleshooting with, 7-2
power consumption, A-1
PowerFlex drives
compatible with adapter, 1-3
definition, G-7
HIM, 3-2
installing adapter on, 2-3
preparing for an installation, 2-1
processor, see controller
programmable logic controller, see controller
Q
quick start, 1-6
R
Ref Adjust parameter, B-5
Ref/Fdbk Size parameter, B-2
Reference/Feedback
definition, G-7
in I/O image for
ControlLogix controller, 5-2
PLC-5, SLC 500, or MicroLog ix 1100/1400
controllers, 5-4
setting an adjustment, 3-13
using, 5-6
Register object, C-4
regulatory compliance, A-2
related documentation, P-2
requested packet interval, 4-9, 4-19
Reset Module parameter, B-2
ribbon cable, see Internal Interface cable
RSLinx Classic software
documentation, P-3
using, 4-1
Index-5

20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
RSLogix 5/500/5000 software, G-7
S
safety precautions, 1-5
scanner, G-7
SLC 500 controller
configuring the I/O, 4-31
explicit messaging, 6-29
limitations when using the I/O, 4-22
using the I/O, 5-21
specifications
EtherNet/IP address, G-3
EtherNet/IP subnet mask, G-7
for the adapter, A-1
status indicators
definition, G-7
locating, 7-1
MOD, 7-1, 7-2
NET A, 7-1, 7-3
NET B, 7-1, 7-3
normal operation, 2-6
PORT, 7-1, 7-2
troubleshooting with, 7-2 to 7-3
understanding, 7-1
Subnet Cfg 1-4 parameters, B-1
subnet mask
definition, G-7
setting with BOOTP server, 3-3
setting with parameters, 3-5
switches, G-8
T
TCP (Transmission Control Protocol), G-8
TCP/IP Interface object, C-36
technical support, P-2
tools required, 1-3
troubleshooting, 7-1 to 7-8
U
UDDT (User-Defined Data Type), G-8
UDP (User Datagram Protocol), G-8
update
definition, G-8
guidelines, 3-17
W
Web Enable parameter, B-7
Web Features parameter, B-8
web pages
enabling with parameter, 3-15
for the adapter, 8-1 to 8-11
website for
BOOTP server, G-1
Connected Components Workbench
software, G-1
DriveExecutive software, G-3
DriveExplorer software, G-3
DriveTools SP software, G-3
EDS files, G-3
EtherNet/IP, G-3
ODVA (Open DeviceNet Vendor’s
Association), G-3
related documentation, P-2
RSLogix 5/500/5000 software, G-7
wiring, see cables
Z
zero data
configuring the adapter for, 3-14
definition, G-8
Index-6

20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Notes:

Index-7

20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Notes:

Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P - July 2015
Supersedes Publication 20COMM-UM010G-EN-P - May 2013 Copyright © 2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. Printed in the U.S.A.

Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the W eb to assist you in using its products.

At http://www.rockwellautomation.com/support you can find technical and application notes, sample code, and links to software service packs. Y ou can also visit our Support Center at https://rockwellautomation.custhelp.com/ for software updates, support chats and forums, technical information, FAQs, and to sign up for product notification updates.

In addition, we offer multiple support programs for installation, configuration, and troubleshooting. For more information, contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative, or visit http://www.rockwellautomation.com/services/online-phone.

Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation, review the information that is contained in this manual. Y ou can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running.

New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to help ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility. However, if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned, follow these procedures.

Documentation Feedback
Y our comments will help us serve your documentation needs better. If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document, complete this form, publication RA-DU002
, available at http://www.rockwellautomation.com/literature/.

United States or Canada 1.440.646.3434
Outside United States or Canada Use the Worldwide Locator at http://www.rockwellautomation.com/rockwellautomation/support/overview.page, or contact your local Rockwell Automation representative.

United States Contact your distributor. You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor to complete the return process.

Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure.

Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret A.Ş., Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat:6 34752 İçerenköy, İstanbul, T el: +90 (216) 5698400 Rockwell Automation maintains current product environmental information on its website at http://www.rockwellautomation.com/rockwellautomation/about-us/sustainability-ethics/product-environmental-compliance.page. www.rockwellautomation.com
Power, Control and Information Solutions Headquarters
Americas: Rockwell Automation, 1201 South Second Street, Milwaukee, WI 53204-2496 USA, Tel: (1) 414.382.2000, Fax: (1) 414.382.4444 Europe/Middle East/ Africa: Rockwell Automation NV, Pegasus Park, De Kleetlaan 12a, 1831 Diegem, Belgium, Tel: (32) 2 663 0600, Fax: (32) 2 663 0640 Asia Pacific: Rockwell Automation, Level 14, Core F, Cyberport 3, 100 Cyberport Road, Hong Kong, Tel: (852) 2887 4788, Fax: (852) 2508 1846 Installation Instructions
Installationsanleitung
Installation
Installazione
Instalación
Instructies
Instalação
PowerFlex Remote HIM
Dez
entrale Bedieneinheit (HIM) für PowerFlex
HIM décentralisée
Tastiera per montaggio a fronte quadro
Programador remoto
HIM op afstand
HIM remota
IP66 (NEMA Type 4X/12)
Indoor / Innenraum / Usag
e Intérieur / Interno / Interior / Indoor / Interno
Important: Adhesive coated gask
et designed for one time installation.

Wichtig: Dichtung ist nur für den einmaligen Einbau anwendbar.

Important : Joint adhésif à usage unique.

Importante: Guarnizione adesiva valida per una sola installazione. Smontando e rimontando la stessa non sara’ piu’ garantita la protezione IP66.

ATENCIÓN: Junta con capa adhesiva diseñada para solo una ﬁjación– no reutilizable.

Belangrijk: De zelfklevende dichtingsring is voor éénmalig gebruik.

Importante: Vedação adesiva foi projetada para ser instalada uma vez. 20-HIM-C3 20-HIM-C5
~
"'lllllll"'
2 Dimensions
Abmessungen
Dimensions
Dimensioni
Dimensiones
Afmetingen
Dimensões
104,0
(4.09)
17,6
(0.69)

1.0m
mm
(in.)
220,0
(8.66)
1202-H03 = 0.3m
1202-H10 = 1.0m
1202-H30 = 3.0m
1202-H90 = 9.0m
- -
"
C
,
3 194,0
(7.64)
125,0
(4.92)
60,5
(2.38)
38,0
(1.50)
78,0
(3.07)
66,0
(2.60)
19,1
(0.75)
4,8
(0.19)
I
l
-$---~-~
0 _fr f
I
----------------------- ~
To contact Drives Technical
Support . . .

Tel: (1) 262 512-8176, Fax: (1) 262 512-2222
Email: [email protected]
Online: www.ab.com/support/abdrives
Publication 20HIM-IN001A-MU-P – July 2002 307781-P02
Supersedes PFLEX-IN001A-MU-P Copyright © 2002 Roc
kwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. Printed in USA. 1 2
1 8
6 5
7 3
2 4

0.68 N-m
(6.0 lb.-in.)
3 = M4
Mount
Montage
Montag
e
Montaggio
Montado
Montage
Montagem
0 0
m©
~
( :O.'/!'"'~ - D..;,.& J
~Rockwell
Automation
Installation Instructions
Installationsanleitung
Notice d’installation
Installazione
Instalación
Instructies
Instalação
PowerFlex 7-Class HIM Bezel (DPI)
Blende der Bedieneinheit (DPI) für PowerFlex der Serie 7 Boîtier HIM (DPI) PowerFlex 7-Class
Mascherina PowerFlex per modulo interfaccia operatore
PowerFlex – Classe 7 (DPI)
Visera (HIM) PowerFlex Clase 7 (DPI)
PowerFlex 7 - klasse HIM bezel (DPI)
Encaixe (DPI) para HIM do PowerFlex classe 7
IP20 (NEMA Type 1)
20-HIM-B1
2 Dimensions
Abmessungen
Dimensions
Dimensioni
Dimensiones
Afmetingen
Dimensões
11,1
(0.44)
180,0
(7.08)
93,0
(3.66)
25,2
(0.99)
3m
1202-H03 = 0.3m
1202-H10 = 1.0m
1202-H30 = 3.0m
1202-H90 = 9.0m
mm
(in.)
For use with LCD HIM only
(supplied separately)
Nur zum Gebrauch mit LCD-
Bedieneinheiten (separat erhältlich)
Utilisable seulement avec la HIM LCD
(fournie séparément)
Da usare esclusivamente con il
modulo interfaccia operatore con display
a cristalli liquidi (venduto separatamente)
Únicamente para el uso con la interface
HIM de LCD (se suministra por separado)
Alleen voor gebruik met LCD HIM
(wordt apart geleverd)
Para utilização somente com a HIM de LCD
(fornecido separadamente)
Extension Cable
( supplied separately)
Verlängerungskabel
(separat erhältlich)
Câble d'extension
(fourni séparément)
Prolunga
(venduto separatamente)
Cable Prolongador
(se suministra por separado)
Verlengkabel
(wordt apart geleverd)
Cabo de extensão
(fornecido separadamente)
3 Front View
Frontansicht
Vue Frontale
Vista anteriore
Vista Frontal
Vooraanzicht
Vista anterior
67,0
(2.63)
60,0
(2.36)
77,0
(3.03)
77,0
(3.03)
59 (2.32)
19,1
(0.75)
4,8
(0.19)
mm (in.)
l
I
l I
t I
-----------------------------~
www.rockwellautomation.com
Americas: Rockwell Automation, 1201 South Second Street, Milwaukee, WI 53204-2496 USA, Tel: (1) 414.382.2000, Fax: (1) 414.382.4444 Europe/Middle East/Africa: Rockwell Automation, Vorstlaan/Boulevard du Souverain 36, 1170 Brussels, Belgium, Tel: (32) 2 663 0600, Fax: (32) 2 663 0640 Asia Pacific: Rockwell Automation, Level 14, Core F , Cyberport 3, 100 Cyberport Road, Hong Kong, Tel: (852) 2887 4788, Fax: (852) 2508 1846 Power, Control and Information Solutions Headquarters
Publication 20HIM-IN002B-MU-P – February 2003 P/N 315110-P02 Copyright © 2003 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. Printed in USA. 1 4
2 3
Mount
Montage
Montage
Montaggio
Montado
Montage
Montagem
0 0
HIM Quick Reference
HIM-Guide d’utilisation rapide des consoles
de programmation (HIM)
Bedieneinheit (HIM) - Kurzreferenz
Guida di consultazione rapida al modulo
interfaccia operatore (HIM)
Referência Rápida da Interface de
Operação e Programação (HIM)
Referencia rápida del terminal de operador (HIM)
HIM Naslaggids
PWR
STS
PORT
MOD
NET A
NET B
HOT surfaces can cause severe burns

CAUTION
Esc Sel
Jog
Alt
Esc Sel
Jog
Alt
LCD

LED/LCD
Esc Sel
~ Allen-Bradley ""lmllJI"
Display / Keys
LCD Display
➊ Status Line: Direction | Operating Status | Drive Status | Auto/Manual Mode ➋ Output Frequency or Commanded Frequency
➌ Programming Screen, Menu, or User Display
LED Display
➍ Status Indicators: Forward Indicator, Manual Mode Indicator, and Reverse Indicator ➎ Output Frequency, Commanded Frequency, or Programming Screen Keys
Exit a menu, cancel a change to a parameter value, or acknowledge a fault/alarm.

Select a digit, select a bit, or enter edit mode in a parameter screen.

Scroll through options, increase a value, or toggle a bit.

Scroll through options, decrease a value, or toggle a bit.

Enter a menu, enter edit mode in a parameter screen, or save a change to a parameter value.

Access the function associated with a programming or numeric key. Provides access to the Large Format Display. Refer to the drive user manual for more information.

Start the drive.

Stop the drive or clear a fault.

Increase speed.

Decrease speed.

Change direction.

Jog the drive.

Type parameter numbers and values.

Esc Sel
Log Device
Auto/Man Remove
ALT
JOG
F
RM
In
Out
➍
➎
Esc Sel
S.M.A.R.T. View
Exp
Param #
Lang Auto/Man Remove
ALT
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
. 0 +/–
JOG
➊
➋
➌
F->
FGP:
| Stopped | Auto|
Accel Time 1

0.1 <> 3600.0
Secs10.0
Hz0.0
Par 140
Esc
Sel
ALT
OR
OR
Jog
0 9...
. +/-
Affichage et Touches
Affichage à cristaux liquides
➊ Ligne d’état : Direction | État de fonctionnement | État du variateur | Mode Auto/Manuel ➋ Fréquence de sortie ou Fréquence commandée
➌ Écran de programmation, Menu ou afficheur utilisateur Affichage à DEL
➍ Indicateurs d’état : Indicateur de marche avant, Indicateur de mode manuel et Indicateur de marche arrière
➎ Fréquence de sortie, Fréquence commandeé ou Écran de programmation Touches
Quitter un menu, annuler la modification d’une valeur de paramètre ou identifier un(e) défaut/ alarme.

Sélectionner un chiffre, sélectionner un bit ou entrer en mode d’édition dans l’écran du paramètre.

Faire défiler les options, augmenter une valeur ou changer un bit.

Faire défiler les options, réduire une valeur ou changer un bit.

Entrer dans un menu, entrer en mode édition dans un écran de paramètre ou enregistrer une modification de valeur de paramètre.

Accéder à la fonction associée à une touche numérique ou de programmation. Fournit l’accès au format d’affichage agrandi. Reportez-vous au manuel utilisateur du variateur pour plus d’information.

Démarrer le variateur.

Arrêter le variateur ou effacer un défaut.

Augmenter la vitesse.

Diminuer la vitesse.

Inverser le sens.

Marche par à-coups du variateur.

Entrer les numéros et les valeurs de paramètre.

Esc Sel
Log Device
Auto/Man Remove
ALT
JOG
F
RM
In
Out
➍
➎
Esc Sel
S.M.A.R.T. View
Exp
Param #
Lang Auto/Man Remove
ALT
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
. 0 +/–
JOG
➊
➋
➌
A->
FGP:
| Arrêté | Auto|
Temps Accel 1

0.1 <> 3600.0
s10.0
Hz0.0
Par 140
Esc
Sel
ALT
OU
OU
Jog
0 9...
. +/-
Anzeige / Tasten
LCD-Anzeige
➊ Statuszeile: Richtung | Betriebsstatus | FU-Status | Autom./Manueller Modus ➋ Ausgangsfrequenz oder gewählte Frequenz
➌ Programmierbildschirm, Menü oder Benutzeranzeige
LED-Anzeige
➍ Status-Anzeige: Vorwärtsanzeige, Anzeige für manuellen Modus und Rückwärtsanzeige ➎ Ausgangsfrequenz, gewählte Frequenz oder Programmierbildschirm Tasten
Ein Menü verlassen, eine Änderung eines Parameterwerts abbrechen oder einen Fehler/ Alarm quittieren.

Eine Ziffer wählen, ein Bit wählen oder den Bearbeitungsmodus in einem Parameterbildschirm aufrufen.

Durch die Optionen scrollen, einen Wert erhöhen oder ein Bit ein- und ausschalten.

Durch die Optionen scrollen, einen Wert verringern oder ein Bit ein- und ausschalten.

Ein Menü aufrufen, den Bearbeitungsmodus in einem Parameterbildschirm aufrufen oder eine Änderung eines Parameterwertes speichern.

Die mit einer Programmier- bzw. numerischen Taste zusammenhängende Funktion aufrufen.

Zugang zur Vollbildanzeige. Weitere Informationen finden Sie im Benutzerhandbuch zum Frequenzumrichter.

Den Frequenzumrichter starten.

Den Frequenzumrichter anhalten oder eine Störung quittieren.

Drehzahl erhöhen.

Drehzahl verringern.

Richtung ändern.

Tipp-Betrieb des Frequenzumrichters.

Parameterzahlen und -werte eingeben.

Esc Sel
Log Device
Auto/Man Remove
ALT
JOG
F
RM
In
Out
➍
➎
Esc Sel
S.M.A.R.T. View
Exp
Param #
Lang Auto/Man Remove
ALT
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
. 0 +/–
JOG
➊
➋
➌
V->
DGP:
|Angehalten | Auto|
Beschl.Zeit 1

0.1 <> 3600.0
Sek10.0
Hz0.0
Par 140
Esc
Sel
ALT
ODER
ODER
Jog
0 9...
. +/-
-- Jf/1
• l
: 1
0 J
C J
-0
@
• ~ I
• ~ I
~ J
• I
Display / Tasti
Display a cristalli liquidi
➊ Riga di stato: Direzione / Stato operativo / Stato inverter / Modalità automatica/manuale ➋ Frequenza uscita o Frequenza di riferimento
➌ Schermatadi di Programmazione, Menú o Display utente
Display a spie LED
➍ Indicatori di stato: Indicatore marcia avanti, Indicatore modalità manuale e Indicatore marcia inversa
➎ Frequenza uscita, Frequenza di riferimento o Schermata di programmazione Tasti
Uscire dal menu, annullare o cambiare il valore di parametro o riconoscere il guasto/allarme.

Selezionare una cifra, selezionare un bit o passare alla modalità di modifica in una schermata dei parametri.

Scorrere attraverso le opzioni, aumentare un valore o passare ad un bit.

Scorrere attraverso le opzioni, diminuire un valore o passare ad un bit.

Passare ad un menu, passare alla modalità di modifica in una schermata dei parametri o salvare una modifica apportata ad un valore di parametro.

Accedere alla funzione associata ad un tasto di programmazione o numerico. Accede al display di grandi dimens. Per ulteriori informazioni, consultare il manuale dell’utente dell’inverter.

Avviare l’inverter.

Arrestare l’inverter o azzerare il guasto.

Aumentare la velocità.

Diminuire la velocità.

Cambiare direzione.

Far avanzare l’inverter a impulsi.

Digitare i numeri di parametro ed i valori.

Esc Sel
Log Device
Auto/Man Remove
ALT
JOG
F
RM
In
Out
➍
➎
Esc Sel
S.M.A.R.T. View
Exp
Param #
Lang Auto/Man Remove
ALT
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
. 0 +/–
JOG
➊
➋
➌
F->
PGF:
| Arrestato | Auto|
Tempo accel 1

0.1 <> 3600.0
Sec10.0
Hz0.0
Par 140
Esc
Sel
ALT
OPPURE
OPPURE
Jog
0 9...
. +/-
--0
0 C
-0
@
• i)++---
-~
~
-+---
Display / Teclas
Display de LCD (Cristal Líquido)
➊ Linha de Status: Direção | Status de Operação | Status do Inversor | Modo Automático/Manual ➋ Freqüência de Saída ou Freqüência de Controle
➌ Tela de Programação, Menu, ou Display do Usuário
Display de LED (Fotodiodo)
➍ Indicadores de Status: Indicador frente, Indicador de Modo Manual, e Indicador Reverso ➎ Freqüência de Saída, Freqüência Controlada, ou Telas de Programação Teclas
Sair de um menu, cancelar uma mudança de parâmetro, ou reconhecer uma falha/alarme.

Selecionar um dígito, selecionar um bit, ou introduzir o modo de edição em uma tela de parâmetros.

Movimentar-se pelas opções, aumentar um valor, ou alternar um bit.

Movimentar-se pelas opções, diminuir um valor, ou alternar um bit.

Introduzir um menu, editar modo em uma tela de parâmetros, ou salvar uma alteração para um valor de parâmetro.

Acessar a função associada com a tecla numérica ou de programação. Fornece acesso ao display de formato grande. Consulte o manual do usuário do inversor para mais informações.

Inicializar o inversor.

Parar o inversor ou remover uma falha.

Aumentar a velocidade.

Diminuir a velocidade.

Mudar o sentido.

Para fazer o jog do inversor.

Digite os valores e números de parâmetros.

Esc Sel
Log Device
Auto/Man Remove
ALT
JOG
F
RM
In
Out
➍
➎
Esc Sel
S.M.A.R.T. View
Exp
Param #
Lang Auto/Man Remove
ALT
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
. 0 +/–
JOG
➊
➋
➌
F->
PGA:
| Parado | Auto|
Tempo Acelerac 1

0.1 <> 3600.0
Segs10.0
Hz0.0
Par 140
Esc
Sel
ALT
OU
OU
Jog
0 9...
. +/-
Pantalla / Teclas
Pantalla LCD
➊ Línea de estado: Dirección | Estado de operación | Estado del variador | Modo automático/ manual
➋ Frecuencia de salida o Frecuencia de comando
➌ Pantalla de programación, Menú, o Pantalla del usuario Indicadores LED
➍ Indicadores de estado: Indicador de avance, Indicador de modo manual e Indicador de retroceso ➎ Frecuencia de salida, Frecuencia de comando o Pantalla de programación Teclas
Salir de un menú, cancelar un cambio hecho a un valor de parámetro o confirmar un fallo/ alarma.

Seleccionar un dígito, seleccionar un bit o entrar al modo de edición en una pantalla de parámetros.

Desplazarse por las opciones, aumentar un valor o alternar un bit.

Desplazarse por las opciones, disminuir un valor o alternar un bit.

Entrar a un menú, entrar al modo de edición en una pantalla de parámetros o guardar un cambio hecho a un valor de parámetro.

Acceder a la función asociada con una tecla de programación o numérica. Permite acceder a la pantalla de formato grande. Para obtener más información, consulte el manual del usuario del variador.

Arrancar el variador.

Parar el variador o borrar un fallo.

Aumentar la velocidad.

Disminuir la velocidad.

Cambiar de dirección.

Hacer funcionar el variador por impulsos.

Escribir números y valores de parámetros.

Esc Sel
Log Device
Auto/Man Remove
ALT
JOG
F
RM
In
Out
➍
➎
Esc Sel
S.M.A.R.T. View
Exp
Param #
Lang Auto/Man Remove
ALT
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
. 0 +/–
JOG
➊
➋
➌
F->
FGP:
| Parado | Auto|
Tiempo acel. 1

0.1 <> 3600.0
Segs10.0
Hz0.0
Par 140
Esc
Sel
ALT
O BIEN
O BIEN
Jog
0 9...
. +/-
--0
0 CD
-
Display / Toetsen
LCD-display
➊ Statusregel: Richting | Bedrijfsstatus | Drivestatus | Mode automatisch/handbediening ➋ Uitgangsfrequentie of opdrachtfrequentie
➌ Programmeerscherm, menu of gebruikersdisplay
LED-display
➍ Statusverklikkers: Verklikker Voorwaarts, Verklikker Handbedieningsmode en Reserveverklikker
➎ Uitgangsfrequentie, opdrachtsfrequentie of programmeerscherm Toetsen
Een menu verlaten, een wijziging van een parameterwaarde annuleren of een fout/alarm bevestigen.

Een digit kiezen, een bit kiezen of naar de bewerkingsmodus in een parameterscherm gaan.

Door opties scrollen, een waarde verhogen of een bit in- of uitschakelen.

Door opties scrollen, een waarde verlagen of een bit in- of uitschakelen.

Naar een menu gaan, naar de bewerkingsmodus in een parameterscherm gaan of een wijziging in een parameterwaarde opslaan.

Toegang verkrijgen tot de functie die bij een programmeer- of numerieke toets hoort. Geeft toegang tot groot formaat display. Voor meer informatie de gebruikershandleiding van de drive raadplegen.

De drive starten.

De drive stoppen of een fout corrigeren.

De snelheid verhogen.

De snelheid verlagen.

De richting veranderen.

De drive joggen.

De parameternummers en –waarden typen.

Esc Sel
Log Device
Auto/Man Remove
ALT
JOG
F
RM
In
Out
➍
➎
Esc Sel
S.M.A.R.T. View
Exp
Param #
Lang Auto/Man Remove
ALT
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
. 0 +/–
JOG
➊
➋
➌
V->
FGP:
|Gestopt | Auto|
Accel.tijd 1

0.1 <> 3600.0
Sec10.0
Hz0.0
Par 140
Esc
Sel
ALT
OF
OF
Jog
0 9...
. +/-
Publication 20HIM-QR001D-MU-P – May 2003
Supersedes 20HIM-QR001C-MU-P - July 2001 Copyright © 2003 Rockwell Automation. All rights reserved. Printed in USA.

P/N 309318-P02
~
) ) •) •) - :)
- )
' ) ~)
)
VJ
~ M
)
I
I
--0
0 C
-0
@
-~ -~
~
---a••
Overload Relays
User Manual
E3 & E3 Plus Solid-State Overload Relay
Catalog Numbers 193/592-EC1, -EC2, -EC3, -EC5
G Allen-Bradley
Rockwell
Ci) Allen-Bradley • Rockwell Software Automation
Important User Information
Solid-state equipment has operational characteristics differing from those of electromechanical equipment. Safety Guidelines for the Application, Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls (publication SGI-1.1 available from your local Rockwell Automation sales office or online at http://www.rockwellautomation.com/literature/) describes some important differences between solid-state equipment and hard-wired electromechanical devices. Because of this difference, and also because of the wide variety of uses for solid-state equipment, all persons responsible for applying this equipment must satisfy themselves that each intended application of this equipment is acceptable.

In no event will Rockwell Automation, Inc. be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use or application of this equipment.

The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes. Because of the many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation, Rockwell Automation, Inc. cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams.

No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation, Inc. with respect to use of information, circuits, equipment, or software described in this manual.

Reproduction of the contents of this manual, in whole or in part, without written permission of Rockwell Automation, Inc., is prohibited.

Throughout this manual, when necessary, we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations.

Allen-Bradley, Rockwell Software, Rockwell Automation, and T echConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation, Inc.

T rademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies.

WARNING: Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous environment, which may lead to personal injury or death, property damage, or economic loss.

ATTENTION: Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death, property damage, or economic loss. Attentions help you identify a hazard, avoid a hazard, and recognize the consequence
SHOCK HAZARD: Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a drive or motor, to alert people that dangerous voltage may be present.

BURN HAZARD: Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a drive or motor, to alert people that surfaces may reach dangerous temperatures.

IMPORTANT Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product. w w w w
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 3 Table of Contents
Manual Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Who Should Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Vocabulary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Reference Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Product Overview Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Catalog Number Explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Single-/Three-Phase Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Protection & Warning Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Parameter Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Current-Based Operational Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Diagnostic Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Voltage Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Power Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Overload Relay Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Trip Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Inputs & Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 DeviceNet Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Flash Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Installation & Wiring Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Receiving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Unpacking/Inspecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Starter Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Approximate Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Separate Panel Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Approximate Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Voltage Input Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Power Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Three-Pole Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Terminal Lug Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Control, DeviceNet, & Voltage Input Module Terminals . . . . . . . . 27 Terminal Designations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Control Terminals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 DeviceNet Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Grounding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Short-Circuit Ratings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Short-Circuit Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 High-Fault Short-Circuit Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Fuse Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 4 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 Typical Motor Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Three-Phase Direct On-Line (DOL) & Single-Phase Full Voltage 34 External Line Current Transformer Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Installation Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 External Potential Transformer (PT) Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Core Balanced Ground Fault Sensor Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Typical Control Circuit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 External/Remote Reset (FRN 3.001 & Later) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Protective Trip & Warning
Functions
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Trip Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Warning Enable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Overload Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Overload Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 FLA Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 CT Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Trip Class. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Trip Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Auto/Manual Reset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Overload Warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Overload Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Non-Volatile Thermal Memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Phase Loss Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Phase Loss Trip. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Ground Fault Protection (E3 Plus) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Ground Fault Setting Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Ground Fault Trip. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Ground Fault Trip Inhibit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Ground Fault Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Ground Fault Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Stall Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Stall Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Jam Protection (High Overload). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Jam Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Jam Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Underload Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Underload Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Underload Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 PTC Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 PTC Warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Current Imbalance Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Current Imbalance Trip. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Current Imbalance Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Communication Fault Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 5

Comm Fault Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Comm Fault Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Communication Idle Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Comm Idle Trip. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Comm Idle Warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Remote Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Voltage Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Under Voltage (UV) Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Under Voltage (UV) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Over Voltage (OV) Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Over Voltage (OV) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Voltage Unbalance Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Voltage Unbalance Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Voltage Unbalance Warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Voltage Rotation Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Voltage Rotation Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Voltage Rotation Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Frequency Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Under Frequency (UF) Trip. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Under Frequency Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Over Frequency (OF) Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Over Frequency (OF) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Voltage Input Module Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Voltage Hardware Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Voltage Hardware Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Real Power (kW) Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Under Real Power Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Under Real Power Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Over Real Power Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Over Real Power Warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Reactive Power (kVAR) Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Under Reactive Power Consumed Trip. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Under Reactive Power Consumed Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Over Reactive Power Consumed Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Over Reactive Power Consumed Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Under Reactive Power Generated Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Under Reactive Power Generated Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Over Reactive Power Generated Trip
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Over Reactive Power Generated Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Apparent Power (kVA) Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Under Apparent Power Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Under Apparent Power Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Over Apparent Power Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Over Apparent Power Warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Power Factor Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Under Power Factor Lagging Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 6 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 Under Power Factor Lagging Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Over Power Factor Lagging Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Over Power Factor Lagging Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Under Power Factor Leading Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Under Power Factor Leading Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Over Power Factor Leading Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Over Power Factor Leading Warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Protective Trip & Warning Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Preventive Maintenance Diagnostics (E3 Overload Relays Series C & Later) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Start Inhibit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Start Inhibit Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Preventive Maintenance Flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Queue Clearing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 DeviceNet™ Node
Commissioning
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Setting the Hardware Switches (Series B & Later) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Using RSNetWorx for DeviceNet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Commissioning the Protection Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Programmable Parameters Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Program Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Reset to Default Factory Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Parameter Group Listing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Overload Setup Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Advanced Setup Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Reset/Lock Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 DeviceNet Setup Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Output Setup Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 DeviceLogix Group — E3 Plus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Monitoring Parameters Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Phase Current Reporting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Current Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Reporting Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Ground Fault Current Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Current Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Frequency Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Diagnostic Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Monitor Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Voltage Parameters Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Phase Voltage Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 7

Voltage Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Voltage Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Voltage Monitor Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Voltage Setup Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Power Parameters Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Phase Power Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Power Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Power Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Power Monitor Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Power Setup Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Trip History and Snapshot Trip and Warning History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 TripWarn History Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Trip Snapshot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Trip Snapshot Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Logic Controller
Communication Examples
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 I/O Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Explicit Messaging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Reading Device Status using the Parameter Object Class (0x0F) . 195 Reading Device Status using the Control Supervisor Object Class (0x29) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Reading the Trip Class using the Overload Object Class (0x2C) . 199 Reading a Group of Parameters using the E3 Status Object Class (0x0375). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Using DeviceLogix™ Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 DeviceLogix Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 DeviceLogix Programming Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Troubleshooting Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Advisory LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Trip/Warn LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Network Status LED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 OUT A & OUT B LEDs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 IN 1,2,3 & 4 LEDs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Power-Up Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 DeviceNet Modes of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Power-Up Reset Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Run Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Recoverable Error Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Unrecoverable Error Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Resetting a Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Trip/Warn LED Troubleshooting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 8 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 DeviceNet Troubleshooting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Loss of Node Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Input and Output Troubleshooting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Specifications Electrical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Environmental Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Electromagnetic Compatibility Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Functionality Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 DeviceNet™ Information Electronic Data Sheets (EDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Product Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 DeviceNet Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Identity Object – Class Code 0x01. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Message Router – Class Code 0x02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 DeviceNet Object – Class Code 0x03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 Assembly Object – Class Code 0x04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Output Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Input Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Connection Object – Class Code 0x05. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Discrete Input Point Object – Class Code 0x08. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 Discrete Output Point Object – Class Code 0x09 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 Parameter Object – Class Code 0x0F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Parameter Group Object – Class Code 0x10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Discrete Output Group Object - CLASS CODE 0x001E . . . . . . . . . 246 Control Supervisor Object – Class Code 0x29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Control Supervisor ODVA Fault and Warning Codes . . . . . . . . . . 250 Acknowledge Handler Object – 0x2B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Overload Object – Class Code 0x2C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 DPI Fault Object - CLASS CODE 0x0097 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 DPI Warning Object - CLASS CODE 0x0098 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 DeviceNet Interface Object – Class Code 0xB4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 MCC Object - CLASS CODE 0x00C2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Logic Supervisor Object - CLASS CODE 0x030E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 E3 Status Object - CLASS CODE 0x0375 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 CE Compliance EC Directive Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 EMC Directive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Low Voltage Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Two-Speed Applications Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 External Control Applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 Output Control Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 Accessories Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 9 Preface
Manual Objectives The purpose of this manual is to provide you with the necessary information to apply the E3 Overload Relay with DeviceNet communications. Described in this manual are methods for installing, configuring, and troubleshooting.

Who Should Use This
Manual
This manual is intended for qualified personnel responsible for setting up and servicing these devices. Y ou must have previous experience with and a basic understanding of communications technology, configuration procedures, required equipment, and safety precautions.

T o make efficient use of the E3 Overload Relay, you must be able to program and operate devices with communications and have a basic understanding of the E3 Overload Relay’s parameter settings and functions. Y ou should also understand DeviceNet network operations, including how slave devices operate on the network and communicate with a DeviceNet master.

Vocabulary In this manual, we refer to the:
E3 Overload Relay as it applies to both the E3 and E3 Plus Overload Relays.
E3 Plus Overload Relay when features and/or functions apply specifically to it.

Conventions Parameter names are shown in italic typeface.

E3 refers to the overload relays E3 and E3 Plus. “E3” is the standard version. “E3 Plus” is the enhanced version.

Reference Manuals For SLC 500 and 1747-SDN information:
DeviceNet Scanner Module Installation Instructions Publication 1747-IN058E-EN-P
DeviceNet Scanner Module User Manual Publication
1747-UM655B-EN-P
For PLC5 and 1771-SDN information:
DeviceNet Scanner Module Installation Instructions Publication 1771-5.14 DeviceNet Scanner Module Configuration Manual Publication 1771-6.5.118
For MicroLogix/CompactLogic and 1769-ADN information:

IMPORTANT Read this manual in its entirety before installing, operating, servicing, or initializing the E3 Overload Relay.
10 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 Preface
DeviceNet Module Installation Instructions Publication 1769-IN001B-EN-P
DeviceNet Module User Manual Publication 1769-UM001B-EN-P For ControlLogic and 1756-DNB information:
DeviceNet Module Installation Instructions Publication 1756-IN566C-EN-P
DeviceNet Module User Manual Publication DNET-UM004A-EN-P T o install and implement a DeviceNet network:
DeviceNet Media Design and Installation Guide Publication DNET-UM072_-EN-P
IMPORTANT Read the DeviceNet Media Design and Installation Guide, Publication DNET-UM072_-EN-P, in its entirety before
planning and installing a DeviceNet system. If the network is not installed according to this document, unexpected
operation and intermittent failures can occur.

If this manual is not available, please contact either the local Rockwell Automation Distributor or Sales Office and request a copy. Electronic copies may also be obtained via the
Internet or from the Allen-Bradley Home Page at
“www.ab.com. ” .

Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 11 Chapter 1
Product Overview
Introduction This chapter provides a brief overview of the features and functionality of the E3 Overload Relay.

Description The E3 Overload Relay is a multi-function solid-state microprocessor-based electronic overload relay for the protection of squirrel-cage induction motors rated from 0.4…5,000 A. Four versions are available: the E3 model, EC1, and E3Plus models EC2, EC3, and EC5.

Figure 1 - Front Panel Display (E3 Plus Overload Relay shown) E3 PLUS
S1
S2
13 14 23 24 95 96 IT1 IT2
1 2 3 4 5 6

NETWORK
STATUS
OUT A
IN 1
IN 2
OUT B
IN 3
IN 4 MSD
LSD
TRIP
WARN
TEST/
RESET
DS / N
FRN 4.XXX
1AOXXXXX XXX
SER
Test/Reset Button
Voltage Input Module
Connection
(193/592 EC5 only)
Ground Fault
Sensor Input
Output & PTC
Terminals
NOTE: On model EC5
devices, terminals IT1 and
IT2 are marked 7 and
8, respectively.

LED Status
Indicators
Node Address Switches
(series B and later)
DeviceNet Port
Input
Terminals
~ Allen-Bradley
- ,,,.,,,.
'I'-. □ □ 0/
□ □
□ □ @/
/1
□ □
I
@/
~
7/
~7 C
~ ........
...... ...... ,
✓ ®®®@®@®@ :-..
'r-... (§)@(§)@(§)@(§) ,, ' @
12 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 Chapter 1 Product Overview
Catalog Number
Explanation
The solid-state overload relay purchased has its own catalog number. The catalog number is explained below.

Single-/Three-Phase
Operation
The overload relay is factory programmed for three-phase operation. The installer can easily be changed to single-phase operation by accessing and changing Single/Three Phase, Parameter 27. Refer to page 34 for typical motor connections.

Protection & Warning
Functions
The E3 Overload Relay provides the following protection and warning functions:

Refer to Chapter 3 on page 45 for further explanation of these protection and warning functions.
193 - EC1 B B
592
Bulletin
Number
Type
EC1 E3
EC2 E3 Plus ➊
EC3 E3 Plus ➋
EC5 E3 Plus ➋
Current Rating
(Amps)
P0 . 4 … 2 . 0
A1 … 5
B 3…15
C 5…25
D 9…45
E1 8 … 9 0
F2 8 … 1 4 0
G4 2 … 2 1 0
H6 0 … 3 0 2
J8 4 … 4 2 0
K 125…630
L 172…860
Bulletin 500
Contactor Size
T Size 00
C Size 0…2
D Size 3
E Size 4
F Size 5
G Size 6
Bulletin 100 Contactor
Size
B C09…C23
D C30…C43
E C60…C85
F D95…D180
G D210…D420
H D630…D860
ZP a n e l M o u n t , C T f e d
➊ (0.4…90 A) Provides 1…5 A internal core-balanced ground fault protection ➋ (0.4.…5000 A) Provides 20 mA…5 A external core balanced ground fault protection. External ground fault sensor required (Cat. nos. 193-CBCT-1…4).

Function Model
• Overload
• Phase loss (trip only)
• Stall (trip only)
• Jam
• Underload
• Current imbalance
• Number of starts (warning only)
• Operating hours (warning only)
All Models
• Voltage
• Power
• Frequency
EC5 Only
• Ground fault EC2, EC3, & EC5 Only
• Thermistor (PTC) input EC2 and EC3 Only
_J
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 13 Product Overview Chapter 1
Parameter Monitoring The E3 Overload Relay allows the user to monitor information on various parameters over the DeviceNet™ network.

Current-Based Operational Data
Refer to Chapter 6 for further information.

Diagnostic Parameters
Refer to Chapter 6 for further information.

Voltage Parameters
Refer to Chapter 7 for further information.

Power Parameters
Refer to Chapter 8 for further information.

Current-Based Operational Data Unit of Measure
Individual phase currents Amperes
Average current Amperes
Average current % of motor FLC
Percentage of thermal capacity utilized %
Current imbalance percentage %
Ground fault current (EC2, EC3, and EC5 only) Amperes
• Device Status
• Trip Status
• Warning Status
• Time to an overload trip (in seconds)
• Time to reset after an overload trip (in
seconds)
• History of the past five trips and warnings
• Diagnostic data at the time of a trip
• Voltage range
• Phase rotation
• Voltage warning status
• Voltage unbalance
• Voltage frequency
• Power range
• Reactive power
• Apparent power
• Power factor
• Power consumed
14 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 Chapter 1 Product Overview
Overload Relay Features Trip Relay
When the E3 Overload Relay is in the unpowered state, the trip relay contact is open. The trip relay contact closes approximately 2 to 35 seconds after power is applied if no trip condition exists.

Inputs & Outputs
In addition to the trip relay, the E3 Overload Relay provides inputs and outputs as shown below.

Table 1 - Inputs & Outputs
The status of each input and output can be monitored over the DeviceNet network through Device Status, Parameter 21, or one of the input assemblies.

Additionally, the outputs can be controlled over the network using one of the output assemblies. Refer to Appendix B for listings of the available input and output assemblies.

Series B and later E3 Plus Overload Relays offer added flexibility by providing the capability to perform control functions with the inputs and outputs through DeviceLogix™.

Series B or later E3 Overload Relay inputs are independently configurable for trip reset, remote trip, two-speed, and normal operation.

Model Inputs ➊ Outputs
EC1 2 1
EC2, EC3 4 2
EC5 6 2
➊ Inputs are rated at 24V only. For 120V AC inputs, add the AC Input Interface Module, Cat. No. 193-EIMD.

ATTENTION: If the outputs are being commanded via an explicit message, ensure that there is no established I/O connection that is actively controlling the outputs and that the explicit message connection has a non-zero expected packet rate (EPR) setting.

ATTENTION: The state of the outputs during a protection fault, DeviceNet communication fault, or a DeviceNet communication idle may be dependent on the following OUT A or OUT B parameters: PrFltState, Pr FltValue, Dn FltState, Dn FltValue, Dn IdlState, and Dn IdlValue. For details, refer to the Output Setup Group section in Chapter 5. 'W
'W
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 15 Product Overview Chapter 1
User Interface
Refer to Figure 1 on page 11 for the location of LED status indication, T est/Reset button, and node address switches.

LED Status Indication
The following LED status indicators are provided on the E3 Overload Relay. See Chapter 12 for detailed information on each status.

Network Status — Illuminated in green or red, this indicates the network connection status.

Tr i p / Wa r n i n g — Under a warning condition, the LED status flashes a sequence of red and/or amber. Under the trip condition, the LED status flashes a sequence of red. In either condition, the flash pattern followed by a pause identifies the specific trip or warning. The meaning of the flash pattern can be found on the E3 Overload Relay’s side label or T able XX on page XX.

OUT A and OUT B — When the output contacts are commanded closed, the LED illuminates amber.

IN 1…IN 4 —When the user-connected device contact is closed, the LED status illuminates in amber.

Test/Reset ButtonT
Te s t — If T est Enable is activated, the trip relay contact will open if the E3 Overload Relay is in an untripped condition and the T est/Reset button is pressed. For devices with firmware revision number (FRN) 2.000 and later, the T est/Reset button must be pressed for a minimum of two seconds to activate the test function.

Reset — If the E3 Overload Relay (a) is in a tripped condition, (b) the cause of ATTENTION: The E3 Overload Relay’s output control firmware latches OUT A and OUT B closed upon receipt of a network close command. The outputs will maintain the commanded closed state until receipt of a network open command. Parameters OutX Pr FltState and OutX Pr FltValue, found in the E3 Overload Relay’s output setup group, allows flexibility concerning the operation of the outputs in the event of a trip.

Factory default settings cause the outputs to open upon occurrence of a trip. E3 outputs that were closed prior to a trip will reclose upon trip reset, provided that a network open command is not received first.

NOTE: IN 3, IN 4, and OUT B are available only on the E3 Plus Overload Relay. 16 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 Chapter 1 Product Overview
the trip is no longer present, and (c) the test/reset button is pressed, the trip relay contact will close.

Node Address Switches
The node address switches, located on the front of the Series B and later E3 Overload Relays, provide a physical means for setting the device node address value. Switch settings greater than 63 allow the node address to be software configured.

DeviceNet Compatibility
The E3 Overload Relay supports the following DeviceNet functionality:

Flash Memory
Series B and later E3 Overload Relays incorporate flash memory. This facilitates updating of the product firmware as new revisions are released.

ATTENTION: The Test function associated with the Test/Reset button is enabled by default. Activating the Test function while a motor is operating will cause the starting contactor to drop out and stop motor operation.

Functionality Models
• Polled I/O messaging
• Change-of-state/cyclic messaging
• Explicit messaging
• Group 4 off-line node recovery messaging
• Full parameter object support
• Auto-baud rate identification
• Configuration consistency value
All models
• UCMM (Unconnected Message Manager) Series B and later devices • DeviceLogix component technology E3 Plus, Series B and later devices IMPORTANT It is not possible to flash upgrade from Series B firmware to Series C firmware.
w
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 17 Chapter 2
Installation & Wiring
Introduction This chapter provides instructions for receiving, unpacking, inspecting, and storing the E3 Overload Relay. Installation and wiring instructions for common applications are also included.

Receiving It is the responsibility of the user to thoroughly inspect the equipment before accepting the shipment from the freight company. Check the item(s) received against the purchase order. If any items are damaged, it is the responsibility of the user not to accept delivery until the freight agent has noted the damage on the freight bill. Should any concealed damage be found during unpacking, it is again the responsibility of the user to notify the freight agent. The shipping container must be left intact and the freight agent should be requested to make a visual inspection of the equipment.

Unpacking/Inspecting Remove all packing material from around the E3 Overload Relay. After unpacking, check the item’s nameplate catalog number against the purchase order.

Storing The E3 Overload Relay should remain in its shipping container prior to installation. If the equipment is not to be used for a period of time, it must be stored according to the following instructions in order to maintain warranty coverage:
Store in a clean, dry location.
Store within an ambient temperature range of -40 °C…+85 °C (-40 °F…+185 °F).
Store within a relative humidity range of 0…95%, non-condensing. Do not store where the device could be exposed to a corrosive atmosphere. Do not store in a construction area.
18 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 Chapter 2 Installation & Wiring
General Precautions In addition to the specific precautions listed throughout this manual, the following general statements must be observed.

Starter Assembly The following figures and tables illustrate the starter assembly instructions and approximate dimensions.

Installation
The 100-C09…C43 Starter Assembly installation instructions for use with Catalog Numbers 193-EC_ _B and -EC_ _D are shown in Figure 2 .

ATTENTION: The E3 Overload Relay contains electrostatic discharge (ESD) sensitive parts and assemblies. Status control precautions are required when installing, testing, servicing, or repairing this assembly.

Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed. If you are not familiar with static control procedures, refer to Allen-Bradley publication 8000-sb001_-en-p, Guarding Against Electrostatic Damage”, or any other applicable ESD protection handbook.

ATTENTION: An incorrectly applied or installed E3 Overload Relay can result in damage to the components or reduction in product life. Wiring or application errors (e.g., incorrectly figuring the FLA setting, supplying incorrect or inadequate DeviceNet supply voltage, connecting an external supply voltage to the input or thermistor terminals, or operating.storing in excessive ambient temperatures) may result in malfunction of the E3 Overload Relay.

ATTENTION: Only personnel familiar with the E3 Overload Relay and associated machinery should plan to install, start up, and maintain the system. Failure to comply may result in personal injury or equipment damage.

ATTENTION: The purpose of this user manual is to serve as a guide for proper installation. The National Electrical Code (NEC) and any other governing regional or local code will overrule this information. Rockwell Automation cannot assume responsibility for the compliance or proper installation of the E3 Ov erload Relay or associated equipment. A hazard of personal injury and/or equipment damage exists if codes are ignored during installation.

ATTENTION: The earth ground terminal of the E3 Overload Relay s hall be connected to a solid earth ground via a low-impedance connection. w
w
w
w
w
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 19 Installation & Wiring Chapter 2
Figure 2 - 100-C09…C43 Starter Assembly Installation
The 100-C60…C85 Starter Assembly installation instructions for use with Catalog Numbers 193-EC_ _E are shown in Figure 3.

Figure 3 - 100-C60…C85 Starter Assembly Installation
The 100-D95…D860 Starter Assembly installation instructions for use with Catalog Numbers 193-EC_ _F, 193-EC_ _G, and -EC_ _H are shown below.

ATTENTION: The voltage ratings of the E3 Overload Relay’s output and trip relays must not be exceeded. If the voltage ratings are exceeded, an interposing relay must be used.

ATTENTION: Connect the internal metal shield to a solid earth ground via a low impedance connection.
3 1
2 2.5 N m
2 lb in
2 4 N·m
35 lb-in
1 20 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 Chapter 2 Installation & Wiring
Figure 4 - 100-D95…D860 Starter Assembly Installation
IMPORTANT Ground fault protection requires connection of an external core balance current transformer (CBCT).

IMPORTANT For identification of the proper CT ratio to be programmed, refer to the product nameplate.
2 1 4
Supplied
with
Contactor
1 11 N·m (100 lb-in)
22 N·m (195 lb-in)100-D95E / D110E / D115E
100-D115 / D140 / D180
100-D210 / D420
100-D95 / D110
43 N·m (380 lb-in)
100-D630 / D860 68 N·m (600 lb-in)
(M5) 3.4 N·m (30 lb-in)
(M6) 7.3 N·m (65 lb-in)193-EC _ _ G
193-EC _ _ H
193-EC _ _ F
(M12 Provided)
45 N·m (400 lb-in)
5 6
a
a b
Supplied
with Contactor
3 Accessory 193-EIMD shown.

Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 21 Installation & Wiring Chapter 2
Approximate Dimensions
Approximate dimensions are shown in millimeters (inches). Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes.

Figure 5 - Overload Relay 193-EC_ _ B, D, & E with Contactor 100-C* C
A
H
F1
D2 ØD
D1
E1
B1
B

11.4 (29/64)
Cat. No.

Height B
193-EIMD
Overload
Relay
Contactor
100-
Width
A without with B1
Depth
C E 1 F 1 D 1D 2H Ø
D
193-EC_ _B C09, C-12,
C16, C23
45 (1-25/32)
188.3
(7-13/32)
207.7
(8-11/64)
145.1
(5-23/32)
107
(4-7/32)

67.9 (2-43/64)

53.2 2-3/32)
60 (2-23/64)
35 (1-3/8)

85.1 (3-23/64)

4.2 (11/64)
193-EC_ _D C30, C37 104
(4-3/32)
C43 54
(2-1/8)

62.2 (2-7/16)
45 (1-25/32)
107
(4-7/32)
193-EC_ _E C60, C72,
C85
72 (2-53/64)
236.1
(9-19/64)
255.5
(10-1/16)
173.2
(6-13/16)
124.6
(4-29/32)

89.8 (3-17/32)

80.2 (3-9/64)
100
(3-15/16)
55 (2-11/64)
125.5
(4-15/16)

5.5 (7/32)
DODD □
22 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 Chapter 2 Installation & Wiring
Figure 6 - Overload Relay 193-E_ _F, G, & H with Contactor 100-D* D
C
L
A
G11.4
(0.45)
CL
H
K
J
ØM
E1
B1
B
F
Cat. No.

Height B
193-EIMD
Overload
Relay
Contactor
100-
Width
A without with B1
Depth
C D E 1 F GHJ KL Ø M
193-EC_ _F D95, D110 120
(4.72)
336.3
(13.24)
418
(16.46)
311.8
(12.27)
175.1
(6.89)
156
(6.14)
216.1
(8.51)

12.5 (0.49)
100
(3.94)
145
(5.71)
135
(5.31)

22.3 (0.88)
180.9
(7.12)

5.6 (0.22)
D140, D180 339.8
(13.38)
317.8
(12.51)
16 (0.63)
193-EC_ _G D210, D250,
D300, D420
155
(6.10)
385.8
(15.19)
487.4
(19.19)
360.8
(14.2)
198.9
(7.83)
180
(7.09)
255
(10.04)
21 (0.83)
130
(5.12)
180
(7.09)
140
(5.51)

23.5 (0.93)
204.7
(8.06)
193-EC_ _H D630, D860 255
(10.04)
552
(21.73)
915
(36.02)
508
(20.0)
291.7
(11.49)
270.7
(10.66)
373.9
(14.72)

52.5 (2.07)
226
(8.90)
230
(8.90)
108
(4.25)
109
(4.29)
297.5
(11.71)
13 (0.51)
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 23 Installation & Wiring Chapter 2
Figure 7 - Overload Relay 592-EC_ _ T, C, & D with NEMA Contactor CL
D
A
H
B
J
E
K
ØF
Size 3
D
A
E
H
B
ØF
Size 00
C
A
J
K
ØF
H E
B
L
D
C
Size 0...2

11.4 (29/64)

11.4 (29/64)
Cat. No.

Overload
Relay
Height B
193-EIMD
NEMA
Contactor
Size
Width
A without with
Depth
CDEØ F HJK L
592-EC_ _T 00 45
(1-25/32)
188.3
(7-13/32)
207.7
(8-11/64)
107
(4-7/32)
35 (1-3/8)
60 (2-23/64)

4.2 (11/64)

97.9 (3-27/32)
—— —
592-EC_ _C 0, 1 90.4
(3-9/16)
112.1
(4-13/32)

69.9 (2-3/4)
179.4
(7-1/16)

5.15 ((13.64)
159.4
(7-15/32)
163
(6-7/16)

47.5 (1-7/8)

27.5 (1-5/64)
21 0 0
(3-15/16)
80 (3-5/32)
219.3
(8-5/8)

5.54 (7/32)
186
(7-21/64)
189.5
(7-15/32)
592-EC_ _D 3 155.5
(6-1/8)
236.1
(9-19/64)
255
(10-1/16)
126.3
(4-31/32)
139.9
(5-33/64)
219.9
(8-43/64)

7.1 (9/32)
276.7
(10.9)
256.3
(10-3/32)

78.5 (3-3/32)

42.3 (1-21/32)
ITIIIIIIl
ITIIIIl
IIDDlll
~~~
24 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 Chapter 2 Installation & Wiring
Separate Panel Adapter Approximate Dimensions
Approximate dimensions are shown in millimeters (inches). Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes.

Figure 8 - 193-ECPM1 Panel Adapter for use with Cat. No. 193-EC_ _B Figure 9 - 193-ECPM2 Panel Adapter for use with Cat. No. 193-EC_ _D & Z 45 (1-25/32)
159.3
(6-17/64)

7.3 (9/32)
135
(5-5/16)

6.1 (1/4)
100.5
(3-31/32)
Ø 4.4
(11/64) 11.4
(29/64)
30 (1-3/16)
115
(4-17/32)

11.4 (29/64)
30 (1-3/16)
45 (1-25/32)

7.3 (9-32)
135
(5-5/16)
154.2
(6-5/64)
100.5
(3-31/32)

6.1 (1/4)
115
(4-17/32)
Ø 4.4
(11/64)

DDDDDDDD
DDDDDD

DDDDDDDD
DDDDDD
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 25 Installation & Wiring Chapter 2
Figure 10 - 193-ECPM3 Panel Adapter for use with Cat. No. 193-EC_ _E Figure 11 - Separate Panel Adapter for use with Cat. No. 193-EC_ _ F, G, & H 131.2
(5-11/64)

11.4 (29/64)
77 (3-1/32)
15 (19/32)150.5
(5-15/16)
155.1
(6-7/64) w/
193-EIMD
130
(5-1/8)

71.7 (2-53/64)
60 (2-23/64)

5.0 (13/64) Ø 5.5
(7/32)
K
0 2
46 8
0 2
46 8
M
N
PA
D
BC
E F E
LJ
G
I
H
Overload
C a t . N o . ABCD E F GHI J K L M NP
193-EC_ _ F 4.72
(120.0)

7.19 (182.6)

6.09 (154.6)

3.94 (100)

1.54 (39)

0.45 (11.4)

1.03 (26.3)

5.32 (135)

1.94 (49.4)

0.22 (5.6)

0.24 (6.0)

0.47 (12)

5.95 (151.2)

6.89 (175)

7.12 (180.9)
193-EC_ _ G 6.09
(154.7)

7.40 (188.1)

6.41 (162.8)

5.12 (130)

1.89 (48)

0.45 (11.4)

1.06 (26.8)

5.51 (140.0)

2.03 (51.5)

0.26 (6.5)

0.08 (2.0)

0.49 (12.5)

6.89 (175)

7.83 (198.9)

8.06 (204.7)
193-EC_ _H 10.0
(255.0)

10.28 (261.0)

8.54 (217.0)

8.90 (226)

2.76 (70)

0.45 (11.4)

3.97 (100.8)

4.24 (107.7)

1.37 (134.9)

0.53 (13.5)
—0 . 8 7
(22.0)

10.54 (267.8)

11.49 (291.7)

11.72 (297.5)
l
i
i ~ -+j ~ +i
! ! i i i
,---1._ ...;....______.
i i~
l-1
1_~1 I:::::;;;;;;;::
'=----L=-.L
I
i
------+I
mnmo
000000
26 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 Chapter 2 Installation & Wiring
Voltage Input Module The voltage input module, Cat. No. 193-NVEC5VIM, is an add-on accessory for use with the E3 Plus. Approximate dimensions are shown in millimeters (inches).

Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes.

Figure 12 - 193-NVEC5VIM Voltage Input Module
Specifications Power Terminals
Table 2 - Wire Size & Torque Specification
L1
L3
L2

0.886
(22.5)

2.972
(75.5)

2.782
(70.65)

0.457
(11.6)

3.216
(82.0)
Ø 0.177
(4.5) Cat. No.

Wire Type Conductor Torque
193-EC_ _B & D,
592-EC_ _T, C
193-EC_ _E,
592-EC_ _D
Stranded/Solid [AWG] Single #14…6 AWG
22 lb-in.
#12…1 AWG
35 lb-in.

Multiple #10…6 AWG
30 lb-in.
#6…2 AWG
35 lb-in.

Flexible-Stranded with Ferrule Metric Single 2.5…16 mm
2 2.5 Nm
4…35 mm2
4 Nm
Multiple 6…10 mm2

3.4 Nm
4…25 mm2
4 Nm
Coarse-Stranded/Solid Metric Single 2.5…25 mm2

2.5 Nm
4…50 mm2
4 Nm
Multiple 6…16 mm2

3.4 Nm
4…35 mm2
4 Nm
I[]
I[]
IOI
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 27 Installation & Wiring Chapter 2
Three-Pole Terminal Blocks
Table 3 - Three-Pole Terminal Blocks
Terminal Lug Kits
Table 4 - Terminal Lug Kits
Control, DeviceNet, & Voltage Input Module Terminals
Table 5 - Wire Size & Torque Specification
Cat. No. 100-DTB1890 (A) 6…1/0 AWG, 16…50 mm2
(B) 6 AWG…250 MCM, 16…120 mm2
90…110 lb.-in., 10…12 Nm
100-DTB420 (2) 4 AWG…600 MCM, 25…240 mm2
180…220 lb.-in., 20…25 Nm
Cat. No. 100-DL 110 Lug 6…2/0 AWG, 16…70 mm 2
90…110 lb.-in., 10…12 Nm
Terminal 13/32 in, 10 mm
150 lb.-in., 17 Nm
180 Lug 6 AWG…250 MCM, 16…120 mm 2
90…110 lb.-in., 10…12 Nm
Terminal 1/2 in., 13 mm
275 lb.-in., 16 Nm
420 Lug 2 AWG…350 MCM
375 lb.-in., 42 Nm
Terminal 11/16 in., 17 mm
140 lb.-in., 16 Nm
630 Lug 2/0 AWG…500 MCM, 70…240 mm 2
400 lb.-in., 45 N
Terminal 3/4 in, 19 mm
600 lb.-in., 68 Nm
860 Lug 2/0 AWG…500 MCM, 70…240 mm 2
400 lb.-in., 45 Nm
Terminal 3/4 in, 19 mm
600 lb.-in., 68 Nm
Wire Type Conductor Torque All Cat. No. Types
Stranded/Solid [AWG] Single 24...12 AWG
Multiple
(stranded only)

24...16 AWG
5 lb-in
28 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 Chapter 2 Installation & Wiring
Table 6 - Maximum Wire Length (PTC & input)
Table 7 - Ground Fault Sensor Terminals (S1 & S2)
Flexible-Stranded with Ferrule Metric Single 0.25…2.5 mm2 Multiple 0.5...0.75 mm2

0.55 Nm
Coarse-Stranded/Solid Metric Single 0.2...2.5 mm2
Multiple 0.2...1.5 mm2

0.55 Nm
Minimum Cross Section mm 2 0.5 0.75 1.5 2.5 4.0
AWG 20 18 16 14 12
Maximum Length ➊ meters 160 250 400 600 1000
feet 525 825 1300 1950 3200
➊ The use of shielded cable is recommended for the PTC thermistor circuit to assist in obtaining compliance with Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) requirements.

Shielded cable is recommended for the input circuits, where wire lengths exceed 200 meters (656 feet).

NOTE: For reliable input signal processing, input wiring should be routed in raceways separate from power cabling.

Wire Type Shielded, Twisted Pair
Cross Section 0.2…4.0 mm2 (#24…12 AWG)
Torque 0.55 N·m (5 lb.-in.)
Wire Type Conductor Torque All Cat. No. Types
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 29 Installation & Wiring Chapter 2
Terminal Designations Control Terminals
Table 8 - Control Terminal Designation
DeviceNet Terminals
Table 9 - DeviceNet Terminal Designation
Grounding The following grounding recommendations are provided to ensure EMC requirements during installation.

Terminal Reference Description
1I N 1
General Purpose Sinking Input Number:
1 2I N 2 2
3I N 3 3 ➊➋
4I N 4 4 ➊➋
5V + + 2 4 V
6V +
7I N 5
General Purpose Sinking Input Number:
5 ➋
8I N 6 6 ➋
END Earth Ground ➌
13/14 OUT A Output A
23/24 OUT B Output B
➊➋
95/96 Trip Relay Trip Relay
IT1/IT2 PTC Thermistor (PTC) Input ➊➍
S1/S2 — External Ground Fault Sensor Input ➋➎
➊ Features are available only with the E3 Plus Overload Relay (Cat. No. 193/592-EC2 and 193/592-EC3).
➋ Available only on Cat. Nos. 193/592-EC5_ _.
➌ An earth ground connection to this terminal will assist in obtaining compliance with EMC requirements.
➍ The use of shielded cable is recommended for the positive PTC thermistor circuit to assist in obtaining compliance with EMC requirements.
➎ Available only on Cat. No. 193/592-EC3_ _ and 193/592-EC4_ _.

Terminal Signal Function Color
1 V- Common Black
2 CAN_L Signal Low Blue
3 Drain Shield No n-Insulated
4 CAN_H Signal High White
5 V+ Po9wer Supply Red
@
30 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 Chapter 2 Installation & Wiring
The earth ground terminal of the E3 Overload Relay shall be connected to a solid earth ground via a low-impedance connection.
Installations employing an external ground fault sensor shall ground the cable shield at the sensor with no connection made at the E3 Plus Overload Relay.
The PTC thermistor cable shield shall be grounded at the E3 Plus Overload Relay with no connection made at the opposite end.

Short-Circuit Ratings The E3 Overload Relay is suitable for use on circuits capable of delivering not more than the RMS symmetrical amperes listed in the following tables.

Short-Circuit Ratings
Table 10 - UL
Table 11 - IEC
Cat. No. Maximum
193-EC_ _ 592-EC_ _ Available F ault Current [A] Voltage [V] B T 5,000 600
DC
ED1 0 , 0 0 0
F
G 18,000
H 42,000
Z 5,000
Cat. No. Prospective
Current Ir [A]
Conditional Short-Circuit
Current I
q [A]193-EC_ _ 592-EC_ _ Maximum Voltage [V]
B T 1,000 100,000 690
D C 3,000
E D 5,000
I
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 31 Installation & Wiring Chapter 2
High-Fault Short-Circuit Ratings
Table 12 - Per UL 508 & CSA 22.2, No. 14 with Bulletin 100-C & 100-D Contactors Cat. No.
193-EC1, -EC2, -EC3,
-EC4, -EC5
Maximum
Contactor
100-
Starter
FLC [A]
Available Fault
Current [A] Voltage [V]
Class J or
CC Fuse [A]
_B C09 9 100,000 600 20
C12 12 20
C16 16 30
C23 23 30
_D C30 30 100,000 600 50
C37 37 50
C43 43 70
_E C60 60 100,000 600 80
C72 72 100
C85 85 150
FF, ZZ D95 95 100,000 600 200
D110 110 200
D140 140 250
GF, ZZ D180 180 100,000 600 300
GG, ZZ D210 210 100,000 600 400
D250 250 400
D300 300 500
HG, ZZ D210 210 100,000 600 400
D250 250 400
D300 300 500
JG, ZZ D300 300 100,000 600 500
D420 420 600
32 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 Chapter 2 Installation & Wiring
Table 13 - Per UL 508 & CSA 22.2, No. 14 with NEMA Contactors Fuse Coordination The following tables list T ype I and T ype II Fuse Coordination when used in conjunction with Bulletin 100-C and 100-D Contactors.

Cat. No.
592-EC1, -EC2,
-EC3, -EC5
Contactor
Size
Maximum
Circuit Breaker/
Limiter
Available Fault
Current [A]
Voltage
[V]
UL Fuse [A]
RJ
_T 00 100,000 600 — 20 —
_C 0 100,000 240 30 30 FDB 3025/
LFB3070R
480 30 30 FDB 3025/
LFB3070R
600 30 30 —
1 100,000 240 60 100 FDB 3050/
LFB3035R
480 30 50 FDB 3050/
LFB3035R
600 30 50 —
2 100,000 240 100 200 FDB 3100/
LFB3150R
480 60 100 —
600 60 100 —
_D 3 100,000 240 200 350 FDB 3150/
LFB3150R
480 100 200 FDB 3125/
LFB3150R
600 100 200 FDB 3100/
LFB3150R
ATTENTION: Select the motor branch circuit protection that complies with the NEC and any other governing regional or local codes. 'W
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 33 Installation & Wiring Chapter 2
Table 14 - IEC per EN60947-4-1
Table 15 - NEMA Contactors
Cat. No. 193-
EC1, EC2,
EC3, EC4, EC5
Contactor
100-
Max.

Starter
FLC [A]
Short-Circuit Current Max.

Voltage
[V]
Class J Fuse [A]
Prospective
I
r [A]
Conditional
I
q [A]
with
Type I
with
Type II
_B C09 9 1,000 100,000 600 20 15
C12 12 20 20
C16 16 30 30
C23 23 40 40
_D C30 30 3,000 100,000 600 50 50
C37 37 50 50
C43 43 70 70
_E C60 60 3,000 100,000 600 80 80
C72 72 100 100
C85 85 5,000 150 150
FF, ZZ D95 95 10,000 100,000 600 200 200
D110 110 200 200
D140 140 250 250
GF, ZZ D180 180 10,000 100,000 600 300 300
GG, ZZ D210 210 10,000 100,000 600 400 400
D250 250 400 400
D300 300 500 500
HG, ZZ D210 210 10,000 100,000 600 400 400
D250 250 400 400
D300 300 500 500
JG, ZZ D300 300 10,000 100,000 600 500 500
D420 420 600 600
Cat. No.
592-EC
Contactor
Size
Max.

Starter
FLC [A]
Short-Circuit Current Max.

Voltage
[V]
Class J Fuse [A]
Prospective
I
r [A]
Conditional
I
q [A]
with
Type I
with
Type II
_T 00 9 1,000 100,000 600 20 20
_C 0, 1 18, 27 3,000 30 30
24 5 6 0 6 0
_D 3 90 5,000 200 200
34 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 Chapter 2 Installation & Wiring
Typical Motor Connections Three-Phase Direct On-Line (DOL) & Single-Phase Full Voltage The following wiring diagram illustrates the E3 Overload Relay typical motor connections in a three-phase DOL and Single-Phase Full V oltage applications.

Figure 13 - Wiring Diagram, Three-Phase DOL & Single-Phase Full Voltage External Line Current
Transformer Application
193-EC_ZZ E3 and E3 Plus Overload Relays are designed for use with separately mounted, customer-supplied, line current transformers (CT s) as required in higher-current applications. The FLA setting range is 9…5000 A for these units with a legal setting range per current transformer. CT Ratio, Parameter 78, is provided for setting the current transformer ratio to be installed.

Specifications
The 193-EC_ZZ Overload Relays are intended for use with CT s having a secondary current rating of 5 A. The installer shall (1) provide one CT for each motor phase and shall (2) connect the CT’s secondary leads to the appropriate E3 ATTENTION: When working on energized circuits, DO NOT rely on voltage and current information provided by the E3 and E3 Plus Overload Relay for personal safety. Always use a portable voltage or current measurement device to measure the signal locally.

IMPORTANT Single/Three Ph, Parameter 27, should be set to single-phase.

IMPORTANT Traditional single-phase wiring connecting T2 to L3 will result in a vector imbalance of current flowing through the E3 Plus Overload Relay. This will result in inaccurate ground fault reporting and protection.

L1
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3
M
T1
Three-Phase Direct-On-Line Single-Phase Full-Voltage
T2
L2
E3/E3 Plus L1 L2
Voltage Input Module
(For 193/592-EC5 only)
E3/E3Plus
L1
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3
M
T1 T2 T3
S.C.P.D.

L2 L3
L1 L2 L3
Voltage Input Module
(For 193/592-EC5 only)
S.C.P.D.
w
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 35 Installation & Wiring Chapter 2
Overload Relay power terminals as shown in Figure 14 on page 36. The CT s shall have an appropriate ratio rating as detailed in T able 18.

Additionally, the CT shall be selected to be capable of providing the required V A to the secondary load, which includes the E3 Overload Relay burden of 0.1 VA at the rated secondary current and the wiring burden.

Finally, the CT shall (1) be rated for Protective Relaying to accommodate the high inrush currents associated with motor startup and shall (2) have an accuracy of ≤±2% over its normal operating range. T ypical CT ratings include:

Installation Requirements
The 193-EC_ZZ Overload Relays are designed to be installed in193- ECPM2 Panel Mount Adapters and connected to separately mounted current transformers.
For 193-ECPM2 Panel Mount Adapter assembly, refer to the instructions included with the panel mount adapter.
The E3 Overload Relay must be mounted a distance equal to or greater than six times the cable diameter (including insulation) from the nearest current-carrying conductor or current transformer.
For applications employing multiple conductors per phase, the diameter of each cable should be added and multiplied by six to determine the proper placement distance for the E3 Overload Relay.
• ANSI USA
• CSA (Canada)
• IEC (Europe)
• Class C5 BO.1
• Class 10L5
• 5 VA Class SP10
ATTENTION: The improper selection of a current transformer can result in the E3 Overload Relay reporting inaccurate motor operational data and possible motor damage. The selected current transformer must be rated for protective relaying applications.

ATTENTION: Placing the E3 Overload Relay closer than the recommended distance, six times the cable diameter (including insulation), may compromise its current reporting and protection capabilities.
w
w
36 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 Chapter 2 Installation & Wiring
Figure 14 - Overload Relay Mounting Placement
Figure 15 - External CT Connection Diagrams
External Potential Transformer (PT) Connection
The 193/592-EC5_ _ E3 Plus Overload Relay can be used with external step- down PT s. The PT ratio is programmed into the E3 Plus Overload Relay by entering the primary winding rating into PT Pri, Parameter 289, and the secondary winding rating into PT Sec, Parameter 290. The voltage mode is also programmed into the E3 Plus Overload Relay by selecting the appropriate mode in V olt Mode, Parameter 156. The E3 Overload Relay Plus will support Wye, Delta, and Open Delta voltage modes with potential transformers.

Primary
Current
Transformers
E3 Overload
Relay
6x
6x
or
NEMA
L1 L2 L3
L1/1 L2/3 L3/5
T1/2 T2/4 T3/6
E3
M
T1T2 T3
IEC
L1 L2 L3
K1
L1/1 L2/3 L3/5
T1/2 T2/4 T3/6
E3
M
Primary
Current
Transformers
Primary
Current
Transformers
- ---+
I I I 111
B B 0
D D
D D
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 37 Installation & Wiring Chapter 2
Table 16 - Wiring Diagrams, External PT Connection
Core Balanced Ground Fault Sensor Application
The 193-EC3_ _ E3 Plus Overload Relays are intended to provide ground fault protection when used with the external 193-CBCT_ Core Balanced Ground Fault Sensor. The ground fault sensor mounts separately from the E3 Plus Overload Relay and must be placed within three meters of the E3 Plus Overload Relay. The customer-supplied power cable for wiring the ground fault sensor to the E3 Plus Overload Relay must meet the specifications outlined in Ta b l e 7 o n page 28.

Power Cable Installation Requirements
All power cables (including the neutral when used) must pass through the sensor window. The equipment ground conductor (the conductor used to carry the non-current-carrying metal parts of equipment, as defined by Article 100 of the NEC) must not pass through the sensor window. The power cables through the sensor window should be straight, tightly bundled, centered in the window, and perpendicular to the sensor for a length equal to or greater than six times the cable diameter (including insulation) from the sensor.
All other conductors with available fault currents in excess of 1,000 A should be placed a distance equal to or greater than six times the cable diameter (including insulation) from the sensor.
The power cables of the branch circuit to be protected by the E3 Plus Overload Relay must not be grounded on the load side of the ground fault sensor.

Load
Wye Connection with PTs Delta Connection with PTs
Line
L1 L2 L3 N/GRND
L1 L2 L3
Line
L1 L2 L3
L1 L2 L3
Load
Open Delta Connection with PTs
Line
L1 L2 L3
Load
L1 L2 L3
38 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 Chapter 2 Installation & Wiring
If the power cables are enclosed in a conducting jacket, the jacket must be grounded on the line side of the sensor. The jacket must not pass through the sensor window, but must be cut at the window and joined with a conductor that passes outside the sensor window.
The power system may be solidly grounded or grounded through an impedance at its source as long as the impedance allows a magnitude of current to flow that is within the 20 mA…5 A operational range of the E3 Plus Overload Relay.

Figure 16 - Core Balanced Ground Fault Sensor Mounting Placement Figure 17 - Power Cable Configuration — Two Cables per Phase Figure 18 - Ground Fault Sensor Wiring
Power
CablesCore Balanced Ground
Fault Sensor
6x
6x
90°
L3
L1
L2
L1
L2
L3
1 1
The spacer is a short piece of cable, approximately
ten times the cable diameter in length, without
connections to any terminal.E3 Plus Overload Relay
Cat. No. 193-CBCT_
Core Balanced
Ground Fault Sensor
L1 L2 L3
Motor
S1
S2
L1 L2 L3
1 35
T1 T2 T3
2 4 6
13 14 23 24 95 96 1T1 1T2
1 2 3 4 5 6
---------·
I l )-----------------------------~(
B B 0
D D
D D
□
111
/
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 39 Installation & Wiring Chapter 2
Control Wire Requirements
The maximum length of the shielded cable is 100 feet (30.48 meters). All control terminals are for copper wire only in sizes #12…24 A WG. Ring lug termination is required for the ground sensor terminals of 193- CBCT2 and larger.
The sensor fastener torque is 26…30 lb-in.
The 193-CBCT1 wires should be twisted before termination by applying one twist per inch (per 25.4 millimeters).

Table 17 - Control Wire Specifications
Approximate Dimensions
Approximate dimensions are shown in millimeters (inches). Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes.

IMPORTANT The shield of the twisted pair cable must be connected to earth ground at the ground fault sensor with no connection made at the E3 Plus Overload Relay.

Cat. No.
193-
Max.

Current
[A] Hz
Turns
Ratio
Sensor
Window
I.D.

Max.

Recommended
Cable Size @ 600V
Cat. No.
100-C09 IEC
Contactor
NEMA
Contactor
Size
CBCT1 45 50/60 1000:1 19.1 mm
(.75 in.)
#8 AWG
(10 mm2) ➊
…-C37 00…2
CBCT2 90 #2 AWG
(350 mm2) ➊
…-C85 00…3
CBCT3 180 #250 MCM
(120 mm2) ➊
…-D180 00…4
CBCT4 420 $350 MCM
(185 mm2) ➋
…-D240 00…5
➊ For a three-phase system with one cable per phase.
➋ For a three-phase system with two cables per phase.
~
@)
@)
,
40 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 Chapter 2 Installation & Wiring
Figure 19 - 193-CBCT1
Figure 20 - 193-CBCT2 & 193-CBCT3
Figure 21 - 193-CBCT4
C a t . N o . ABC ØDE F
193-CBCT2 96
(3.78)

89.6 (3.53)

48.3 (1.90)

39.6 (1.56)

54.6 (2.15)

69.9 (2.75)
193-CBCT3 122.4
(4.82)
115.9
(4.56)

59.7 (2.35)

63.5 (2.50)

54.1 (2.13)

98.0 (3.78)

45.3 (1.78)

23.1 (.91)
Ø 19.1
(.75)
Ø 44.5
(1.75)

63.5 (2.50)

50.8 (2.00)

3.2 (.12)

4.0 (.16)

12.7 (.50)

11.8 (.47)

3.2 (.13)
Ø D

5.3 (.21)
E
F B
A
C44.5
(1.75)

56.2 (2.21)

74.4 (2.93)
123.2
(4.85)

96.7 (3.81)

11.8 (.47)
146.8
(5.78)
143.5
(5.65)

5.5 (.22)

74.9 (2.95) 3.2
(.13)

82.6 (3.25)
7 L
~I
~ ~ r
•~ C a
1T
D- @) I
@)
L tr
l1 ' ~ .n
' 0
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 41 Installation & Wiring Chapter 2
Typical Control Circuit Wiring Diagrams
Full-Voltage Non-Reversing Starter (with Network Control) Figure 22 - NEMA Nomenclature
ATTENTION: Do not exceed the ratings of the E3 Overload Relay’s output and trip relay. If the coil current or voltage of the c ontactor exceeds the overload relay’s ratings, an interposing relay must be used.

ATTENTION: When the power is applied to the E3 Overload Relay, DeviceNet terminals V+ and V-, the N.O. trip relay contact across terminals 95 and 96 will close after approximately 2.35 seconds if no trip condition exists.

ATTENTION: Additional control circuit protection may be required. Refer to the applicable electrical codes.

ATTENTION: Do not apply external voltage to 1T1, 1T2, or the input terminals IN 1…4. This may cause equipment damage.

SPCD
Single-Phase Three-Phase
L1 L2
E3/E3 Plus
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3
T1 T2
M
T1 T2 T3
M
E3/E3 Plus
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3
L1 L2 L3
SPCD
E3
Out A
E3
Trip Relay
13 14 A1 A2M 95 96
1 1 Contact shown with supply voltage applied.
•
42 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 Chapter 2 Installation & Wiring
Figure 23 - CENELEC Nomenclature
Full-Voltage Reversing Starter (with Network Control)
Figure 24 - NEMA Nomenclature
Figure 25 - CENELEC Nomenclature
Single-Phase Three-Phase
M
L1
E3
Out A
13 14
95 96
A1
A2
K
N
E3
Trip Relay 2
1 3 51 3 5
2 4 6 2 4 6
T1 T3 T5T1 T3 T5
M
A1
A2
A1
A2
K1K1
2 Contact shown with supply voltage applied.

E3 Plus
Out A REV
E3 Plus
Out B FOR
FOR
REV
E3 Plus
Trip Relay 1
1 Contact shown with supply voltage applied.
13 14
23 24
A1 A2
A1 A2
95 96
L1
E3 Plus
Trip Relay 2
95 96
13 23
E3 Plus
Out B
14 24
K2 K1
A1 A1
K1 K2
A2 A2
N
Contact shown with supply voltage applied.2
E3 Plus
Out A
•
•
•
•
•
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 43 Installation & Wiring Chapter 2
Figure 26 - IEC Reversing Starter Application Schematic Two-Speed Non-Reversing (with Network Control)
The following figures show wiring diagrams of two-speed non-reversing starters with Series B and later E3 Plus Overload Relays.

Figure 27 - NEMA Nomenclature
red
white
shield
blue
black
DeviceNet
L3
L2
L1
6 4
2 5
3 1
5 3
1 6
4 2
K1M
K2M
Q1
F2
5 3
1 6
4 2
6 4
2 W
V
U
M3~
24V -
CAN L
Shield
CAN H
24V +
24V
CAN H
CAN L
24V -
230V AC 23 24
Q1
OUT B
OUT A
23 24 22 21 A1 A2 K1M K2M
K2M K1M
13 14 22 21 A1 A2 N
K2M
K1M
13 14
13 14
13 14
Q1
6 5
24V +
IN4
IN3
IN2
IN1
96 95
1T2
1T1
E3 Plus
Out A
E3 Plus
Out B
13 14
23 24
LOW
HIGHA1 A2
A1 A2 95 96
E3 Plus
Trip Relay 1
Contact shown with supply voltage applied.1
LOW
HIGH
f1
111
,-m--,--1-
L-ddiy
T
al " ,.,:
,,,-
I ' ---,~n~n~
_I_ -;_ -I_ - I_ = U= = ·= ·= =:= = = =:= = l -------
- - - - - - 11~
•
•
44 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 Chapter 2 Installation & Wiring
Figure 28 - CENELEC Nomenclature
External/Remote Reset (FRN 3.001 & Later)
T o reset a trip from an external/remote location, configure one of the E3 Overload Relay’s inputs for trip reset operation using one of Parameters 83…86.

Wire the input as shown below.

Figure 29 - Reset Wiring
IMPORTANT Reset operation is edge sensitive and trip free. That is, holding the push button down (maintaining the reset contact in a closed position) will not prevent the E3 Overload Relay from tripping.

E3 Plus
Trip Relay
Contact shown with supply voltage applied.2
2 E3 Plus
Out AE3 Plus
Out B
L1
95 96
23 24
13 14
K2 K1
A1
A2
A1
A2
K2K1
N
Reset
1-4 5
•
D-----0 0-----------0
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 45 Chapter 3
Protective Trip & Warning Functions
Introduction The purpose of this chapter is to provide detailed information regarding the protective trip and warning functions of the E3 Overload Relay. In this chapter, you will find considerable mention given to programming parameters as they relate to these functions. For complete descriptions of the programming parameters, refer to Chapter 5—Programmable Parameters .

Trip Enable T rip Enable, Parameter 24, allows the installer to enable or disable the desired protective functions separately. The overload, phase loss, and communication fault trip functions are enabled from the factory.

Warning Enable W arning Enable, Parameter 25, allows the installer to enable or disable the desired warning functions separately. All warning functions are disabled from the factory.

Overload Protection The E3 Overload Relay provides overload protection through true RMS current measurement of the individual phase currents of the connected motor. Based on the maximum current measured and the programmed FLA Setting and T rip Class, a thermal model that simulates the actual heating of the motor is calculated. The percent thermal capacity utilized, Parameter 9, reports this calculated value and can be read via the DeviceNet network.

Overload Trip
The E3 Overload Relay will trip with an overload indication if:
no trip currently exists,
overload protection is enabled, and
IMPORTANT The E3 Overload Relay requires overload trip protection to be enabled at all times. The E3 Plus Overload Relay requires either overload or PTC trip protection to be enabled at all times.

ATTENTION: To avoid unexpected behavior of the outputs, the Trip Enable settings should not be altered during the machine operation.

Doing so may result in an unintended actuation of controlled industrial equipment with potential for machine damage or serious injury to personnel.
46 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 Chapter 3 Protective Trip & Warning Functions
% Therm Utilized reaches 100%.

If the E3 Overload Relay trips on an overload, the following will occur:
the TRIP/W ARN LED will flash a red two-blink pattern, Bit 1 in T rip Status, Parameter 14, will go to “1” , Bit 0 in Device Status, Parameter 21, will go to “1” , the T rip Relay contact will open, and
the outputs will be placed in their Protection Fault state (if so programmed).

FLA Setting
The FLA Setting, Parameter 28, is provided for the installer to enter the motor’s full-load current rating. The 2-SpdFLA Set, Parameter 88, is provided in series B and later E3 Plus Overload Relay units for programming the high-speed FLA values in two-speed motor applications. The FLA Setting ranges and default values for the various E3 Overload Relays can be found in Chapter 5— Programmable Parameters. Below are setting guidelines regarding service factor, maximum continuous rated (MCR) motors, and wye-delta (star-delta) motors.

USA & Canada Guidelines
Motor Service Factor ≥ 1.15: For motors with a service factor rating of

1.15 or greater, program the FLA setting to the printed nameplate’s full- load current rating.
Motor Service Factor < 1.15: For motors with a service factor rating less than 1.15, program the FLA setting to 90% of the printed nameplate’s full- load current rating.
Wye-Delta (Y-Δ) Applications: Follow the application’s service factor instructions, except divide the printed nameplate’s full-load current rating by 1.73.

Outside USA & Canada Guidelines
Maximum Continuous Rated (MCR) Motors: Program the FLA setting to the printed nameplate’s full-load current rating.
Star-Delta (Y-Δ) Applications: Follow the MCR instructions, except divide the printed nameplate’s full-load current rating by 1.73.

IMPORTANT The Protection Fault State of OUT A and OUT B is defined by:
OUTA Pr FltState, Parameter 65
OUTA Or FltValue, Parameter 66
OUTB Pr FltState, Parameter 71
OUTB Pr FltValue, Parameter 72
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 47 Protective Trip & Warning Functions Chapter 3
CT Ratio
Devices with the FLA setting range of 9…5000 A (Cat. No. 193-EC_ZZ) are intended for use with primary current transformers. CT Ratio, Parameter 78, allows the installer to identify the turns ratio of the transformers(s) in use. Each CT Ratio selection has a corresponding valid FLA setting range, as described in the following table.

Table 18 - CT Ratio/FLA Setting Range Correspondence
Trip Class
T rip Class is defined as the maximum time (in seconds) for an overload trip to occur when the motor’s operating current is six times its rated current. The E3 Overload Relay offers an adjustable trip class range of 5…30, which can be programmed in increments of one via T rip Class, Parameter 29.

Trip Curves
The following figures illustrate the E3 Overload Relay’s time-current characteristics for trip classes 5, 10, 20, and 30.

CT Ratio
FLA Setting
Range (A) CT Ratio
FLA Setting
Range (A) CT Ratio
FLA Setting
Range (A)
50:5 9…45 300:5 60…302 1200:5 240…1215
100:5 18…90 500:5 84…420 2500:5 450…2250
150:5 28…140 600:5 125…630 5000:5 1000…5000
200:5 42…210 800:5 172…860 —
ATTENTION: Improper configuration of the CT Ratio parameter can result in the E3 Overload Relay reporting inaccurate motor operational data and possible motor damage.

IMPORTANT Catalog Numbers 193-EC_ _F, G, and H are assemblies that contain primary current transformers. The device nameplate identifies the propter CT ratio to be programmed and the associated legal FLA setting range.

IMPORTANT The E3 Overload Relay’s TRIP/WARN LED status indicator will flash an amber configuration warning (13-flash sequence) when the FLA setting is outside of the legal range of the selected CT Ratio setting (e.g., CT Ratio set at 300:5 and the FLA Setting at 50 A).
w
48 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 Chapter 3 Protective Trip & Warning Functions
Figure 30 - Time-Current Characteristics for Trip Classes 5, 10, 20, & 30 For trip class time-current characteristics other than 5, 10, 20, or 30, scale the Class 10 trip time according to the following table:

Table 19 - Time-Current Characteristic Scaling Factors
Trip Class
Trip Class
10 Multiplier Trip Class
Trip Class
10 Multiplier Trip Class
Trip Class
10 Multiplier
5 0.5 14 1.4 23 2.3
6 0.6 15 1.5 24 2.4
7 0.7 16 1.6 25 2.5
8 0.8 17 1.7 26 2.6
9 0.9 18 1.8 27 2.7
10 1.0 19 1.9 28 2.8
11 1.1 20 2.0 29 2.9
12 1.2 21 2.1 30 3.0
13 1.3 22 2.2
1 10
100
1000
100% 1000%
Time (seconds)
Trip Class 5
Current (% FLA)
Trip Class 30
1 10
100
1000
10000
100% 1000% Current (% FLA)
Time (seconds)
1 10
100
1000
10000
100% 1000%

Trip Class 20
Time (seconds)
Current (% FLA)
1 10
100
1000
100% 1000%
Time (seconds)
Trip Class 10
Current (% FLA)
Cold Trip
Hot Trip1-----. -,
" '\ ' '\
\\ ,,
- -.. .
\
' . ..... .
'
'. . ... , .. '
. . . .

I
-"' .. ..........
"' ... .

I
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 49 Protective Trip & Warning Functions Chapter 3
Auto/Manual Reset
OL/PTC ResetMode, Parameter 30, allows the user to select the reset mode for the E3 Overload Relay after an overload or thermistor (PTC) trip. If an overload trip occurs and automatic reset mode is selected, the E3 Overload Relay will automatically reset when the value stored in % Therm Utilized, Parameter 9, falls below the value stored in OL Reset Level, Parameter 31. If manual reset mode is selected, the E3 Overload Relay can be manually reset after the % Therm Utilized is less than the OL Reset Level.

OL Reset Level, Parameter 31, is adjustable from 1 to 100% TCU . The following table illustrates the typical overload reset time delay when OL Reset Level is set to 75% TCU .

Table 20 - Typical Overload Relay Reset Time Delays
For reset time delays corresponding to other OL Reset Level settings, see the following charts.

Trip Class Reset Delay Time in Seconds ➊
54 5
10 90
15 135
20 180
30 270
➊ Times shown are based on OL Reset Level, Parameter 31, being set to 75% TCU. 50 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 Chapter 3 Protective Trip & Warning Functions
Figure 31 - Overload Reset Times
Overload Warning
The E3 Overload Relay will indicate an overload warning if:
no warning currently exists,
overload warning is enabled, and
% Therm Utilized is equal to or greater than OL W arn Level.

When the overload warning conditions are satisfied, the:
TRIP/W ARN LED status indicator will flash an amber 2-blink pattern, W arning Status, Parameter 15, will set to 1, and
Device Status, Parameter 21, will set to 1.

OL W arn Level, Parameter 32, can be used as an alert for impending overload trip and is adjustable from 0…100% TCU .

ATTENTION: In explosive environment applications, OL/PTC Reset Mode, Parameter 30, must be set to Manual.

ATTENTION: In an explosive environment applications, OL Reset Level, Parameter 31, must be set as low as possible or in accordance with the motor thermal time constant.

Time to Reset in Seconds
OL Reset Level (% TCU)
0 100 200 300 400 500 100
90 80
70 60
50 100
90 80
70 60
50 40
30 20
10 0
0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 4500 5000 OL Reset Level (% TCU)
Time to Reset in Seconds
Trip Class 5 Trip Class 10 Trip Class 20 Trip Class 30 . \ \
... ... -.. ...
------
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 51 Protective Trip & Warning Functions Chapter 3
Overload Diagnostics
Time to Trip
When the measured motor current exceeds the trip rating of the E3 Overload Relay, the Time to T rip, Parameter 12, indicates the estimated time remaining before an overload trip occurs. When the measured current is below the trip rating, the Time to T rip value is reported as 9,999 seconds.

Time To Reset
After an overload trip, the E3 Overload Relay will report the time remaining until the device can be reset through Time to Reset, Parameter 13. Once the % Therm Utilized value falls to or below the OL Reset Level, the Time to Reset value will indicate zero until the overload trip is reset. After an overload trip is reset, the Time to Reset value is reported as 9,999 seconds.

Non-Volatile Thermal Memory
The E3 Overload Relay includes a non-volatile circuit to provide thermal memory. The time constant of the circuit corresponds to a T rip Class 30 setting.

During normal operation, the thermal memory circuit is continually monitored and updated to accurately reflect the thermal utilization of the connected motor.

If power is removed, the thermal memory of the circuit decays at a rate equivalent to the cooling of a T rip Class 30 application. When the power is re-applied, the E3 Overload Relay checks the thermal memory circuit voltage to determine the initial value of % Therm Utilized, Parameter 9.

Phase Loss Protection A high current imbalance, or phase failure, can be caused by defective contacts in a contactor or circuit breaker, loose terminals, blown fuses, sliced wires, or faults in the motor. When a phase failure exists, the motor can experience an additional temperature rise or excessive mechanical vibration. This may result in a degradation of the motor insulation or increased stress on the motor bearings.

Rapid phase loss detection helps to minimize the potential damage and loss of production.

Phase Loss Trip
The E3 Overload Relay will trip with a phase loss indication if:
no trip currently exists,
Phase Loss Protection is enabled,
PL Inhibit Time has expired, and
52 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 Chapter 3 Protective Trip & Warning Functions
Current Imbal is equal to or greater than 100% for a time period greater than the programmed PL T rip Delay.

If the E3 Overload Relay trips on a phase loss, the:
TRIP/W ARN LED status indicator will flash a red 3-blink pattern, bit 2 in T rip Status, Parameter 14 will set to 1,
bit 0 of Device Status, Parameter 21, will set to 1,
trip relay contact will be open, and
outputs will be placed in their Protective Fault state (if so programmed).

PL Inhibit Time, Parameter 33, allows the installer to inhibit a phase loss trip from occurring during the motor starting sequence. It is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.

PL T rip Delay, Parameter 34, allows the installer to define the time period for which a phase loss condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.

Ground Fault Protection (E3
Plus)
In isolated or high impedance-grounded systems, core-balanced current sensors are typically used to detect low level ground faults caused by insulation breakdowns or entry of foreign objects. Detection of such ground faults can be used to interrupt the system to prevent further damage or to alert the appropriate personnel to perform timely maintenance.

The E3 Plus Overload Relay provides core-balanced ground fault detection capability, with the option of enabling Ground Fault T rip, Ground Fault W arning, or both. The ground fault detection method and range depends upon the catalog number of the relay ordered.

IMPORTANT The Protection Fault State of OUT A and OUT B is defined by:
• OUTA Pr FltState, Parameter 65,
• OUTA PrFltValue, Parameter 66,
• OUTB Pr FltState, Parameter 71, and
• OUTB Pr FltValue, Parameter 72.

IMPORTANT The phase loss inhibit timer starts after the maximum phase of load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the device’s minimum FLA Setting. The E3 Overload Relay does not begin monitoring for a phase loss condition until the PL Inhibit Time expires.

Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 53 Protective Trip & Warning Functions Chapter 3
Figure 32 - Ground Fault Capabilities
Ground Fault Setting Range
Series A and B E3 Plus Overload Relays have one ground fault sensing range, 1…5 A. E3 Plus Overload Relays, 193/592-EC3_ _ and 193/592-EC5_ _ Series C and later, using an193-CBCT external core balance ground fault sensor have four sensing ranges which are selectable via the GF Sensing Range, Parameter 106.

These ranges are:
20…100 mA — For resistive loads only. For motor load information, consult your local Rockwell Automation sales office or Allen-Bradley distributor.
100…500 mA
200 mA …1.0 A
1.0…5.0 A
Ground Fault Trip
The E3 Plus Overload Relay will trip with a ground fault indication if:
no trip currently exists,
ground fault protection is enabled,
Catalog Number Series
Ground Fault
Method
Ground Fault
Trip/Warning Range
193/592-EC2_ _, & 193-EC2ZZ (
≤ 90A) B & C Internal 1…5 A 1…5 A
193-EC2_ _, except for 193-EC2ZZ (> 90A) B External ➊ 1…5 A 193/592-EC3_ _, & 193-EC5_ _ C External ➋➌ 20mA…5 A
➊ A Catalog Number 825-CBCT Core Balance Ground Fault Sensor must be used. ➋ One of the following Catalog Number 193-CBCT_ Core Balance Ground Fault Sensors must be used:
1 — Ø 20 mm window
2 — Ø 40 mm window
3 — Ø 65 mm window
4 — Ø 85 mm window
➌ 20…100 mA for resistive loads only. For motor load information, consult your local Rockwell Automation sales office or Allen Bradley distributor.

ATTENTION: The E3 Plus Overload Relay is not a ground fault circuit interrupt or for personal protection as defined in Article 100 of the NEC.

ATTENTION: The E3 Plus Overload Relay is not intended to signal a disconnecting means to open the faulted current. A disconnecting device must be capable of interrupting the maximum available fault current of the system on which it is used.
w
w
54 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 Chapter 3 Protective Trip & Warning Functions
GF Inhibit Time has expired, and
GF Current is equal to or greater than the GF T rip Level for a time period greater than the GF T rip Delay.

If the E3 Plus Overload Relay trips on a ground fault, the:
TRIP/W ARN LED will flash a red 4-blink pattern,
bit 3 in Parameter 14, T rip Status, will set to 1,
bit 0 of Parameter 21, Device Status, will set to 1,
trip relay contact will open, and
outputs will be placed in their Protection Fault state (if so programmed).

GF Inhibit Time, Parameter 35, allows the installer to inhibit a ground fault trip from occurring during the motor starting sequence and is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.

GF T rip Delay, Parameter 36, allows the installer to define the time period a ground fault condition must be present before a trip occurs and is adjustable from

0.0…25.0 seconds.

Parameter 37, GF T rip Level, allows the installer to define the ground fault current at which the E3 Plus Overload Relay will trip and is adjustable from:
1.0…5.0 A (Catalog Number 193/592-EC2_ _)
20.0 mA…5.0 A (Catalog Number 193/592-EC3_ _ & 193/592-EC5_ _) Ground Fault Trip Inhibit
Ground faults can quickly rise from low-level arcing levels to short circuit magnitudes. A motor starting contactor may not have the necessary rating to interrupt a high magnitude ground fault. In these circumstances it is desirable for an upstream circuit breaker with the proper rating to interrupt the ground fault.

IMPORTANT The Protection Fault State of OUT A and OUT B is defined by:
OUTA Pr FltState, Parameter 65
OUTA Pr FltValue, Parameter 66
OUTB Pr FltState, Parameter 71
OUTB Pr FltValue, Parameter 72
IMPORTANT The ground fault inhibit timer starts after the maximum phase load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the device’s minimum FLA Setting or the GF Current is greater than or equal to 50% of the device’s minimum GF Current Setting. The E3 Overload Relay does not begin monitoring for a ground fault condition until the GF Inhibit Time expires.

NOTE: The GF Trip Inhibit feature is only available in E3 Plus Overload Relays Series B and later.

Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 55 Protective Trip & Warning Functions Chapter 3
When enabled, GF T rip Inhibit, Parameter 89, inhibits a ground fault trip from occurring when the ground fault current exceeds the maximum range of the core balance sensor (approximately 10 A).

Ground Fault Warning
The E3 Plus Overload Relay will indicate a ground fault warning if:
no warning currently exists,
ground fault warning is enabled,
GF Inhibit Time has expired, and
GF Current is equal to or greater than the GF W arn Level (Series C and later devices) for a time period greater than the GF W arn Delay.

When the ground fault warning conditions are satisfied, the TRIP/W ARN LED status indicator will flash an amber 4-blink pattern, bit 3 in W arning Status, Parameter 15, will set to 1, and bit 1 of Device Status, Parameter 21, will go to 1.

GF W arn Level, Parameter 38, allows the installer to define the ground fault current at which the E3 Plus Overload Relay will indicate a warning and is adjustable from 1.0…5.0 A.

In Series C and later, GF W arn Delay, Parameter 105, allows the installer to define the time period (adjustable from 0.0…25.0 s) for which a ground fault condition must be present before a warning occurs.

Ground Fault Filter
An E3 Plus Overload Relay with firmware revision 5.00 and higher has the capability to filter ground fault currents for High Resistance Grounded (HRG) systems from its current-based protection trip and warning functions. These filters include: Thermal Overload, Phase Imbalance, Jam, and Stall.

The Ground Fault Filter is useful for smaller-sized motors that trip unexpectedly due to a controlled ground fault current that is significant relative to the current draw of the electric motor. GF Filter Enable, Parameter 131, allows the user to enable this filter.

This filter only disables the effects of the ground fault current from the current- based motor protection trip and warning functions. Current-based diagnostic data will be reported unfiltered when this feature is enabled.

IMPORTANT In E3 Plus Overload Relay Series A and B, the ground fault warning function does not include a time delay feature. Once the GF Inhibit Time has expired, the ground fault warning indication is instantaneous. 56 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 Chapter 3 Protective Trip & Warning Functions
Stall Protection When a motor stalls during its starting sequence, the motor heats up very rapidly.

After the permissible stalling time, the motor reaches the temperature limit of its insulation. Rapid stall detection during the starting sequence can extend the motor’s life, as well as minimize potential damage and loss of production.

Stall Time
The E3 Overload Relay will trip with a stall indication when:
no trip currently exists,
stall protection is enabled, and
the maximum phase current is greater than the Stall T rip Level for a time period greater than the Stall Enabled Time.

If the E3 Overload Relay trips on a stall, the:
TRIP/W ARN LED status indicator will flash a red 5-blink pattern, bit 4 in T rip Status, Parameter 14, will set to 1,
bit 0 in Device Status, Parameter 21, will set to 1
T rip Relay contacts will open, and
outputs will be placed in their Protection Fault state (if so programmed).

Stall Enabled Time, Parameter 39, allows the installer to adjust the time the E3 Overload Relay monitors for a stall condition during the motor starting sequence and is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.

Stall T rip Level, Parameter 40, allows the installer to define the locked rotor current and is adjustable from 100…600% of the FLA Setting, Parameter 28.

IMPORTANT The Protection Fault State of OUT A and OUT B is defined by:
OUTA Pr FltState, Parameter 65
OUTA Pr FltValue, Parameter 66
OUTB Pr FltState, Parameter 71
OUTB Pr FltValue, Parameter 72
IMPORTANT Stall Protection is only enabled during the motor starting sequence. If the maximum phase of load current falls below the programmed Stall Trip Level before the Stall Enabled Time elapses, the E3 Overload Relay disables Stall Protection until the next motor starting sequence.

IMPORTANT The E3 Overload Relay considers a motor to have begun its starting sequence if the maximum phase of motor current transitions from 0 A to approximately 30% of the minimum FLA Setting.

Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 57 Protective Trip & Warning Functions Chapter 3
Jam Protection (High
Overload)
Motor current greater than the motor’s nameplate rating may indicate a high overload or stall condition, such as an overloaded conveyor or jammed gear.

These conditions can result in overheating of the motor and equipment damage.

Rapid jam fault detection helps to minimize damage and loss of production.

Jam Trip
The E3 Overload Relay will trip with a jam indication if:
no trip currently exists,
Jam Protection is enabled,
Jam Inhibit Time has expired, and
the maximum phase current is greater than the Jam T rip Level for a time period greater than the Jam T rip Delay.

If the E3 Overload Relay trips on a jam, the:
no trip currently exists,
Jam Protection is enabled,
Jam Inhibit Time has expired,
maximum phase current is greater than the Jam T rip Level for a time period greater than the Jam T rip Delay.

If the E3 Overload Relay trips on a jam, the:
TRIP/W ARN LED status indicator will flash a red 6-blink pattern, bit 5 in T rip Status, Parameter 14, will set to 1,
bit 0 in Device Status, Parameter 21, will set to 1,
T rip Relay contact will open, and
outputs will be placed in their Protection Fault State (if so programmed).

Jam Inhibit Time, Parameter 41, allows the installer to inhibit a jam trip from occurring during the motor starting sequence. It is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.

Jam Trip Delay, Parameter 42, allows the installer to define the time period a jam condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.

IMPORTANT The Protection Fault State of OUT A and OUT B is defined by:
OUTA Pr FltState, Parameter 65
OUTA Pr FltValue, Parameter 66
OUTB Pr FltState, Parameter 71
OUTB Pr FltValue, Parameter 72
58 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 Chapter 3 Protective Trip & Warning Functions
Jam Trip Level, Parameter 43, allows the installer to define the current at which the E3 Overload Relay will trip on a jam. It is user-adjustable from 50…600% of the FLA Setting, Parameter 28.

Jam Warning
The E3 Overload Relay will indicate a Jam warning if:
no warning currently exists,
Jam Warning is enabled,
Jam Inhibit Time has expired, and
the maximum phase current is equal to or greater than the Jam W arn Level.

When the Jam W arning conditions are satisfied, the:
TRIP/W ARN LED will flash an amber 6-blink pattern,
bit 5 in Parameter 15, Warning Status, will set to “1” , and bit 1 in Parameter 21, Device Status, will set to “1” .

Jam W arn Level, Parameter 44, allows the installer to define the current at which the E3 Overload Relay will indicate a warning. It is user-adjustable from 50…600% for the FLA Setting, Parameter 28.

Underload Protection Motor current less than a specific level may indicate a mechanical malfunction in the installation, such as a torn conveyor belt, damaged fan blade, broken shaft, or worn tool. Such conditions may not harm the motor, but they can lead to loss of production. Rapid underload fault detection helps to minimize damage and loss of production.

Underload Trip
The E3 Overload Relay will trip with an underload indication if:
no trip currently exists,
Underload Protection is enabled,
UL Inhibit Time has expired, and
IMPORTANT The Jam Inhibitor timer starts after the maximum phase of load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the device’s minimum FLA setting. The E3 Overload Relay does not begin monitoring for a jam condition until the Jam Inhibit Time expires.

IMPORTANT The Jam Warning function does not include a time delay feature. Once the Jam Inhibit Time has expired, the Jam Warning indication is instantaneous.

Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 59 Protective Trip & Warning Functions Chapter 3
minimum phase current is less than the UL T rip Level for a time period greater than the UL T rip Delay.

If the E3 Overload Relay trips on an underload, the:
TRIP/W ARN LED will flash a red 7-blink pattern,
bit 6 in Parameter 14, T rip Status, will set to “1” , bit 0 of Parameter 21, Device Status, will set to “1” , T rip Relay contact will open, and
outputs will be placed in their Protection Fault State (if so programmed).

UL Inhibit Time, Parameter 45, allows the installer to inhibit an underload trip from occurring during the motor starting sequence and is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.

UL T rip Delay, Parameter 46, allows the installer to define the time period that an underload condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from

0.1…25.0 seconds.

UL T rip Level, Parameter 47, allows the installer to define the current at which the E3 Overload Relay will trip on an Underload. It is user-adjustable from 10…100%
➊ of the FLA Setting, Parameter 28.
➊ 50…100% for devices with firmware revision (FRN) 1.003 and earlier.

Underload Warning
The E3 Overload Relay will immediately indicate an Underload warning if:
no warning currently exists,
Underload Warning is enabled,
UL Inhibit Time has expired, and
IMPORTANT The Protection Fault State of OUT A and OUT B is defined by:
OUTA Pr FltState, Parameter 65
OUTA Pr FltValue, Parameter 66
OUTB Pr FltState, Parameter 71
OUTB Pr FltValue, Parameter 72
IMPORTANT The Underload Inhibit Timer starts after the maximum phase of load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the device’s minimum FLA setting.

The E3 Overload Relay does not begin monitoring for an underload condition until the UL Inhibit Time expires.

IMPORTANT For any given application, the practical limit of the UL Trip Level, Parameter 47, will be dependent on the FLA Setting and the lower limit of the E3 Overload Relay’s current measurement capability. See Table 34 on page 142.
60 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 Chapter 3 Protective Trip & Warning Functions
minimum phase current is less than the UL W arn Level.

When the Underload W arning conditions are satisfied, the:
TRIP/W ARN LED will flash an amber 7-blink pattern,
bit 6 in Parameter 15, W arning Status, will set to “1” , and bit 1 of Parameter 21, Device Status, will set to “1” .

UL W arn Level, Parameter 48, allows the installer to define the current at which the E3 Overload Relay will indicate a warning. It is user-adjustable from 10…100% ➊ of the FLA Setting, Parameter 28.
➊ 50…100% for devices with firmware revision (FRN) 1.003 and earlier.

Thermistor/PTC Protection
The E3 Plus Overload Relay models -EC2 and -EC3 provide terminals IT1 and IT2 for the connection of positive temperature coefficient (PTC) thermistor sensors. PTC sensors are commonly embedded in motor stator windings to monitor the motor winding temperature. When the motor winding temperature reaches the PTC sensor’s temperature rating, the PTC sensor’s resistance transitions from a low to high value. Since PTC sensors react to actual temperature, enhanced motor protection can be provided to address such conditions as obstructed cooling and high ambient temperatures.

The following table defines the E3 Plus Overload Relay’s PTC thermistor input and response ratings.

Table 21 - E3 Plus PTC Input Ratings
The following figure illustrates the required PTC sensor characteristics per IEC- 34-11-2.

IMPORTANT The Underload Warning function does not include a time delay feature.

Once the UL Inhibit Time has expired, the Underload Warning indication is instantaneous.

Resistance: Response 3400 Ω ± 150 Ω
Reset 1600 Ω ± 100 Ω
Short-Circuit Trip 25 Ω ± 10 Ω
Maximum Voltage at: PTC Terminals (RPTC = 4k Ω) < 7.5V
PTC Terminals (RPTC = open) 30V
Maximum Number of Sensors 6
Maximum Cold Resistance of PTC Sensor Chain 1500 Ω
Response Time 800 ms
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 61 Protective Trip & Warning Functions Chapter 3
Figure 33 - PTC Sensor Characteristics per IEC-34-11-2
PTC Trip
The E3 Plus Overload Relay will trip with a PTC indication if:
no trip currently exists,
PTC Protection is enabled, and
resistance across terminals 1T1 and 1T2 is either greater than the relay’s response resistance or less than the short-circuit trip resistance.

If the E3 Plus Overload Relay trips on a PTC, the:
TRIP/W ARN LED will flash a red 8-blink pattern,
bit 7 in T rip Status, Parameter 14, will set to “1” , bit 0 of Device Status, Parameter 21, will set to “1” , T rip Relay contact will open, and
outputs will be placed in their Protection Fault State (if so programmed).

IMPORTANT The Protection Fault State of OUT A and OUT B is defined by:
OUTA Pr FltState, Parameter 65
OUTA Pr FltValue, Parameter 66
OUTB Pr FltState, Parameter 71
OUTB Pr FltValue, Parameter 72
4000
1330
550
250
100
20 10
-20 °C
0 °C
TNF-20K
TNF-5KTNF
TNF+15K
TNF+5K
,..
,..
..illll
Iii.. ....
)
__/ /
'---
I
I
I
I
62 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 Chapter 3 Protective Trip & Warning Functions
Parameter 30, OL/PTC ResetMode, allows the user to select the reset mode for the E3 Plus Overload Relay after an overload or thermistor (PTC) trip. If a PTC trip occurs and automatic reset mode is selected, the relay will automatically reset when the PTC resistance drops below the reset resistance. If manual reset mode is selected, the E3 Plus Overload Relay must be manually reset after the PTC resistance drops below the relay’s reset resistance.

PTC Warning
The E3 Plus Overload Relay will immediately indicate a PTC warning if:
no warning currently exists,
PTC W arning is enabled, and
resistance across terminals 1T1 and 1T2 is either greater than the E3 Plus Overload Relay’s response resistance or less than the short-circuit trip resistance.

When the PTC warning conditions are satisfied, the:
TRIP/W ARN LED will flash an amber 8-blink pattern,
bit 7 in W arning Status, Parameter 15, will set to “1” , and bit 1 of Device Status, Parameter 21, will set to “1” .

Current Imbalance
Protection
A current imbalance can be caused by an unbalance in the voltage supply, unequal motor winding impedance, or long and varying wire lengths. When a current imbalance exists, the motor can experience an additional temperature rise, resulting in degradation of the motor insulation and reduction of life expectancy.

Rapid Current Imbalance fault detection helps extend motor life expectancy and minimize potential damage and loss of production.

Current Imbalance can be defined by the following equation:
%CI = 100% * (I
d/Ia)
where
%CI = Percent Current Imbalance
I
d = Maximum Deviation from the Average Current
Ia = Average Current
Current Imbalance Trip
The E3 Overload Relay will trip with a Current Imbalance indication if:
no trip currently exists,
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 63 Protective Trip & Warning Functions Chapter 3
Current Imbalance protection is enabled,
CI Inhibit Time has expired, and
Current Imbal is equal to or greater than the CI T rip Level for a time period greater than the CI T rip Delay.

If the relay trips on a Current Imbalance, the:
TRIP/W ARN LED will flash a red 9-blink pattern,
bit 8 in T rip Status, Parameter 14, will set to “1” , bit 0 in Device Status, Parameter 21, will go to “1” , T rip Relay contacts will open, and
outputs will be placed in their Protection Fault State (if so programmed).

CI Inhibit Time, Parameter 49, allows the installer to inhibit a current imbalance trip from occurring during the motor starting sequence. It is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.

CI T rip Delay, Parameter 50, allows the installer to define the time period for which a current imbalance condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.

CI T rip Level, Parameter 51, allows the installer to define the percent current imbalance which will cause the relay to trip on a Current Imbalance. It is adjustable from 10…100%.

Current Imbalance Warning
The E3 Overload Relay will indicate a Current Imbalance warning if:
no warning currently exists,
Current Imbalance warning is enabled,
CI Inhibit Time has expired, and
Current Imbal is equal to or greater than CI W arn Level.

When the Current Imbalance warning conditions are satisfied, the:

IMPORTANT The Protection Fault State of OUT A and OUT B is defined by:
OUTA Pr FltState, Parameter 65
OUTA Pr FltValue, Parameter 66
OUTB Pr FltState, Parameter 71
OUTB Pr FltValue, Parameter 72
IMPORTANT The Current Imbalance inhibit timer starts after the maximum phase of load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the device’s minimum FLA Setting. The E3 Overload Relay does not begin monitoring for a current imbalance condition until the CI Inhibit Time expires.
64 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 Chapter 3 Protective Trip & Warning Functions
TRIP/W ARN LED will flash an amber 9-blink pattern,
bit 8 in W arning Status, Parameter 15, will set to “1” , and bit 1 in Device Status, Parameter 21, will set to “1” .

CI W arn Level, Parameter 52, allows the installer to define the percent current imbalance at which the E3 Overload Relay will indicate a warning. It is user- adjustable from 10…100%.

Communication Fault
Protection
A disruption of the communication link between the E3 Overload Relay and a DeviceNet network can result in the loss of application control and/or critical process diagnostic data. Rapid communication fault detection helps minimize potential damage due to uncontrolled or unmonitored applications.

Comm Fault Trip
The E3 Overload Relay will trip with a Comm Fault indication if:
no trip currently exists,
Comm Fault protection is enabled, and
the E3 Overload Relay experiences a loss of communication.

If the relay trips on a Comm Fault, the:
Network Status LED will blink red or become solid red TRIP/W ARN LED will flash a red 10-blink pattern
bit 9 in T rip Status, Parameter 14, will set to “1”
bit 0 in Device Status, Parameter 21, will set to “1” T rip Relay contacts will open, and
outputs will be placed in their Protection Fault State (if so programmed).

IMPORTANT The Current Imbalance Warning function does not include a time delay feature. Once the CI Inhibit Time has expired, The CI warning indication is instantaneous.

IMPORTANT The Protection Fault State of OUT A and OUT B is defined by:
OUTA Pr FltState, Parameter 65
OUTA Pr FltValue, Parameter 66
OUTB Pr FltState, Parameter 71
OUTB Pr FltValue, Parameter 72
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 65 Protective Trip & Warning Functions Chapter 3
Comm Fault Warning
The E3 Overload Relay will indicate a Comm Fault warning if:
no warning currently exists,
Comm Fault W arning is enabled, and
the relay experiences a loss of communication.

When the Comm Fault warning conditions are satisfied, the:
Network Status LED will blink red or become solid red, TRIP/W ARN LED will flash an amber 10-blink pattern,
bit 9 in Parameter 15, W arning Status, will set to “1” , and bit 1 of Parameter 21, Device Status, will set to “1” .

If a communication fault occurs and either Comm Fault T rip is not enabled or the Pr FltState parameters are set to “Ignore” , the:
Network Status LED will blink red or become solid red and outputs will be placed in their Comm Fault.

Communication Idle
Protection
When a programmable controller is placed into the program mode, the execution of its ladder program is suspended, and any connected networks go to an idle state. If inadvertent, this can result in the loss of application control and/or critical process diagnostic data. Rapid communication idle detection helps minimize the potential damage due to uncontrolled or unmonitored applications.

Comm Idle Trip
The E3 Overload Relay will trip with a Comm Idle indication if:
no trip currently exists,
Comm Idle protection is enabled, and
the network controller that the E3 Overload Relay is communicating to is placed to program mode.

If the relay trips on a Comm Idle, the:
TRIP/W ARN LED will flash a red 11-blink pattern,
IMPORTANT The Comm Fault State of OUT A and OUT B is defined by:
OUTA Dn FltState, Parameter 67
OUTA Dn FltValue, Parameter 68
OUTB Dn FltState, Parameter 73
OUTB Dn FltValue, Parameter 74
66 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 Chapter 3 Protective Trip & Warning Functions
bit 10 in T rip Status, Parameter 14, will set to “1” , bit 0 of Device Status, Parameter 21, will set to “1” , T rip Relay contact will open, and
outputs will be placed in their Protection Fault State (if so programmed).

Comm Idle Warning
The E3 Overload Relay will indicate a Comm Idle warning if:
no warning currently exists,
Comm Idle W arning is enabled, and
the network controller that is communicating to the E3 Overload Relay is placed in idle mode.

When the Comm Idle warning conditions are satisfied, the:
TRIP/W ARN LED will flash an amber 11-blink pattern,
bit 10 in W arning Status, Parameter 15, will set to “1” , and bit 1 in Device Status, Parameter 21, will set to “1” .

If a communication idle occurs and either Comm Idle T rip is not enabled or the Pr FltState parameters are set to “Ignore” , the outputs will be placed in their Comm Idle State.

Remote Trip
The Remote T rip function provided in series B and later devices allows the capability of tripping the E3 Overload Relay from a remote source (e.g., a vibration switch). Proper set-up requires that Remote T rip is enabled in T rip Enable, Parameter 24, and that an input assignment, Parameters 83 – 86, is configured for Remote T rip.

IMPORTANT The Protection Fault State of OUT A and OUT B is defined by:
OUTA Pr FltState, Parameter 65
OUTA Pr FltValue, Parameter 66
OUTB Pr FltState, Parameter 71
OUTB Pr FltValue, Parameter 72
IMPORTANT The Comm Fault State of OUT A and OUT B is defined by:
OUTA Dn FltState, Parameter 67
OUTA Dn FltValue, Parameter 68
OUTB Dn FltState, Parameter 73
OUTB Dn FltValue, Parameter 74
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 67 Protective Trip & Warning Functions Chapter 3
When the remote trip condition sensor contact closes, the:
TRIP/W ARN LED will flash a red 15-blink pattern,
bit 14 in T rip Status, Parameter 14, will set to “1” , T rip Relay contact will open, and
outputs will be placed in their Protection Fault State (if so programmed).

Voltage Protection The E3 Plus model EC5 has the capability to protect against poor voltage quality by offering voltage based protection. The user can prevent a contactor from energizing if the voltage is either too high or too low.

Under Voltage (UV) Trip
The E3 Overload Relay will trip with a UV indication if:
no trip currently exists,
Under V oltage protection is enabled,
UV Inhibit Time has expired, and
the Average V oltage L-L is equal to or less than the UV T rip Level for a time period greater than the programmed UV T rip Delay.

When the under voltage trip conditions are satisfied, the:
TRIP/W ARN LED will flash a red 1 long and 2 short blink pattern, bit 1 in UV T rip Status, Parameter 160, will go to “1” bit 0 of Device Status, Parameter 21, will go to “1”
T rip Relay contact will be open, and
outputs will be placed in their Protection Fault state (if so programmed).

UV Inhibit Time, Parameter 215, allows the installer to inhibit an under voltage trip from occurring during the motor starting sequence and is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.

UV T rip Delay, Parameter 216, allows the installer to define the time period an under voltage condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from

0.1…25.0 seconds.

UV T rip Level, Parameter 217, allows the installer to define the average L-L voltage in which the E3 Plus Overload Relay will trip. It is adjustable from 0…65535 V.

IMPORTANT The Protection Fault State of OUT A and OUT B is defined by:
OUTA Pr FltState, Parameter 65
OUTA Pr FltValue, Parameter 66
OUTB Pr FltState, Parameter 71
OUTB Pr FltValue, Parameter 72
68 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 Chapter 3 Protective Trip & Warning Functions
Under Voltage (UV) Warning
The E3 Overload Relay will immediately indicate an under voltage warning condition if:
no warning currently exists,
UV W arning is enabled,
UV Inhibit Time has expired, and
Average V oltage L-L is equal to or less than the UV W arn Level.

When the under voltage warning conditions are satisfied, the:
TRIP/W ARN LED will flash an amber 1 long and 2 short blink pattern, bit 1 in V W arning Status, Parameter 161, will set to “1” , and bit 1 of Device Status, Parameter 21, will go to “1” .

UV W arn Level, Parameter 218, allows the installer to define the average L-L voltage in which the E3 Plus Overload Relay will indicate a warning and is adjustable from 0…65535V.

Over Voltage (OV) Trip
The E3 Overload Relay will trip with an over voltage indication if:
no trip currently exists,
OV Protection is enabled,
OV Inhibit Time has expired, and
Average V oltage L-L is equal to or greater than OV T rip Level for a time period
greater than the programmed OV T rip Delay.

When the over voltage trip conditions are satisfied, the:
TRIP/W ARN LED will flash a red 1 long and 3 short blink pattern, bit 2 in Parameter 160, V T rip Status, will set to “1” bit 0 of Parameter 21, Device Status, will set to “1” T rip Relay contact will be open, and
outputs will be placed in their Protection Fault state (if so programmed).

OV Inhibit Time, Parameter 219, allows the installer to inhibit an over voltage trip from occurring during the motor starting sequence and is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.

OV T rip Delay, Parameter 220, allows the installer to define the time period an over voltage condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from

0.1…25.0 seconds.

Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 69 Protective Trip & Warning Functions Chapter 3
OV T rip Level, Parameter 221, allows the installer to define the average L-L voltage in which the E3 Plus Overload Relay will trip. It is adjustable from 0…65535 V.

Over Voltage (OV) Warning
The E3 Overload Relay will immediately indicate an over voltage warning condition if:
no warning currently exists,
OV W arning is enabled,
OV Inhibit Time has expired, and
Average V oltage L-L is equal to or greater than the OV W arn Level.

When the under voltage warning conditions are satisfied, the:
TRIP/W ARN LED will flash an amber 1 long and 3 short blink pattern, bit 2 in V W arning Status, Parameter 161, will set to “1” , and bit 1 of Device Status, Parameter 21, will set to “1” .

OV W arn Level, Parameter 222, allows the installer to define the average L-L voltage in which the E3 Plus Overload Relay will indicate a warning and is adjustable from 0…65535 V.

Voltage Unbalance
Protection
An unbalance in the voltage supply will create an unequal motor winding impedance resulting in a current imbalance. This causes the motor to experience an additional temperature rise, resulting in degradation of the motor insulation and reducing its life expectancy. V oltage Unbalance detection helps extend motor life expectancy and minimize potential damage and loss of production.

V oltage Unbalance can be defined by the following equation:
%VU = 100% * (V
d/Va)
where:
%VU = Percent V oltage Unbalance
Vd = Maximum Deviation from the Average V oltage
Va = Average V oltage
Voltage Unbalance Trip
The E3 Overload Relay will trip with a V oltage Unbalance indication if:
70 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 Chapter 3 Protective Trip & Warning Functions
no trip currently exists,
V oltage Unbalance protection is enabled,
V UnbalInhibit Time has expired, and
V olt Unbalance is equal to or greater than the V UnbalT ripLevel for a time period greater than the V UnbalT ripDelay.

If the relay trips on a V oltage Unbalance, the:
TRIP/W ARN LED will flash red a 1 long and 4 short blink pattern, bit 3 in V T rip Status, Parameter 160, will set to “1” , bit 0 in Device Status, Parameter21, will set to “1” , T rip Relay contacts will open, and
outputs will be placed in their Protection Fault State (if so programmed).

V UnbalInhibitTime, Parameter 229, allows the installer to inhibit a voltage unbalance trip from occurring during the motor starting sequence. It is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.

V UnbalT ripDelay, Parameter 230, allows the installer to define the time period for which a voltage unbalance condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.

V UnbalT ripLevel, Parameter 231, allows the installer to define the percent voltage unbalance which will cause the relay to trip on a voltage unbalance. It is adjustable from 0…100%.

Voltage Unbalance Warning
The E3 Overload Relay will indicate a V oltage Unbalance warning if:
no warning currently exists,
V oltage Unbalance warning is enabled,
VUnbalInhibitTime has expired, and
V olt Unbalance is equal to or greater than V UnbalW arnLevel.

When the V oltage Unbalance warning conditions are satisfied, the:
TRIP/W ARN LED will flash an amber 1 long and 4 short blink pattern, bit 3 in V W arn Status, Parameter 161, will set to “1” , and bit 1 in Device Status, Parameter 21, will set to “1” .

V UnbalW arnLevel, Parameter 232, allows the installer to define the percent voltage unbalance in which the E3 Overload Relay will indicate a warning. It is user-adjustable from 0…100%.

Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 71 Protective Trip & Warning Functions Chapter 3
Voltage Rotation Protection Wiring of a three phase voltage system can effect the rotational direction of an electric motor. The E3 Plus model EC5 can protect against the improper phase rotation so that an electric motor rotates in the proper direction, ABC or ACB, to prevent equipment from being damaged.

Voltage Rotation Trip
The E3 Overload Relay will trip with a V oltage Rotation indication if:
no trip currently exists,
Voltage Rotation protection is enabled,
Ph Rot InhibitTime has expired, and
V Phase Rot is not equal to the Ph Rot T rip.

If the relay trips on a V oltage Rotation, the:
TRIP/W ARN LED will flash red a 1 long and 5 short blink pattern, bit 4 in V T rip Status, Parameter 160, will set to “1” , bit 0 in Device Status, Parameter 21, will set to “1” , T rip Relay contacts will open, and
outputs will be placed in their Protection Fault State (if so programmed).

Ph Rot InhibitTime, Parameter 223, allows the installer to inhibit a voltage rotation trip from occurring during the motor starting sequence. It is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.

Ph Rot T rip, Parameter 224, allows the installer to define the proper phase rotation for the voltage system. It is adjustable from 1 (ABC) to 2 (ACB).

Voltage Rotation Warning
The E3 Overload Relay will indicate a V oltage Rotation warning if:
no warning currently exists,
Voltage Rotation warning is enabled,
Ph Rot InhibitTime has expired, and
V Phase Rot is not equal Ph Rot T rip.

When the V oltage Rotation warning conditions are satisfied, the following will occur:
TRIP/W ARN LED will flash an amber 1 long and 5 short blink pattern, bit 4 in V W arn Status, Parameter 161, will set to “1” , and bit 1 in Device Status, Parameter 21, will set to “1” . 72 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 Chapter 3 Protective Trip & Warning Functions
Frequency Protection The E3 Plus model EC5 has the capability to protect against poor voltage quality by offering frequency based protection. The user can prevent a contactor fromenergizing if the voltage frequency is either too high or too low.

Under Frequency (UF) Trip
The E3 Overload Relay will trip with an under frequency indication if:
no trip currently exists,
Under Frequency protection is enabled,
UF Inhibit Time has expired, and
V olt Frequency is equal to or less than UF T rip Level for a time period. greater than the programmed UF T rip Delay.

When the under frequency trip conditions are satisfied, the:
TRIP/W ARN LED will flash a red 1 long and 6 short blink pattern, bit 5 in V T rip Status, Parameter 160, will set to “1” , bit 0 of Device Status, Parameter 21, will set to “1” , T rip Relay contact will be open, and
outputs will be placed in their Protection Fault state (if so programmed).

UF Inhibit Time, Parameter 233, allows the installer to inhibit an under frequency trip from occurring during the motor starting sequence and is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.

UF T rip Delay, Parameter 234, allows the installer to define the time period an under frequency condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.

UF T rip Level, Parameter 235, allows the installer to define the frequency in which the E3 Plus Overload Relay will trip. It is adjustable from 0…250 Hz.

Under Frequency Warning
The E3 Overload Relay will immediately indicate an under frequency warning condition if:
no warning currently exists,
UFW arning is enabled,
UF Inhibit Time has expired, and
V olt Frequency is equal to or less than the UF W arn Level.

When the under frequency warning conditions are satisfied, the:
TRIP/W ARN LED will flash an amber 1 long and 6 short blink pattern bit 5 in V W arning Status, Parameter 161, will set to “1” , and bit 1 of Device Status, Parameter 21, will set to “1” .

Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 73 Protective Trip & Warning Functions Chapter 3
UF W arn Level, Parameter 236, allows the installer to define the frequency in which the E3 Plus Overload Relay will indicate a warning and is adjustable from 0…250 Hz.

Over Frequency (OF) Trip
The E3 Overload Relay will trip with an over frequency indication if:
no trip currently exists,
OF Protection is enabled,
OF Inhibit Time has expired, and
V olt Frequency is equal to or less than OF T rip Level for a time period greater than the programmed OF T rip Delay.

When the over frequency trip conditions are satisfied, the:
TRIP/W ARN LED will flash a red 1 long and 7 short blink pattern, bit 6 in V T rip Status, Parameter 160, will set to “1” , bit 0 of Device Status, Parameter 21, will set to “1” , T rip Relay contact will be open, and
outputs will be placed in their Protection Fault state (if so programmed).

OF Inhibit Time, Parameter 237, allows the installer to inhibit an over frequency trip from occurring during the motor starting sequence and is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.

OF T rip Delay, Parameter 238, allows the installer to define the time period an over frequency condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.

OF T rip Level, Parameter 239, allows the installer to define the frequency in which the E3 Plus Overload Relay will trip. It is adjustable from 0…250 Hz.

Over Frequency (OF) Warning
The E3 Overload Relay will immediately indicate an over frequency warning condition if:
no warning currently exists,
OF W arning is enabled,
OF Inhibit Time has expired, and
V olt Frequency is equal to or greater than the OF W arn Level.

When the over frequency warning conditions are satisfied, the:
TRIP/W ARN LED will flash an amber 1 long and 7 short blink pattern, bit 6 in V W arning Status, Parameter 161, will set to “1” , and 74 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 Chapter 3 Protective Trip & Warning Functions
bit 1 of Device Status, Parameter 21, will set to “1” .

OF W arn Level, Parameter 240, allows the installer to define the frequency in which the E3 Plus Overload Relay will indicate a warning and is adjustable from 0…250 Hz.

Voltage Input Module
Detection
The E3 Plus model EC5 uses a V oltage Input Module to collect the voltage signals of a power system. In the event that communications halt between the voltage input module and the relay module, the E3 Plus model EC5 can issue a trip or a warning to signify this unlikely event.

Voltage Hardware Trip
The E3 Overload Relay will trip with a V oltage Input Module Not Detected indication if:
no trip currently exists,
V oltage Hardware Fault protection is enabled, and
improper communications with the V oltage Input Module.

When the voltage hardware fault trip conditions are satisfied, the:
TRIP/W ARN LED will flash a red 1 long and 1 short blink pattern, bit 1 in V T rip Status, Parameter 160, will set to “1” , bit 0 of Device Status, Parameter 21, will set to “1” , T rip Relay contact will be open, and
outputs will be placed in their Protection Fault state (if so programmed).

Voltage Hardware Warning
The E3 Overload Relay will issue a warning with a V oltage Input Module Not Detected indication if:
no warning currently exists,
V oltage Hardware Fault warning is enabled, and
improper communications with the V oltage Input Module.

When the voltage hardware fault warning conditions are satisfied, the:

TRIP/W ARN LED will flash an amber 1 long and 1 short blink pattern, bit 1 in V W arn Status, Parameter 161, will set to “1” , and bit 1 of Device Status, Parameter 21, will set to “1” .

Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 75 Protective Trip & Warning Functions Chapter 3
Real Power (kW)
Protection
The E3 Plus Model EC5 has the capability to protect against real power (k W) for specific applications that require the monitoring of both voltage and current. The user can protect or issue a warning in the event that the real power (kW) consumption of an electric motor is either too high or too low.

Under Real Power Trip
The E3 Overload Relay will trip with an under real power indication if:
no trip currently exists,
Under Real Power protection is enabled,
UW Inhibit Time has expired, and
T otal Real Power is equal to or less than UW T rip Level for a time period greater than the programmed UW T rip Delay.

When the under real power trip conditions are satisfied, the:
TRIP/W ARN LED will flash a red 2 long and 1 short blink pattern, bit 0 in PW T rip Status, Parameter 227, will set to “1” , bit 0 of Device Status, Parameter 21, will set to “1” , T rip Relay contact will be open, and
outputs will be placed in their Protection Fault state (if so programmed).

UW Inhibit Time, Parameter 241, allows the installer to inhibit an under real power trip from occurring during the motor starting sequence and is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.

UW T rip Delay, Parameter 242, allows the installer to define the time period an under real power condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.

UW T rip Level, Parameter 243, allows the installer to define the total real power in which the E3 Plus Overload Relay will trip. It is adjustable from 0…32767.

Under Real Power Warning
The E3 Overload Relay will immediately indicate an under real power warning condition if:
no warning currently exists,
Under Real Power W arning is enabled,
UW Inhibit Time has expired, and
T otal Real Power is equal to or less than the UW W arn Level.

When the under real power warning conditions are satisfied, the:
TRIP/W ARN LED will flash an amber 2 long and 1 short blink pattern, 76 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 Chapter 3 Protective Trip & Warning Functions
bit 0 in PW W arn Status, Parameter 228, will set to “1” , and bit 1 of Device Status, Parameter 21, will set to “1” .

UW W arn Level, Parameter 244, allows the installer to define the total real power in which the E3 Plus Overload Relay will indicate a warning and is adjustable from 0…32767.

Over Real Power Trip
The E3 Overload Relay will trip with an over real power indication if:
no trip currently exists,
Over Real Power protection is enabled,
OW Inhibit Time has expired, and
T otal Real Power is equal to or greater than OW T rip Level for a time period greater than the programmed OW T rip Delay.

When the over real power trip conditions are satisfied, the:
TRIP/W ARN LED will flash a red 2 long and 2 short blink pattern, bit 1 in PW T rip Status, Parameter 227, will set to “1” , bit 0 of Device Status, Parameter 21, will set to “1” , T rip Relay contact will be open, and
outputs will be placed in their Protection Fault state (if so programmed).

OW Inhibit Time, Parameter 245, allows the installer to inhibit an over real power trip from occurring during the motor starting sequence and is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.

OW T rip Delay, Parameter 246, allows the installer to define the time period an over real power condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.

OW T rip Level, Parameter 247, allows the installer to define the total real power in which the E3 Plus Overload Relay will trip. It is adjustable from 0…32767.

Over Real Power Warning
The E3 Overload Relay will immediately indicate an over real power warning condition if:
no warning currently exists,
Over Real Power W arning is enabled,
OW Inhibit Time has expired, and
T otal Real Power is equal to or greater than the OW W arn Level.

Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 77 Protective Trip & Warning Functions Chapter 3
When the over real power warning conditions are satisfied, the:
TRIP/W ARN LED will flash an amber 2 long and 2 short blink pattern, bit 1 in PW W arn Status, Parameter 228, will set to “1” , and bit 1 of Device Status, Parameter 21, will set to “1” .

OW W arn Level, Parameter 248, allows the installer to define the total real power in which the E3 Plus Overload Relay will indicate a warning and is adjustable from 0…32767.

Reactive Power (kVAR)
Protection
The E3 Plus model EC5 has the capability to protect against reactive power (kVAR) for specific applications that require the monitoring of the reactive component of voltage and current. The user can protect or issue a warning in the event that the reactive power (kVAR) consumption or generation from an electric motor is either too high or too low. This protection can be used with synchronous motors or motors that have an active Power Factor correction capacitor.

Under Reactive Power Consumed Trip
The E3 Overload Relay will trip with an under reactive power consumed indication if:
no trip currently exists,
Under Reactive Power Consumed protection is enabled,
UVARC Inhibit Time has expired, and
T otal Reactive Power is equal to or less than UV ARC T rip Level for a time period greater than the programmed UVARC T rip Delay.

When the under real power trip conditions are satisfied, the:

TRIP/W ARN LED will flash a red 2 long and 3 short blink pattern, bit 2 in PW T rip Status, Parameter 227, will set to “1” , bit 0 of Device Status, Parameter 21, will set to “1” , T rip Relay contact will be open, and
outputs will be placed in their Protection Fault state (if so programmed).

UVARC Inhibit Time, Parameter 249, allows the installer to inhibit an under reactive power consumed trip from occurring during the motor starting sequence and is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.
78 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 Chapter 3 Protective Trip & Warning Functions
UVARC T rip Delay, Parameter 250, allows the installer to define the time period an under reactive power consumed condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.

UVARC T rip Level, Parameter 251, allows the installer to define the total reactive power consumed in which the E3 Plus Overload Relay will trip. It is adjustable from 0…32767.

Under Reactive Power Consumed Warning
The E3 Overload Relay will immediately indicate an under reactive power consumed warning condition if:
no warning currently exists,
Under Reactive Power Consumed W arning is enabled,
UV ARC Inhibit Time has expired, and
T otal Reactive Power is equal to or less than the UVARC W arn Level.

When the under reactive power consumed warning conditions are satisfied, the:

TRIP/W ARN LED will flash an amber 2 long and 3 short blink pattern, bit 2 in PW W arn Status, Parameter 228, will set to “1” , and bit 1 of Device Status, Parameter 21, will set to “1” .

UVARC W arn Level, Parameter 252, allows the installer to define the total reactive power consumed in which the E3 Plus Overload Relay will indicate a warning and is adjustable from 0…32767.

Over Reactive Power Consumed Trip
The E3 Overload Relay will trip with an over reactive consumed power indication if:
no trip currently exists,
Over Reactive Power Consumed protection is enabled,
OVARC Inhibit Time has expired, and
T otal Reactive Power is equal to or greater than OVARC T rip Level for a time period greater than the programmed OVARC T rip Delay.

When the over reactive power consumed trip conditions are satisfied, the:
TRIP/W ARN LED will flash a red 2 long and 4 short blink pattern, bit 3 in PW T rip Status, Parameter 227, will go to “1” , bit 0 of Device Status, Parameter 21, will go to “1” , T rip Relay contact will be open, and
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 79 Protective Trip & Warning Functions Chapter 3
outputs will be placed in their Protection Fault state (if so programmed).

OVARC Inhibit Time, Parameter 253, allows the installer to inhibit an over reactive power consumed trip from occurring during the motor starting sequence and is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.

OVARC T rip Delay, Parameter 254, allows the installer to define the time period an over reactive power consumed condition must be present before a trip occurs.

It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.

OVARC T rip Level, Parameter 255, allows the installer to define the total reactive power consumed in which the E3 Plus Overload Relay will trip. It is adjustable from 0…32767.

Over Reactive Power Consumed Warning
The E3 Overload Relay will immediately indicate an over real power warning condition if:
no warning currently exists,
Over Reactive Power Consumed W arning is enabled,
OVARC Inhibit Time has expired, and
T otal Reactive Power is equal to or greater than the OVARC W arn Level.

When the over reactive power consumed warning conditions are satisfied, the:
TRIP/W ARN LED will flash an amber 2 long and 4 short blink pattern, bit 3 in PW W arn Status, Parameter 228, will set to “1” , bit 1 of Device Status, Parameter 21, will go set “1” OVARC W arn Level, Parameter 256, allows the installer to define the total reactive power consumed in which the E3 Plus Overload Relay will indicate a warning and is adjustable from 0…32767.

Under Reactive Power Generated Trip
The E3 Overload Relay will trip with an under reactive power generated indication if:
no trip currently exists,
Under Reactive Power Generated protection is enabled, UV ARG Inhibit Time has expired, and
T otal Reactive Power is equal to or less than UVARG T rip Level for a time period greater than the programmed UV ARG T rip Delay.

When the under reactive power trip conditions are satisfied, the:
TRIP/W ARN LED will flash a red 2 long and 5 short blink pattern, 80 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 Chapter 3 Protective Trip & Warning Functions
bit 4 in PW T rip Status, Parameter 227, will set to “1” , bit 0 of Device Status, Parameter 21, will go to “1” , T rip Relay contact will be open, and
outputs will be placed in their Protection Fault state (if so programmed).

UVARG Inhibit Time, Parameter 257, allows the installer to inhibit an under reactive power generated trip from occurring during the motor starting sequence and is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.

UVARG T rip Delay, Parameter 258, allows the installer to define the time period an under reactive power generated condition must be present before a trip occurs.

It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.

UVARG T rip Level, Parameter 259, allows the installer to define the total reactive power generated in which the E3 Plus Overload Relay will trip. It is adjustable from -32767 …0.

Under Reactive Power Generated Warning
The E3 Overload Relay will immediately indicate an under reactive power generated warning condition if:
no warning currently exists,
Under Reactive Power generated W arning is enabled,
UV ARG Inhibit Time has expired, and
T otal Reactive Power is equal to or less than the UVARG W arn Level.

When the under reactive power generated warning conditions are satisfied, the following will occur:
TRIP/W ARN LED will flash an amber 2 long and 5 short blink pattern, bit 4 in PW W arn Status, Parameter 228, will set to “1” , and bit 1 of Device Status, Parameter 21, will set to “1” .

UVARG W arn Level, Parameter 260, allows the installer to define the total reactive power generated in which the E3 Plus Overload Relay will indicate a warning and is adjustable from -32767…0.

Over Reactive Power Generated Trip
The E3 Overload Relay will trip with an over reactive power generated indication if:
no trip currently exists,
Over Reactive Power Generated protection is enabled,
OVARG Inhibit Time has expired, and
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 81 Protective Trip & Warning Functions Chapter 3
T otal Reactive Power is equal to or greater than OVARG T rip Level for a time period greater than the programmed OVARG T rip Delay.

When the over reactive power generated trip conditions are satisfied, the:
bit 5 in PW T rip Status, Parameter 227, will set to “1” , bit 0 of Device Status, Parameter 21, will set to “1” , T rip relay contact will be open, and
outputs will be placed in their Protection Fault state (if so programmed).

OVARG Inhibit Time, Parameter 261, allows the installer to inhibit an over reactive power generated trip from occurring during the motor starting sequence and is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.

OVARG T rip Delay, Parameter 262, allows the installer to define the time period an over reactive power generated condition must be present before a trip occurs.

It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.

OVARG T rip Level, Parameter 263, allows the installer to define the total reactive power generated in which the E3 Plus Overload Relay will trip. It is adjustable from -32767 …0.

Over Reactive Power Generated Warning
The E3 Overload Relay will immediately indicate an over reactive generated power warning condition if:
no warning currently exists,
Over Reactive Power Generated W arning is enabled,
OVARG Inhibit Time has expired, and
T otal Reactive Power is equal to or greater than the OVARG W arn Level.

When the over reactive power generated warning conditions are satisfied, the:
TRIP/W ARN LED will flash an amber 2 long and 6 short blink pattern, bit 5 in PW W arn Status, Parameter 228, will set to “1” , and bit 1 of Device Status, Parameter 21, will set to “1” .

OVARG W arn Level, Parameter 264, allows the installer to define the total reactive power generated in which the E3 Plus Overload Relay will indicate a warning and is adjustable from -32767…0.

Apparent Power (kVA)
Protection
The E3 Plus Model EC5 has the capability to protect against apparent power (kVA) for specific applications that require the monitoring of both voltage and current. The user can protect or issue a warning in the event that the apparent power (kVA) consumption of an electric motor is either too high or too low. 82 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 Chapter 3 Protective Trip & Warning Functions
Under Apparent Power Trip
The E3 Overload Relay will trip with an under apparent power indication if:
no trip currently exists,
Under Apparent Power protection is enabled,
UV A Inhibit Time has expired, and
T otal Apparent Power is equal to or less than UVA T rip Level for a time period greater than the programmed UVA T rip Delay.

When the under apparent power trip conditions are satisfied, the:
TRIP/W ARN LED will flash a red 2 long and 7 short blink pattern, bit 6 in Parameter 227, PW T rip Status, will set to “1” , bit 0 of Parameter 21, Device Status, will set to “1” , T rip Relay contact will be open, and
outputs will be placed in their Protection Fault state (if so programmed).

UVA Inhibit Time, Parameter 265, allows the installer to inhibit an under apparent power trip from occurring during the motor starting sequence and is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.

UVA T rip Delay, Parameter 266, allows the installer to define the time period an under apparent power condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.

UVA T rip Level, Parameter 267, allows the installer to define the total apparent power in which the E3 Plus Overload Relay will trip. It is adjustable from 0…32767.

Under Apparent Power Warning
The E3 Overload Relay will immediately indicate an under apparent power warning condition if:
no warning currently exists,
Under Apparent Power W arning is enabled,
UV A Inhibit Time has expired, and
T otal Apparent Power is equal to or less than the UVA W arn Level.

When the under apparent power warning conditions are satisfied, the:
TRIP/W ARN LED will flash an amber 2 long and 7 short blink pattern, bit 6 in PW W arn Status, Parameter 228, will go to “1” , and bit 1 of Device Status, Parameter 21, will go to “1” .

Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 83 Protective Trip & Warning Functions Chapter 3
UVA W arn Level, Parameter 268, allows the installer to define the total apparent power in which the E3 Plus Overload Relay will indicate a warning and is adjustable from 0…32767.

Over Apparent Power Trip
The E3 Overload Relay will trip with an over apparent power indication if:
no trip currently exists,
Over Apparent Power protection is enabled,
OVA Inhibit Time has expired, and
T otal Apparent Power is equal to or greater than OVA T rip Level for a time period greater than the programmed OV A T rip Delay.

When the over apparent power trip conditions are satisfied, the:
TRIP/W ARN LED will flash a red 2 long and 8 short blink pattern, bit 7 in PW T rip Status, Parameter 227, will go to “1” , bit 0 of Device Status, Parameter 21, will go to “1” , T rip Relay contact will be open, and
outputs will be placed in their Protection Fault state (if so programmed).

OVA Inhibit Time, Parameter 269, allows the installer to inhibit an over apparent power trip from occurring during the motor starting sequence and is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.

OVA T rip Delay, Parameter 270, allows the installer to define the time period an over apparent power condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.

OVA T rip Level, Parameter 271, allows the installer to define the total apparent power in which the E3 Plus Overload Relay will trip. It is adjustable from 0…32767.

Over Apparent Power Warning
The E3 Overload Relay will immediately indicate an over apparent power warning condition if:
no warning currently exists,
Over Apparent Power W arning is enabled,
OVA Inhibit Time has expired, and
T otal Apparent Power is equal to or greater than the OVA W arn Level.

When the over apparent power warning conditions are satisfied, the:
TRIP/W ARN LED will flash an amber 2 long and 8 short blink pattern, 84 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 Chapter 3 Protective Trip & Warning Functions
bit 7 in PW W arn Status, Parameter 228, will go to “1” , and bit 1 of Device Status, Parameter 21, will go to “1” .

OVA W arn Level, Parameter 272, allows the installer to define the total apparent power in which the E3 Plus Overload Relay will indicate a warning and is adjustable from 0…32767.

Power Factor Protection The E3 Plus model EC5 has the capability to protect against power factor (PF) for specific applications that require the monitoring the phase angle difference between voltage and current. The user can protect or issue a warning in the event that the power factor for an electric motor is either too high or too low for both leading and lagging applications.

Under Power Factor Lagging Trip
The E3 Overload Relay will trip with an under power factor lagging indication if:
no trip currently exists,
Under Power Factor Lagging protection is enabled,
UPFLG Inhibit Time has expired, and
T otal PF is equal to or less than UPFLG T rip Level for a time period greater than the programmed UPFLG T rip Delay
When the under power factor lagging trip conditions are satisfied, the:
TRIP/W ARN LED will flash a red 2 long and 9 short blink pattern, bit 8 in PW T rip Status, Parameter 227, will set to “1” , bit 0 of Device Status, Parameter 21, will set to “1” , T rip Relay contact will be open, and
outputs will be placed in their Protection Fault state (if so programmed).

UPFLG Inhibit Time, Parameter 273, allows the installer to inhibit an under power factor lagging trip from occurring during the motor starting sequence and is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.

UPFLG T rip Delay, Parameter 274, allows the installer to define the time period an under power factor lagging condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.

UPFLG T rip Level, Parameter 275, allows the installer to define the total power factor lagging in which the E3 Plus Overload Relay will trip. It is adjustable from 0…32767.

Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 85 Protective Trip & Warning Functions Chapter 3
Under Power Factor Lagging Warning
The E3 Overload Relay will immediately indicate an under power factor lagging warning condition if:
no warning currently exists,
Under Power Factor Lagging W arning is enabled,
UPFLG Inhibit Time has expired, and
T otal PF is equal to or less than the UPFLG W arn Level.

When the under power factor lagging warning conditions are satisfied, the:
TRIP/W ARN LED will flash an amber 2 long and 9 short blink pattern, bit 8 in PW W arn Status, Parameter 228, will go to “1” , and bit 1 of Device Status, Parameter 21, will go to “1” .

UPFLG W arn Level, Parameter 276, allows the installer to define the total power factor lagging in which the E3 Plus Overload Relay will indicate a warning and is adjustable from 0…32767.

Over Power Factor Lagging Trip
The E3 Overload Relay will trip with an over power factor lagging indication if:
no trip currently exists,
Over Power Factor Lagging protection is enabled,
OPFLG Inhibit Time has expired, and
T otal PF is equal to or greater than OPFLG T rip Level for a time period greater than the programmed OPFLG T rip Delay.

When the over power factor lagging trip conditions are satisfied, the:
TRIP/W ARN LED will flash a red 2 long and 10 short blink pattern bit 9 in PW T rip Status, Parameter 227, will set to “1” , bit 0 of Device Status, Parameter 21, will set to “1” , T rip Relay contact will be open, and
outputs will be placed in their Protection Fault state (if so programmed).

OPFLG Inhibit Time, Parameter 277, allows the installer to inhibit an over power factor lagging trip from occurring during the motor starting sequence and is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.

OPFLG T rip Delay, Parameter 278, allows the installer to define the time period an over power factor lagging condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
86 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 Chapter 3 Protective Trip & Warning Functions
OPFLG T rip Level, Parameter 279, allows the installer to define the total power factor lagging in which the E3 Plus Overload Relay will trip. It is adjustable from 0…32767.

Over Power Factor Lagging Warning
The E3 Overload Relay will immediately indicate an over power factor lagging warning condition if:
no warning currently exists,
Over Power Factor Lagging W arning is enabled,
OPFLG Inhibit Time has expired, and
T otal PF is equal to or greater than the OPFLG W arn Level.

When the over power factor lagging warning conditions are satisfied, the:
TRIP/W ARN LED will flash an amber 2 long and 10 short blink pattern, bit 9 in PW W arn Status, Parameter 228, will go to “1” , and bit 1 of Device Status, Parameter 21, will go to “1” .

OPFLG W arn Level, Parameter 280, allows the installer to define the total power factor lagging in which the E3 Plus Overload Relay will indicate a warning and is adjustable from 0…32767.

Under Power Factor Leading Trip
The E3 Overload Relay will trip with an under power factor leading indication if:

No trip currently exists
Under Power Factor Leading protection is enabled
UPFLD Inhibit Time has expired
T otal PF is equal to or less than UPFLD T rip Level for a time period greater than the programmed UPFLD T rip Delay
When the under power factor leading trip conditions are satisfied, the:
TRIP/W ARN LED will flash a red 2 long and 11 short blink pattern, bit 10 in PW T rip Status, Parameter 227, will set to “1” , bit 0 of Device Status, Parameter 21, will set to “1” , T rip Relay contact will be open, and
outputs will be placed in their Protection Fault state (if so programmed).

Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 87 Protective Trip & Warning Functions Chapter 3
UPFLD Inhibit Time, Parameter 281, allows the installer to inhibit an under power factor leading trip from occurring during the motor starting sequence and is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.

UPFLD T rip Delay, Parameter 282, allows the installer to define the time period an under power factor leading condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.

UPFLD T rip Level, Parameter 283, allows the installer to define the total power factor leading in which the E3 Plus Overload Relay will trip. It is adjustable from 0…32767.

Under Power Factor Leading Warning
The E3 Overload Relay will immediately indicate an under power factor leading warning condition if:
no warning currently exists,
Under Power Factor Leading W arning is enabled,
UPFLD Inhibit Time has expired, and
T otal PF is equal to or less than the UPFLD W arn Level.

When the under power factor leading warning conditions are satisfied, the:
TRIP/W ARN LED will flash an amber 2 long and 11 short blink pattern, bit 10 in PW W arn Status, Parameter 228, will set to “1” , and bit 1 of Device Status, Parameter 21, will set to “1” .

UPFLD W arn Level, Parameter 284, allows the installer to define the total power factor leading in which the E3 Plus Overload Relay will indicate a warning and is adjustable from 0…32767.

Over Power Factor Leading Trip
The E3 Overload Relay will trip with an over power factor leading indication if:
no trip currently exists,
Over Power Factor Leading protection is enabled,
OPFLD Inhibit Time has expired, and
T otal PF is equal to or greater than OPFLD T rip Level for a time period greater than the programmed OPFLD T rip Delay.

When the over power factor leading trip conditions are satisfied, the:
TRIP/W ARN LED will flash a red 2 long and 12 short blink pattern, 88 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 Chapter 3 Protective Trip & Warning Functions
bit 11 in Parameter 227, PW T rip Status, will set to “1” , bit 0 of Parameter 21, Device Status, will set to “1” , T rip Relay contact will be open, and
The outputs will be placed in their Protection Fault state (if so programmed).

OPFLD Inhibit Time, Parameter 285, allows the installer to inhibit an over power factor leading trip from occurring during the motor starting sequence and is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.

OPFLD T rip Delay, Parameter 286, allows the installer to define the time period an over power factor leading condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.

OPFLD T rip Level, Parameter 287, allows the installer to define the total power factor leading in which the E3 Plus Overload Relay will trip. It is adjustable from 0…32767.

Over Power Factor Leading Warning
The E3 Overload Relay will immediately indicate an over power factor leading warning condition if:
no warning currently exists,
Over Power Factor Leading W arning is enabled,
OPFLD Inhibit Time has expired, and
T otal PF is equal to or greater than the OPFLD W arn Level.

When the over power factor leading warning conditions are satisfied, the:
TRIP/W ARN LED will flash an amber 2 long and 12 short blink pattern, bit 11 in PW W arn Status, Parameter 228, will set to “1” , and bit 1 of Device Status, Parameter 21, will set to “1” .

OPFLD W arn Level, Parameter 288, allows the installer to define the total power factor leading in which the E3 Plus Overload Relay will indicate a warning and is adjustable from 0…32767.

Protective Trip & Warning
Summary
The following tables provide a summary of protective trips and protective warnings.

Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 89 Protective Trip & Warning Functions Chapter 3
Table 22 - Protective Trip Summary
Function Factory Default
Trip Level Trip Delay Inhibit Time ➊
Range Default Range Default Range Default
Overload
Enabled
➋ Trip Class
5…30
Trip Class
10 Phase Loss ➌ 0.1…25.0 s 1.0 s 0…250 s 0 s
Ground Fault (193/592-EC2)
Disabled
Internal 1…5 A 2.5 A 0.0…25.0 s 0.5 s 0…250 s 10 s
Ground Fault (193/592-EC3) External 0.02…5 A ➍ 2.5 A 0.0…25.0 s 0.5 s 0…250 s 10 s Stall 100…600% ➎ 600% ➎ 0…250 s ➎ 10 s ➎
Jam 50…600% 250% 0.1…25.0 s 5.0 s 0…250 s 10 s
Underload 10…100% FLA ➏ 50% 0.1…25.0 s 5.0 s 0…250 s 10 s PTC
Current Imbalance 10…100% 35% 0.1…25.0 s 5.0 s 0…250 s 10 s Comm Fault Enabled
Comm Idle
Disabled
Remote Trip
Voltage Input Module
Hardware Fault ➐
Undervoltage L-L ➐ 0...65535 100

0.1…25.0 s 1.0 s
0…250 s 10 s
Overvoltage L-L ➐ 0...65535 500
Voltage Unbalance ➐ 0…100 75
Phase Rotation ➐ 1…2 1
Under Frequency ➐ 0…250 57

0.1…25.0 s 1.0 s
Over Frequency ➐ 0…250 63
Under Real Power ➐
0…32767
Over Real Power ➐
Under Consumed kVAR ➐
Over Consumed kVAR ➐
Under Generated kVAR ➐ -32767…0
Over Generated kVAR ➐ -32767…0
Under Power kVA ➐ 0…32767
Over Power kVA ➐ 0…32767
Under Power Factor Lagging ➐ -100…0 -90
Over Power Factor Lagging ➐ -100…0 -95
Under Power Factor Leading ➐ 0...100 90
Over Power Factor Leading ➐ 0...100 95
➊ The inhibit time setting parameters are applicable to both the trip and warning functions. ➋ FLA Setting range and default values are dependent upon the current rating of the product. See the user manual for more information. ➌ Phase loss trip level is factory-set at a current imbalance greater than or equal to 100% and is not user-adjustable. ➍ Must use Ground Fault Sensors (Catalog Number 193-CBCT_). ➎ Stall protection is only applicable during the motor starting sequence. If any phase of current falls below the programmed Stall Trip Level, stall protection is disabled.
➏ 50…100% for devices with FRN 1.003 and earlier.
➐ Available on 193/592-EC5 only.
90 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 Chapter 3 Protective Trip & Warning Functions
Table 23 - Protective Warning Summary
Function
Factory
Default
Warning Level Inhibit Time ➊
Range Default Range Default
Overload Disabled 0…100% ➋ 85%
Phase Loss
Ground Fault (193/592-EC2) Di sabled Internal 1…5 A

2.0 A 0…250 s 10 s
Ground Fault (193/592-EC3) External 0.02…5 A ➌
Stall
Jam Disabled 50…600% 150%
0…250 s 10 s
Underload 10…100% ➍ 70%
Thermistor (PTC)
Current Imbalance 10…100% 20% 0…250 s 10 s
Comm Fault
Comm Idle
Voltage Input Module
Hardware Fault ➎
Enabled
Under Voltage L-L ➎ Disabled

0...65535 400
0…250 s 10 s
Over Voltage L-L ➎
Voltage Unbalance ➎ 0…100 85
Phase Rotation ➎ 1…2 1
Under Frequency ➎
0…250
58 Over Frequency ➎ 62
Under Real Power ➎
0…32767
Over Real Power ➎
Under Consumed kVAR ➎
Over Consumed kVAR ➎
Under Generated kVAR ➎
-32767…0
Over Generated kVAR ➎
Under Power kVA ➎
0…32767
Over Power kVA ➎
Under Power Factor Lagging ➎
-100…0
-95
Over Power Factor Lagging ➎ -90
Under Power Factor Leading ➎

0...100
95 Over Power Factor Leading ➎ 90
➊ The inhibit time setting parameters are applicable to both the trip and warning functions. ➋ Overload warning setting is entered as a percentage of the thermal capacity utilized. ➌ Must use Ground Fault Sensors (Catalog Number 193-CBCT_). ➍ 50…100% for devices with FRN 1.003 and earlier.
➎ Available on 193/592-EC5 only.

Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 91 Protective Trip & Warning Functions Chapter 3
Preventive Maintenance
Diagnostics (E3 Overload
Relays Series C & Later)
The purpose of this section is to provide detailed information regarding the Preventive Maintenance Diagnostic functions of the E3 Overload Relays Series C and Later. In this section programming and monitoring parameters as they relate to these functions will be discussed. For complete descriptions of the programming parameters, Refer to Programmable Parameters on page 105.

Monitoring
Elapsed Time, Parameter 95, logs the hours of motor operation — the time period that the E3 Overload Relay is sensing motor current present (must be greater than 30% of the minimum Full Load Current (FLA) setting).

Starts Counter, Parameter 96, logs the number of starts — the number of times motor current transitions from zero to a reported non-zero value (motor current must be greater than 30% of the minimum Full Load Current (FLA) setting).

Start Inhibit
This protective function allows the installer to limit the number of starts in a given time period. A start is defined as the E3 Overload Relay sensing a transition in current from zero to a reported non-zero value (motor current must be greater than 30% of the minimum Full Load Current (FLA) setting). The Start Inhibit protective function can be set by: Starts/Hour and/or Starts Interval.

Start Inhibit Trip
The E3 Overload Relay will trip with a Blocked Start indication upon motor stopping when:
no trip currently exists,
Start Inhibit is enabled,
the number of starts count within the past hour period equals the value set in the Starts/Hour parameter, or
the time expired since the most recent start is less than the value set in the Starts Interval parameter.

If the E3 Overload Relay trips on a Blocked Start, the:
TRIP/W ARN LED will flash a red 16-blink pattern,
bit 15 in T rip Status, Parameter 14, will set to “1” , bit 0 in Device Status, Parameter 21, will set to “1” , T rip Relay contact will be open, and
IMPORTANT The E3 Overload Relay will report 0 A or 0% FLA if the current is below 30% of the minimum FLA setting.
92 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 Chapter 3 Protective Trip & Warning Functions
outputs will be placed in their Protection Fault state (if so programmed).

Starts/Hour, Parameter 99, allows the installer to limit the number of starts per hour. It is adjustable from 1…120.

Starts Interval, Parameter 100, allows the installer to limit the time between starts. It is adjustable from 0…3600 seconds.

Starts Available, Parameter 97, reports the number of starts currently available based on the Start Inhibit settings and the actual motor starting events.

Time to Start, Parameter 98, reports the amount of the time remaining until a new start can be effected. If the Time to Start time has elapsed, it will report zero until the next Blocked Start trip occurs.

Preventive Maintenance Flags
The E3 Overload Relay offers preventive maintenance flags in the W arning Status parameter based on the number of start cycles or the number of operating hours (motor current must be greater than 30% of the minimum Full Load Current (FLA) setting). These can be used to send the user a warning message that the number of starts or number of operating hours has been reached and that it is time to perform preventive maintenance. The preventive maintenance warning function can be set by PM - # Starts and/or PM – Oper. Hours.

PM - # Starts, Parameter 101, allows the installer to set a number of starts. It is adjustable from 0…65,535.

The E3 Overload Relay will give a PM - # Starts warning indication when:
PM - # Starts warning is enabled and
Starts Counter parameter is equal to or greater than the value set in the PM - # Starts parameter.

Upon a PM - # Starts warning , the:
TRIP/W ARN LED will flash an amber 14-blink pattern,
bit 13 in W arning Status, Parameter 15, will set to “1” , and bit 1 in Device Status, Parameter 21, will set to “1” .

Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 93 Protective Trip & Warning Functions Chapter 3
PM – Oper. Hours, Parameter 102, allows the installer to set a number of hours of operation. It is adjustable from 0…65,565 hours.

The E3 Overload Relay will give a PM – Oper. Hours warning indication when:
PM – Oper. Hours warning is enabled, and
Elapsed Time parameter is equal to or greater than the value set in the PM – Oper. Hours parameter.

Upon a PM – Oper. Hours warning, the:
TRIP/W ARN LED will flash an amber 15-blink pattern,
bit 14 in W arning Status, Parameter 15, will set to “1” , and bit 1 in Device Status, Parameter 21, will set to “1” .

Queue Clearing
Using the Clear Queue, Parameter 104, the E3 Overload Relay provides the capability to simultaneously clear/reset the:
T rip Logs, Parameters 16…20,
W arning Logs, Parameters 90…94,
Starts Counter, Parameter 96, and the
Elapsed Time Parameter 95.

If using the Preventative Maintenance Flags, the user will want to reset the Starts Count and Elapsed Time after preventative maintenance has been performed. 94 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 Chapter 3 Protective Trip & Warning Functions
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 95 Chapter 4
DeviceNet™ Node Commissioning
Introduction E3 Overload Relays are shipped with a default software node address (MAC ID) setting of 63 and the data rate set to Autobaud. Each device on a DeviceNet network must have a unique node address which can be set to a value from 0 to

63. Keep in mind that most DeviceNet systems use address 0 for the master device (Scanner) and node address 63 should be left vacant for introduction of new slave devices. The node address and data rate for Series B and later E3 Overload Relays can be changed using software or by setting the hardware switches that reside on the front of each unit. While both methods yield the same result, it is a good practice to choose one method and deploy it throughout the system.

Setting the Hardware Switches (Series B & Later)
Use the following steps to commission the card.

1. Set the node address switches. Use the table below to assist you.

IMPORTANT The following recommendations are intended to ensure a trouble-free startup and operation:
Use the node commissioning tool in RSNetWorx™ or the E3 programming and control terminal when modifying the E3 Overload Relay’s node address. Do not use the “General” tab found in the product window in RSNetWorx. The node commissioning tool ensures that the device goes through a hard reset and requires the user to upload the most current parameter information from the device prior to making configuration changes.
Ensure that you have the most current configuration information prior to saving a RSNetWorx configuration file.
If you intend to employ the automatic device recovery (ADR) function of the DeviceNet scanner, ensure that the device configuration is as you intend it before saving to memory.
Be aware that the “Restore Device Defaults” button in RSNetWorx will reset the E3 Overload Relay’s node address setting to 63. For Series B and later devices, the hardware node address switches take precedence over the software node address setting.
96 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 Chapter 4 DeviceNet™ Node Commissioning
Table 24 - Node Address Settings

2. For node address switch values in the range of 0 to 63, cycle power to the E3 Overload Relay to initialize the new setting.

Using RSNetWorx for DeviceNet
Follow these additional steps for node address switch settings in the range of 64…99. T o begin the configuration of an E3 Overload Relay using software, execute the RSNetW orx software and complete the following procedure. Y ou must use RSNetW orx Revision 3.21 Service Pack 2 or later.

Recognizing the E3 Overload Relay Online

1. Launch the RSNetW orx software, then select Online from the Network drop-down menu.

2. Select the appropriate DeviceNet PC interface, then click OK.

3. If the RSNetW orx software gives notification to upload or download devices before viewing configuration, click OK to upload or download these devices.

4. RSNetW orx now browses the network and displays all of the nodes it has detected on the network. For some versions of RSNetW orx software, the E3 Overload Relay Series B and Later EDS files may not be included. In this event, the device will be identified as an “Unrecognized Device” .

Node Address Switches
Node Address
Setting Determined By:
0…63 the switch values wh en set in this range.
64…99
the software setting using the RSNetWorx
for DeviceNet configuration tool.
99 99 is the default factory setting.

IMPORTANT Resetting an E3 Overload Relay to factory default values will also effect the node address setting for node address switch settings of 64 to 99.

TIP DeviceNet drivers must be configured using RSLinx prior to being available to RSNetWorx.
8 2
46 MSD
8 2
46 LSD
@
@
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 97 DeviceNet™ Node Commissioning Chapter 4

5. If RSNetW orx software recognizes the device as an E3 Overload Relay, skip ahead to the following section – Using the Node Commissioning T ool of RSNetW orx for DeviceNet.

Building and Registering an EDS File
The EDS file defines how RSNetW orx for DeviceNet will communicate to the E3 Overload Relay. The EDS file can be created over the DeviceNet network or downloaded from the Internet.

Perform the following steps to build and register the EDS file.

1. Right-click the Unrecognized Device icon. The Register Device menu appears.

2. Select Y es. The EDS Wizard will appear.

3. Select Next, then Create an ESD File.

4. Select Next.

5. Select Upload EDS.

6. Select Next. The EDS Wizard screen appears:.

TIP If the screen appears as shown below , continue with Building and Registering an EDS file.

TIP Node Commissioning can also be accomplished by using the DeviceNet Configuration Terminal, Cat. No. 193-DNCT.NOTE: If you are using DeviceLogix functionality, you must download the EDS file from www.ab.com/networks/eds.
f l'"W~
. ,
to ...
98 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 Chapter 4 DeviceNet™ Node Commissioning

7. OPTIONAL STEP: T ype a value in the Catalog and File Description T ext fields., then select Next.

8. On the Input/Output Screen in the EDS Wizard, select the Polled checkbox, then enter a value of 8 for Input and 1 for output as shown below.

9. Select Next. The RSNetW orx will upload the EDS file from the E3 Overload Relay.

10. Select Next to display the icon options for the node.

11. Select the E3 Overload Relay icon, then click Change Icon.

12. Select OK after selecting the desired icon.

13. Select Next.

14. Select Next when prompted to register this device.

15. Select Finish.

Rockwell Soflware's EDS 'W'tzard
Device D esc riplion
Enter the device's identification information.

Device Identity
Vendor ID 1,
Product Type 13
Product Code 132
Major Revision 132
Minor Revision 1,
File Descri tion T e:-it
Vendor Name
IRockwellAutomation Allen·Bradley
Product Type String
!Motor Overload
Product Name
IE3 Plus (9-500(16.]
Catala
This is an EDS file created by Rockwell Software's EDS Installation Wizard. < Back I[ Ne:-it > -.-.J __ c_an_c_el ~
Rockwell Soflware's EDS 'W'1zard
lnp ul/O upul
Enter the device's input/output type and sizes.
r Strobed
Input Size: [o Output Size·
Input Size:
18 Output Size:
r cos
Input Size: [o Output Size:
r Cyclic
Input Size: [o Output Size [o
To continue enable at least one of the 1/0 characteristics < .B_ack Ne:-it > Cancel
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 99 DeviceNet™ Node Commissioning Chapter 4
After a short time, the RSNetW orx software updates the online screen by replacing Unrecognized Device with the name and icon given by the EDS file that you have just registered.

Using the Node Commissioning Tool of RSNetWorx for DeviceNet

1. Select Node Commissioning from the T ools drop-down menu.

2. Select Browse.

3. Select the E3 Overload Relay located at node 63.

4. Select OK.

NOTE: The Node Commissioning screen shows Current Device Settings entries completed. It will also provide the current network baud rate in the New E3 Overload Relay Settings area. Do not change the baud rate setting unless you are sure it must be changed.

D ev,ce Selection
r ! want to input the add1ess for the device on the selected network.
e,ddress: Io :B
.1.J~
OK
Cancel
P' Autobrowse I ISi elresh .=:.~JI-~'.'. Browsing· node 62 not found • .".: Workstation, USM KER NJA~ Address Device T e Online Nam ltl···i'o Lins Gateways, Etherne ~~.,,_- , -3~~w'- o-rk-st-a-tio~n---~---- ltl·i'o 1770-KFD-1, DeviceNet (J 63 E3 Plus [9-5000A]
El ·i'. 1784-PCD-1, DeviceNet ~
!·····!\ 1 3, w' orkslalion, US
L .(J 63, E3 Plus [9-500Cl<
.!.I ... ◄"-"--------... .!.I
100 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 Chapter 4 DeviceNet™ Node Commissioning

5. Type the node address that you want in the New Device Settings section.

In this example, the new node address is 5.

6. Select Apply.

7. Select Exit to close the Node Commissioning window.

8. Select Single Pass Browse from the Network drop-down menu to update the RSNetW orx software and verify that the node address is set correctly.

Produced and Consumed Assembly Configuration
The Input and Output Assembly format for the E3 Overload Relay is identified by the value in Output Assembly, Parameter 59, and Input Assembly, Parameter

60. These values determine the amount and arrangement of the information communicated to the master scanner.

NOTE: When the new node address has been successfully applied, the Current Device Settings section of the window is updated (see the example below). If an error occurs, check to see if the device is properly powered up and connected to the network.
.,. Node Comm1ssmnmg
Select a device by using the browsing service ~row se ...

Current E3 Plus (9-5000A) Settings-----------~
Add,ess: 5
Data Rate: 125 KB
New E3 Plus (9-5000A) Settings------------~
&
The network data rate should not be changed on an active network. The new network data rate will not take effect until power is recycled .
e,dd1essn
Qata ,ate I 125 kb .:J AQply
Messages
Node 05 was successfu lly commissioned.
!;lose !jelp
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 101 DeviceNet™ Node Commissioning Chapter 4
Figure 34 - I/O Assembly Settings
Selection of Input and Output Assemblies (a.k., Produced and Consumed Assemblies) define the format of I/O message data that is exchanged between the E3 Overload Relay and other devices on the network. The consumed information is generally used to command the state of the slave device’s outputs, and produced information typically contains the state of the inputs and the current fault status of the slave device.

The default Consumed and Produced Assemblies are shown in the tables below.

For additional formats, refer to Appendix B.

Table 25 - Instance 100 Parameter Based Input Assembly
Byte Words Value of Parameter Pointed to by Parameter
0 0 #61 Low Byte
1 #61 High Byte
2 1 #62 Low Byte
3 #62 High Byte
4 2 #63 Low Byte
5 #63 High Byte
6 3 #64 Low Byte
7 #64 High Byte
~\ E3 Plus (9-5000AJ
General Device Parameters I I10 Defaults I EDS File I DeviceLogis I Groups On-Line
I All par amelers ..:l r Single
!J.pload From Device
B_eslore Default Values I
.Q_ownload To Device
(o" All
Parameter Help ... I
~ tart Monitor
ID I till '!!:'I Parameter I Current Value
I
60 I npul Assembly 100
61 Assy WordO Par am 21
62 Assy Word1 Par am
63 Assy Word2 Par am
64 Assy Word3 Par am
65 0 utA Pr FltS late Go lo FIIValue
66 0 utA Pr FltValue Open
lJ 67 OutA Dn FltStale Go lo FIIValue
68 OutA Dn FltValue Open
69 OutA Dn ldlStale Go lo ldlValue
70 OutA Dn ldlValue Open
~ ◄ I I
OK Cancel ,l\pply Help
102 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 Chapter 4 DeviceNet™ Node Commissioning
Table 26 - Default Output Assemblies
Choosing the size and format of the I/O data that is exchanged by the E3 Overload Relay is done by selecting Input and Output Assembly instance numbers. Each assembly has a given size (in bytes). This instance number is written to the Input Assembly and Output Assembly parameters. The different instances/formats allow for user programming flexibility and network optimization.

Mapping the Scanner to the Scan List
The Automap feature available in all Rockwell Automation scanners automatically maps the information. If the default I/O assemblies are not used, the values must be changed in the scan list.

1. Select Edit I/O Parameters from the Scan List tab of the scanner. The following window appears.

2. Change the default I/O assemblies in the Polled section of the window, then select OK.

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Instance 103 E3
0 Remote Trip ➊ Fault Reset Out A
Instance 103 E3 Plus
0 Remote Trip ➊ Fault Reset Out B Out A
➊ Series C and later.

IMPORTANT The Output Assembly and Input Assembly parameter values cannot be changed while the E3 Overload Relay is online with a scanner. Any attempts to change the value of this parameter while online with a scanner will result in the error message “Object State Conflict”. e--.____________, - '------------'-~
Edit 1/0 Parameters A05. EJ Plus (9-5000AJ
~t_robedj -----=~
Input Size: I □ :±l sytes
l,[se Output Bit: r
.,. foiled: ------~
Input Size: 18 :±l sytes
.Qutput Size: n Bytes
Poll Bate: I Every Scan ..:.J
OK Cancel
J;;hange of State/ Cycli- ---~
r- U:hanJ;1e of State r C~clic
lnpuJ Size:
0 utpul S i~e:
18 :±l sytes
r"""":±l" sytes
H earlQeal Rate: 1250 :±J msec
e,deanced ...

R~store 1/0 Sizes
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 103 DeviceNet™ Node Commissioning Chapter 4
Commissioning the
Protection Functions
This section describes the use of RSNetW orx for DeviceNet to configure the function settings of the E3 Overload Relays. The product should now be configured and communicating on the network. The last step is to program the motor FLA Setting, Parameter# 28, and additional setting per the application requirements. This can be accomplished by using software such as RSNetW orx for DeviceNet or another handheld DeviceNet tool.

1. Using the RSNetW orx software, access the Device Parameters tab. The following window appears.

2. Type the desired setting values corresponding to the motor connected to the E3 Overload Relay.

3. Make sure the Single radio button is selected within On-Line, then select Download to Device.
'-\ ·E3 Plus (9-5000AJ
General Device Parameters I I1D Defaults I EDS File I DeviceLogix I Groups ~ On-Line
I All par amelers .:.I 1 Single
l[pload From Device
B estore Default Values I
Q. ownload To Device
C-- All
Par ameler Help ... I
.$. tart Monitor
ID I. !ill ~II Parameter I Current Value
60 Input Assembly 100
61 Assy \.II ordO Par am 21
62 Assy Word1 Par am
63 Assy \.II ord2 Par am 2
64 Assy \.II ord3 Par am 3
65 0 ulA Pr FltS tate Go to FIIValue
66 OulA Pr FltValue Open
J 67 0 ulA D n FIIS tate Go to FIIValue
68 0 ulA D n FltValue Open
69 0 ulA D n I dlS tate Go to ldr\ialue
70 OulA Dn ldr\ialue Open
£ ◄ I I
OK Cancel e,pply Help
104 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 Chapter 4 DeviceNet™ Node Commissioning
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 105 Chapter 5
Programmable Parameters
Introduction This chapter describes each programmable parameter and its function.

Programming Refer to Chapter 4 for instructions in using RS NetW orx for DeviceNet to modify parameter settings and Input and Output Assemblies.

Program Lock
Program Lock, Parameter 53, provides a degree of security from having parameter settings unintentionally altered when programmed to the “locked” setting.

Reset to Default Factory Settings
Set to Defaults, Parameter 54, allows the installer to reset all parameter settings (including trip logs) to the factory default values.

Parameter Group Listing The E3 Overload Relay can contain up to 13 parameter groups, depending on the model number and firmware revision. In this chapter, the following parameter groups will be discussed:

IMPORTANT Parameter setting changes downloaded to the E3 Overload Relay take effect immediately, even during a “running” status.

IMPORTANT Parameter setting changes made in a configuration tool, (e.g., RSNetWorx for DeviceNet) do not take effect in the E3 Overload Relay until the installer applies or downloads the new settings to the device.

IMPORTANT Resetting to factory default values also resets the E3 Overload Relay’s DeviceNet node address (MAC ID) to the default value of 63.• Monitor Group • Overload Setup
• Reset/Lock Groups
• Advanced Setup
• DeviceNet Setup
• Output Setup
• DeviceLogix Setup
106 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 Chapter 5 Programmable Parameters
Additional information on select parameter groups may be found in the upcoming chapters, as listed below.

Table 27 - Monitor Group
Table 28 - Overload Setup
• Monitor Group, Chapter 6
• Voltage Setup, Chapter 7
• Power Setup, Chapter 8
• Trip History, Chapter 9
• Snapshot Group, Chapter 9
Parameter Number Description Parameter Number Description 1 L1 Current 17 Trip Log 1
2 L2 Current 18 Trip Log 2
3 L3 Current 19 Trip Log 3
4 Average Current 20 Trip Log 4
5 L1 % FLA 21 Device Status
6L 2 % FLA 2 2 F irmware
7 L3 % FLA 23 Device Configuration
8 Average % FLA 90 Warning Log 0
➊
9 % Therm Utilized 91 Warning Log 1 ➊
10 GF Current 92 Warning Log 2 ➊
11 Current Imbalance 93 Warning Log 3 ➊
12 OL Time to Trip 94 Warning Log 4 ➊
13 OL Time to Reset 95 Elapsed Time ➊
14 Trip Status 96 Starts Counter ➊
15 Warning Status 97 Starts Available ➊
16 Trip Log 0 98 Time to Start ➊
➊ Series C (FRN 4.00 and higher)
Parameter Number Description Parameter Number Description 27 Single/Three Phase 30 OL /PTC Reset Mode
28 FLA Setting 31 O L Reset Ratio
29 Trip Class 78 CT Ratio
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 107 Programmable Parameters Chapter 5
Table 29 - Reset/Lock Group
Table 30 - Advanced Setup
Parameter Number Description Parameter Number Description 26 Trip Reset 294 Reset kVARh ➋
53 Program Lock 295 Reset kVAh ➋
54 Set to Defaults 296 Reset Max kW Dmnd ➋
103 Test Enable ➊ 297 Reset Max kVAR Dmnd ➋
104 Clear Queue ➊ 298 Reset Max kVA Dmnd ➋
293 Reset kWh ➋
➊ Series C (FRN 4.00 and higher) ➋ Catalog Numbers 193/592-EC5 only Parameter Number Description Parameter Number Description 24 Trip Enable 46 UL Trip Delay
25 Warning Enable 47 UL Trip Level
27 Single/Three Phase 48 UL Warn Level
28 FLA Setting 49 CL Inhibit Time
29 Trip Class 50 CL Trip Delay
30 OL/PTC Reset Mode 51 CL Trip Level
31 OL Reset Level 52 CL Warn Level
32 OL Warning Level 78 CT Ratio
33 PL Inhibit Time 83 IN 1 Assignment
34 PL Trip Delay 84 IN 2 Assignment
35 GF Inhibit Time 85 IN 3 Assignment
36 GF Trip Delay 86 IN 4 Assignment
37 GF Trip Level 87 2 Speed Net Enable
38 GF Warn Level 88 3-Speed Net Enable
39 Stall Enabled Time 89 GF Trip Inhibit
40 Stall Trip Level 99 Starts/Hour
➊
41 Jam Inhibit Time 100 Starts Interval ➊
42 Jam Trip Delay 101 PM - # Starts ➊
43 Jam Trip Level 102 PM - Operation Hours ➊
44 Jam Warn Level 105 GF Warn Delay ➊
45 UL Inhibit Time 106 GF Sensing Range ➊
➊ Series C (FRN 4.00 and higher)
108 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 Chapter 5 Programmable Parameters
Table 31 - DeviceNet Setup
Table 32 - Output Setup
Table 33 - DeviceLogix Group
Table 34 - Trip Warning History Group ➊
Parameter Number Description Parameter Number Description 55 AutoBaud Enable 61 Assembly Word 0 Parameter
56 NonVol Baud Rate 62 Assembly Word 1 Parameter
58 COS Mask 63 Assembly Word 2 Parameter
59 Output Assembly 64 Assembly Word 3 Parameter
60 Input Assembly
Parameter Number Description Parameter Number Description 65 OutA Pr Flt State 71 OutB Pr Flt State
66 OutA Pr Flt Value 72 OutB Pr Flt Value
67 OutA Pr DN State 7 3 OutB Pr DN State
68 OutA Pr DN Value 74 OutB Pr DN Value
69 OutA Pr IdlState 75 OutB Pr IdlState
70 OutA Pr Idl Value 76 OutB Pr Idl Value
Parameter Number Description Parameter Number Description 79 Comm Override 81 Net Outputs
80 Network Override 82 Net Out COS Mask
Parameter Number Description Parameter Number Description 132 Trip History 0 140 Warn History 3
133 Trip History 1 141 Warn History 4
134 Trip History 2 142 Trip History Mask
135 Trip History 3 143 Warn History Mask
136 Trip History 4 299 V Trip History Mask
137 Warn History 0 300 V Trip Warning History Mask
138 Warn History 1 301 PW Trip History Mask
139 Warn History 2 302 PW Warning History Mask
➊ Series C (FRN 5.00 and higher)
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 109 Programmable Parameters Chapter 5
Table 35 - Trip Snapshot ➊
Table 36 - Voltage Monitor ➊
Table 37 - Voltage Setup ➊
Parameter Number Description Parameter Number Description 144 SS L1 Current 150 SS L2-L3Voltage
145 SS L2 Current 151 SS L3-L1 Voltage
146 SS L3 Current 152 SS Total Real Power
147 SS %TCU 153 SS Total kVAR
148 SS GF Current 154 SS Total kVA
149 SS L1-L2 Voltage 155 SS Total PF
➊ Series C (FRN 5.00 and higher)
Parameter Number Description Parameter Number Description 160 V Trip Status 167 L2-N Voltage
161 V Warn Status 168 L3-N Voltage
162 L1-L2 Voltage 169 Ave Voltage L-N
163 L2-L3 Voltage 170 Voltage Unbalance
164 L3-L1 Voltage 171 Voltage Frequency
165 Ave Voltage L-L 172 V Phase Rot
166 L1-N Voltage
➊ 193/592-EC5 only
Parameter Number Description Parameter Number Description 156 Volt Mode 230 V Unbal Trip Delay
158 V Trip Enable 231 V Unbal Trip Level
159 V Warn Enable 232 V Unbal Warn Level
215 UV Inhibit Time 233 UF Inhibit Time
216 UV Trip Delay 234 UF Trip Delay
217 UV Trip Level 235 UF Trip Level
218 UV Warn Level 236 UF Warn Level
219 OV Inhibit Time 237 OF Inhibit Time
220 OV Trip Delay 238 OF Trip Delay
221 OV Trip Level 239 OF Trip Level
222 OV Warn Level 240 OF TWarn Level
223 Ph Rot Inhibit Time 289 PT Pri
224 Ph Rot Trip 290 PT Sec
229 V Unbal Inhibit Time
➊ 193/592-EC5 only
110 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 Chapter 5 Programmable Parameters
Table 38 - Power Monitor ➊
Parameter Number Description Parameter Number Description 173 L1 Real Power 195 kVARh Con 10E0
174 L2 Real Power 196 kVARh Con 10E-3
175 L3 Real Power 197 kVARh Gen 10E6
176 Total Real Power 198 kVARh Gen 10E3
177 L1 Reactive Power 199 kVARh Gen 10E0
178 L2 Reactive Power 200 kVARh Gen 10E-3
179 L3 Reactive Power 201 kVARh Net 10E6
180 Total Reactive Power 202 kVARh Net 10E3
181 L1 Apparent Power 203 kVARh Net 10E0
182 L2 Apparent Power 204 kVARh Net 10E-3
183 L3 Apparent Power 205 kVAh 10E6
184 Total Apparent Power 206 kVAh 10E3
185 L1 PF 207 kVAh 10E0
186 L2 PF 208 kVAh 10E-3
187 L3 PF 209 kW Demand
188 Total PF 210 Max kW Demand
189 kWh 10E6 211 VAR Demand
190 kWh 10E3 212 Max VAR Demand
191 kWh 10E0 213 VA Demand
192 kWh 10E-3 214 Max VA Demand
193 kVARh Con 10E6 227 PW Trip Status
194 kVARh Con 10E3 228 PW Warn Status
➊ 193/592-EC5 only
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 111 Programmable Parameters Chapter 5
Table 39 - Power Setup ➊
Overload Setup Group
The parameters contained in the Overload Setup Group are also contained within the Advanced Setup Group. Refer to Advanced Setup Group on page 114 for more detail on these parameters.

Parameter Number Description Parameter Number Description 157 Power Scale 265 UVA Inibit Time
225 PW Trip Enable 266 UVA Trip Delay
226 PW Warn Enable 267 UVA Trip Level
241 UW Inhibit Time 268 UVA Warn Level
242 UW Trip Delay 269 OVA Inhibit Time
243 UW Trip Level 270 OVA Trip Delay
244 UW Warn Level 271 OVA Trip Level
245 OW Inhibit Time 272 OVA Warn Level
246 OW Trip Delay 273 UPFLG Inhibit Time
247 OW Trip Level 274 UPFLG Trip Delay
248 OW Warn Level 275 UPFLG Trip Level
249 UVARC Inhibit Time 276 UPFLG Warn Level
250 UVARC Trip Delay 277 OPFLG Inhibit Time
251 UVARC Trip Level 278 OPFLG Trip Delay
252 UVARC Warn Level 279 OPFLG Trip Level
253 OVARC Inhibit Time 280 OPFLG Warn Level
254 OVARC Trip Delay 281 UPFLD Inhibit Time
255 OVARC Trip Level 282 UPFLD Trip Delay
256 OVARC Warn Level 283 UPFLD Trip Level
257 UVARG Inhibit Time 284 UPFLD Warn Level
258 UVARG Trip Delay 285 OPFLD Inhibit Time
259 UVARG Trip Level 286 OPFLD Trip Delay
260 UVARG Warn Level 287 OPFLD Trip Level
261 OVARG Inhibit Time 288 OPFLD Warn Level
262 OVARG Trip Delay 291 Demand Period
263 OVARG Trip Level 292 Number of Periods
264 OVARG Warn Level
➊ 193/592-EC5 only
112 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 Chapter 5 Programmable Parameters
Table 40 - Single/Three Phase & FLA Setting Parameters Detail Table 41 - FLA Setting Ranges & Default Values (with indicated setting precision)

SINGLE/THREE PH
This parameter allows the installer to
configure the E3 for single-phase or three-
phase mode. When set to single-phase
mode, the E3 will report L3 monitoring
parameters as 0 and only use L1 and L2 to
calculate Average, Imbalance, and total
monitoring parameters.

Parameter Number 27
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type BOOL
Object Mapping 2Chex-1-127
Group Overload Setup
Units —
Minimum Value 0 = Single Phase
Maximum Value 1 = Three Phase
Default Value 1

FLA SETTING
The motor’s full load current rating is
programmed in this parameter. Refer to
Chapter 3 for instructions related to service
factor, maximum continuous rated (MCR)
motors, and wye-delta (star-delta)
applications.

This parameter is used to program the low-
speed FLA value of a two-speed motor.

Parameter Number 28
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type UINT
Object Mapping 2Chex-1-225
2Chex-1-3
2Chex-1-224
Group Overload Setup
Units Amps
Minimum Value See Table 41
Maximum Value See Table 41
FLA Current Range (A)
Default Value CT Ratio Selection ➊Min Max

0.040 2.00 0.040 —

1.00 5.00 1.00 —

3.00 15.00 3.00 —

5.00 25.00 5.00 —

9.0 45.0 9.0 —

18.0 90.0 18.0 —
94 5 9 5 0 : 5
18 90 18 100:5
28 140 28 150:5
42 210 42 200:5
60 302 60 300:5
84 420 84 500:5
125 630 125 600:5
172 860 172 800:5
240 1215 240 1200:5
450 2250 450 2500:5
1000 5000 1000 5000:5
➊ Devices with an FLA setting range of 9…5000 A.

Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 113 Programmable Parameters Chapter 5
Table 42 - Other Overload Setup Group Parameters Detail

TRIP CLASS
The value in this parameter determines the
maximum time (in seconds) for an overload
trip to occur when the motor operating
current is six times its rated current.

Parameter Number 29
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type USINT
Object Mapping 2Chex-1-129
Group Overload Setup
Units —
Minimum Value 5
Maximum Value 30
Default Value 10

OL/PTC RESET MODE
This parameter defines whether an
Overload or PTC Trip can be automatically
or manually reset. Note: all other trips must
be manually reset.

Parameter Number 30
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type BOOL
Object Mapping 0x29-1-130
Group Overload Setup
Units —
Minimum Value 0 = Manual
Maximum Value 1 = Auto
Default Value 0

OL RESET LEVEL
The value in this parameter establishes
what the value stored in Parameter 9, %
Therm Utilized, must fall below before an
overload trip can be manually or
automatically reset.

Parameter Number 31
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type USINT
Object Mapping 0x29-1-131
Group Overload Setup
Units % (Thermal Utilization)
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 100
Default Value 75
CT RATIO ➊
This parameter defines the turns ratio of
the primary current transformers (when
used). See Table 41 - on page 5-112 for the
corresponding FLA setting ranges.

Parameter Number 78
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type USINT
Object Mapping 0x2-1-178
Group Overload Setup
Units —
Minimum Value 0 = 50:5
1 = 100:5
2 = 150:5
3 = 200:5
4 = 300:5
5 = 500:5
6 = 600:5
7 = 800:5
8 = 1200:5
9 = 2500:5
Maximum Value 10 = 5000:5
Default Value 0 = 50:5
➊ FRN 2.000 and later
114 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 Chapter 5 Programmable Parameters
Advanced Setup Group
T able 43 - The parameters contained in the Advanced Setup Group are also contained within the Overload Setup Group. Refer to Overload Setup Group on page 111 for more detail on these parameters.

Table 44 - Trip Enable Parameter Detail
Table 45 - Trip Enable Bit Function Detail
Table 46 - Warning Enable Parameter Detail

TRIP ENABLE
This parameter allows the installer to
enable or disable trip functions separately.

Overload, Phase Loss, and Comm Fault are
enabled from the factory.
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
Parameter Number 24
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type WORD
Object Mapping 0x29-1-124
Group Advanced Setup
Units —
Minimum Value 0000000000000000
Maximum Value 1111111111111111
Default Value 0000001000000110
Bit
Function1 51 41 31 21 11 09876543210
—
XO v e r l o a d
X Phase Loss
X Ground Fault (E3 Plus)
XS t a l l
XJ a m
X Underload
X PTC (E3 Plus)
X Current Imbalance
X Comm Fault
X Comm Idle
—
—
—
X Remote Trip
X Start Inhibit — Series C & Later

WARNING ENABLE
This parameter allows the installer to
enable or disable warning functions
separately. All warning functions are
disabled from the factory.
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
Parameter Number 25
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type WORD
Object Mapping 0x29-1-125
Group Advanced Setup
Units —
Minimum Value 0000000000000000
Maximum Value 1111111111111111
Default Value 0000000000000000
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 115 Programmable Parameters Chapter 5
Table 47 - Warning Enable Bit Function Detail
Table 48 - Overload Warning Level Parameter Detail
Table 49 - Phase Loss Parameters Detail
Bit
Function15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
—
XO v e r l o a d
—
X Ground Fault (E3 Plus)
—
XJ a m
X Underload
X PTC (E3 Plus)
X Current Imbalance
X Comm Fault
X Comm Idle
—
—
X PM #Starts — Series C & Later
X PM Oper. Hours — Series C & Later

OL WARN LEVEL
This parameter sets the overload warning
level.

Parameter Number 32
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type USINT
Object Mapping 2Chex-1-132
Group Advanced Setup
Units % Thermal Utilization
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 100
Default Value 85

PL INHIBIT TIME
This parameter defines the amount of time
for which phase loss detection is inhibited
during a motor starting sequence.

Parameter Number 33
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type USINT
Object Mapping 2Chex-1-133
Group Advanced Setup
Units Seconds
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 250
Default Value 0

PL TRIP DELAY
This parameter allows the installer to
program a time duration for which a phase
loss condition must exist prior to the device
tripping.

Parameter Number 34
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type USINT
Object Mapping 2Chex-1-134
Group Advanced Setup
Units Seconds
Minimum Value 0.1
Maximum Value 25.0
Default Value 1.0
116 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 Chapter 5 Programmable Parameters
Table 50 - Ground Fault Parameters Detail
GF INHIBIT TIME (E3 Plus)
This parameter defines the amount of time
for which ground fault detection is
inhibited during a motor starting sequence.

Parameter Number 35
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type USINT
Object Mapping 2Chex-1-135
Group Advanced Setup
Units Seconds
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 250
Default Value 10
GF TRIP DELAY (E3 Plus)
This parameter allows the installer to
program a time duration for which a ground
fault condition must exist at the
programmed level prior to the device
tripping.

Parameter Number 36
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type USINT
Object Mapping 2Chex-1-136
Group Advanced Setup
Units Seconds
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 25.0
Default Value 0.5
GF TRIP LEVEL (E3 Plus)
This parameter sets the ground fault trip
level.

Parameter Number 37
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type USINT
Object Mapping 2Chex-1-137
Group Advanced Setup
Units Amps
Minimum Value 0.02
Maximum Value 5.0
Default Value 2.5
GF WARN LEVEL (E3 Plus)
This parameter sets the ground fault
warning level.

Parameter Number 38
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type USINT
Object Mapping 0xB4-1-1 (E3)
2Chex-1-138 (E3 Plus)
Group Advanced Setup
Units Amps
Minimum Value 0.02
Maximum Value 5.0
Default Value 2.0
GF TRIP INHIBIT (E3 Plus)
This parameter allows the installer to
inhibit a ground fault trip from occurring
when the ground fault current exceeds the
maximum range of the core balance sensor
(approximately 10 A).

NOTE: This feature is only available in
Series B and later devices.

Parameter Number 89
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type BOOL
Object Mapping
Group Advanced Setup
Units --
Minimum Value 0 = Disabled
Maximum Value 1 = Enabled
Default Value 0
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 117 Programmable Parameters Chapter 5
Table 51 - Start Parameters Detail — Series C & Later

GF SENSING RANGE
(E3 Plus, Series C and later)
This parameter selects one of the
Ground Fault Sensing Ranges:
20…100 mA ➊
100…500 mA
200 mA…1.0 A

1.0…5.0 A
Parameter Number 106
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type USINT
Object Mapping 2Chex-1-181
Group Advanced Setup
Units 0 = 20…100 mA
1 = 100…500 mA
2 = 200 mA…1.0 A
3 = 1.0…5.0 A
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 3
Default Value 3

GF WARN DELAY
(E3 Plus, Series C and later)
This parameter allows the installer to
program a time duration for which a ground
fault condition must exist at the
programmed level prior to the device
providing a warning.

Parameter Number 105
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type USINT
Object Mapping 2Chex-1-180
Group Advanced Setup
Units Seconds
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 250
Default Value 0

GF FILTER ENABLE
(FRN 5.0 and higher)

This parameter allows the installer to filter
ground fault currents from current based
protection features including Thermal
Overload, Jam, Stall, Under Load, and
Current Imbalance.

Parameter Number 131
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type BOOL
Object Mapping 0Fhex-83-01
Group Advanced Setup
Units —
Minimum Value 0 = Disable
Maximum Value 1 = Enable
Default Value 0
➊ For use with resistive loads only. For motor loads, consult factory.

STARTS/HOUR
This parameter allows the installer to limit
the number of starts per hour.

Parameter Number 99
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type USINT
Object Mapping 29hex-1-104
Group Advanced Setup
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 120
Default Value 2

STARTS INTERVAL
This parameter allows the installer to limit
the time between starts.

Parameter Number 100
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type UINT
Object Mapping 29hex-1-105
Group Advanced Setup
Units Seconds
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 3600
Default Value 600
I
118 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 Chapter 5 Programmable Parameters
Table 52 - Stall Parameters Detail
Table 53 - Jam Parameters Detail

STALL ENABLED TIME
This parameter defines the amount of time
for which stall detection is enabled during
a motor starting sequence.

Parameter Number 39
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type USINT
Object Mapping 2Chex-1-139
Group Advanced Setup
Units Seconds
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 250
Default Value 10

STALL TRIP LEVEL
This parameter sets the stall trip level.

Parameter Number 40
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type USINT
Object Mapping 2Chex-1-140
Group Advanced Setup
Units % FLA
Minimum Value 100
Maximum Value 600
Default Value 600

JAM INHIBIT TIME
This parameter defines the amount of time
for which jam detection is inhibited during
a motor starting sequence.

Parameter Number 41
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type USINT
Object Mapping 2Chex-1-141
Group Advanced Setup
Units Seconds
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 250
Default Value 10

JAM TRIP DELAY
This parameter allows the installer to
program a time duration for which a jam
condition must exist at the programmed
level prior to the device tripping.

Parameter Number 42
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type USINT
Object Mapping 2Chex-1-142
Group Advanced Setup
Units Seconds
Minimum Value 0.1
Maximum Value 25.0
Default Value 5.0

JAM TRIP LEVEL
This parameter sets the jam trip level.

Parameter Number 43
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type UINT
Object Mapping 2Chex-1-143
Group Advanced Setup
Units % FLA
Minimum Value 50
Maximum Value 600
Default Value 250
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 119 Programmable Parameters Chapter 5
Table 54 - Underload Parameters Detail

JAM WARN LEVEL
This parameter sets the jam warning level.

Parameter Number 44
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type UINT
Object Mapping 2Chex-1-144
Group Advanced Setup
Units % FLA
Minimum Value 50
Maximum Value 600
Default Value 150

UL INHIBIT TIME
This parameter defines the amount of time
for which underload detection is inhibited
during a motor starting sequence.

Parameter Number 45
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type USINT
Object Mapping 2Chex-1-145
Group Advanced Setup
Units Seconds
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 250
Default Value 10

UL TRIP DELAY
This parameter allows the installer to
program a time duration that an underload
condition must exist at the programmed
level prior to the device tripping.

Parameter Number 46
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type USINT
Object Mapping 2Chex-1-146
Group Advanced Setup
Units Seconds
Minimum Value 0.1
Maximum Value 25.0
Default Value 5.0

UL TRIP LEVEL
This parameter sets the underload trip
level.

Parameter Number 47
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type USINT
Object Mapping 2Chex-1-147
Group Advanced Setup
Units % FLA
Minimum Value 10 ➊
Maximum Value 100
Default Value 50

UL WARN LEVEL
This parameter sets the underload warning
level.

Parameter Number 48
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type USINT
Object Mapping 2Chex-1-148
Group Advanced Setup
Units % FLA
Minimum Value 10 ➊
Maximum Value 100
Default Value 70
➊ 50…100% for devices with FRN 1.003 and earlier
120 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 Chapter 5 Programmable Parameters
Table 55 - Current Imbalance Parameters Detail

CI INHIBIT TIME
This parameter defines the amount of time
current imbalance detection is inhibited
during a motor starting sequence.

Parameter Number 49
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type USINT
Object Mapping 2Chex-1-149
Group Advanced Setup
Units Seconds
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 250
Default Value 10

CI TRIP DELAY
This parameter allows the installer to
program a time duration that a current
imbalance condition must exist at the
programmed level prior to the device
tripping.

Parameter Number 50
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type USINT
Object Mapping 2Chex-1-150
Group Advanced Setup
Units Seconds
Minimum Value 0.1
Maximum Value 25.0
Default Value 5.0

CI TRIP LEVEL
This parameter sets the current imbalance
trip level.

Parameter Number 51
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type USINT
Object Mapping 2Chex-1-151
Group Advanced Setup
Units %
Minimum Value 10
Maximum Value 100
Default Value 35

CI WARN LEVEL
This parameter sets the current imbalance
warning level.

Parameter Number 52
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type USINT
Object Mapping 2Chex-1-152
Group Advanced Setup
Units %
Minimum Value 10
Maximum Value 100
Default Value 20
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 121 Programmable Parameters Chapter 5
Table 56 - Input Parameters Detail
IN1 ASSIGNMENT
This parameter allows the user to assign a
specific function to the discrete IN1 input.

Parameter Number 83
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type USINT
Object Mapping 29hex-1-177
Group Advanced Setup
Units —
Minimum Value 0 = Normal
1 = Trip Reset
2 = Remote Trip
3 = 2-Speed
Maximum Value 4 = Force Snapshot ➊
Default Value 0
IN2 ASSIGNMENT
This parameter allows the user to assign a
specific function to the discrete IN2 input.

Parameter Number 84
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type USINT
Object Mapping 29hex-1-178
Group Advanced Setup
Units —
Minimum Value 0 = Normal
1 = Trip Reset
2 = Remote Trip
3 = 2-Speed
Maximum Value 4 = Force Snapshot ➊
Default Value 0
IN3 ASSIGNMENT (E3 Plus)
This parameter allows the user to assign a
specific function to the discrete IN3 input.

Parameter Number 85
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type USINT
Object Mapping 29hex-1-179
Group Advanced Setup
Units —
Minimum Value 0 = Normal
1 = Trip Reset
2 = Remote Trip
3 = 2-Speed
Maximum Value 4 = Force Snapshot ➊
Default Value 0
IN4 ASSIGNMENT (E3 Plus)
This parameter allows the user to assign a
specific function to the discrete IN4 input.

Parameter Number 86
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type USINT
Object Mapping 29hex-1-180
Group Advanced Setup
Units --
Minimum Value 0 = Normal
1 = Trip Reset
2 = Remote Trip
3 = 2-Speed
Maximum Value 4 = Force Snapshot ➊
Default Value 0
➊ Available in FRN 5.00 and higher I
122 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 Chapter 5 Programmable Parameters
Table 57 - Two-Speed Motor Parameters Detail — E3 Plus
Table 58 - Preventative Maintenance Parameters Detail
2-SPD NET ENABLE
This parameter allows the use of Output
Assemblies 104 and 105 for two-speed
applications.

Parameter Number 87
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type BOOL
Object Mapping 2Chex-1-154
Group Advanced Setup
Units —
Minimum Value 0 = Disabled
Maximum Value 1 = Enabled
Default Value 0
2-SPEED FLA SET
This parameter allows the user to program
the high speed FLA value of a two-speed
motor.

Parameter Number 88
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type UINT
Object Mapping 2Chex-1-155
2Chex-1-156
2Chex-1-157
Group Advanced Setup
Units Amps
Minimum Value See Table 41 on page 112
Maximum Value See Table 41 on page 112
Default Value See Table 41 on page 112
PM - # Starts (Series C and later)
This parameter allows the installer to set a
number of starts after which preventative
maintenance should be performed.

Parameter Number 101
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type UINT
Object Mapping 29hex-1-106
Group Advanced Setup
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 65535
Default Value 0
PM - Oper. Hours (Series C and later)
This parameter allows the installer to set
the hours of operation after which
preventative maintenance should be
performed.

Parameter Number 102
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type UINT
Object Mapping 29hex-1-107
Group Advanced Setup
Units Hours
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 65535
Default Value 0
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 123 Programmable Parameters Chapter 5
Reset/Lock Group Table 59 - Reset Power Parameters Detail — E3 Plus Model EC5 RESET kWh

This parameter allows the installer to reset
the kWh accumulator to zero.

Parameter Number 293
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type BOOL
Object Mapping 0Fhex-125-01
Group Reset/Lock
Units —
Minimum Value 0 = No Action
Maximum Value 1 = Reset
Default Value 0
RESET kVARh
This parameter allows the installer to reset
the kVARh accumulator to zero.

Parameter Number 294
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type BOOL
Object Mapping 0Fhex-126-01
Group Reset/Lock
Units —
Minimum Value 0 = No Action
Maximum Value 1 = Reset
Default Value 0
RESET kVAh
This parameter allows the installer to reset
the kVAh accumulator to zero.

Parameter Number 295
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type BOOL
Object Mapping 0Fhex-127-01
Group Reset/Lock
Units —
Minimum Value 0 = No Action
Maximum Value 1 = Reset
Default Value 0
RESET MAX kW DMND
This parameter allows the installer to reset
the maximum kW Demand parameter to
zero.

Parameter Number 296
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type BOOL
Object Mapping 0Fhex-128-01
Group Reset/Lock
Units —
Minimum Value 0 = No Action
Maximum Value 1 = Reset
Default Value 0
RESET MAX kVAR DMND
This parameter allows the installer to reset
the maximum kVAR Demand parameter to
zero.

Parameter Number 297
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type BOOL
Object Mapping 0Fhex-129-01
Group Reset/Lock
Units —
Minimum Value 0 = No Action
Maximum Value 1 = Reset
Default Value 0
124 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 Chapter 5 Programmable Parameters
Table 60 - Other Reset/Test Lock Group Parameters Detail RESET MAX kVA DMND
This parameter allows the installer to reset
the maximum kVA Demand parameter to
zero.

Parameter Number 298
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type BOOL
Object Mapping 0Fhex-12A-01
Group Reset/Lock
Units —
Minimum Value 0 = No Action
Maximum Value 1 = Reset
Default Value 0

TRIP RESET
This parameter provides the user with the
capability of resetting a trip over the
DeviceNet network. After a trip is reset, the
parameter automatically returns to a
“Ready” state.

Parameter Number 26
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type BOOL
Object Mapping 0x29-1-126
Group Reset/Lock
Units —
Minimum Value 0 = Ready
Maximum Value 1 = Reset
Default Value 0

PROGRAM LOCK
This parameter prohibits the device
parameters from being altered when set to
“Locked”.

This parameter must be set to “Unlocked”
to allow parameter modification.

Parameter Number 53
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type BOOL
Object Mapping 0xB4-1-18
Group Reset/Lock
Units —
Minimum Value 0 = Unlocked
Maximum Value 1 = Locked
Default Value 0

SET TO DEFAULTS
This parameter allows the user to reset the
parameter settings to the factory default
values. After parameter values have been
reset to the factory default settings, the
parameter automatically returns to a
“Ready” state.

Parameter Number 54
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type BOOL
Object Mapping 0xB4-1-19
Group Reset/Lock
Units —
Minimum Value 0 = Ready
Maximum Value 1 = Set
Default Value 0
TEST ENABLE (Series C and later)
This parameter allows the installer to
enable or disable the test function of the
Test/Reset button.

Parameter Number 103
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type BOOL
Object Mapping 29hex-1-108
Group Reset/Lock
Units —
Minimum Value 0 = Disable
Maximum Value 1 = Enable
Default Value 1
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 125 Programmable Parameters Chapter 5
DeviceNet Setup Group
Table 61 - Assembly Parameters Detail
CLEAR QUEUE (Series C and later)
This parameter allows the user to clear the
Trip Logs, Warning Logs, Starts Counter,
and the Elapsed Time. Setting the Clear
Queue parameter to "1" will clear/reset the
Trip Logs, Warning Logs, Starts Counter,
and the Elapsed Time parameters at the
same time.

Parameter Number 104
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type BOOL
Object Mapping 29hex-1-132
Group Reset/Lock
Units —
Minimum Value 0 = Ready
Maximum Value 1 = Clear
Default Value 0

OUTPUT ASSEMBLY
This parameter is used to select the desired
output assembly. See Appendix B for a
listing of available assemblies
Parameter Number 59
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type USINT
Object Mapping 0xB4-1-16
Group DeviceNet Setup
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 105
Default Value 103 (E3)
105 (E3 Plus)

INPUT ASSEMBLY
This parameter is used to select the desired
input assembly. See Appendix B for a
listing of available assemblies
Parameter Number 60
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type USINT
Object Mapping 0xB4-1-17
Group DeviceNet Setup
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 107
Default Value 100
ASSY WORD0 PARAM
This parameter assigns the parameter
value to be placed in Word 0 of Input
Assembly 100.

Parameter Number 61
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type USINT
Object Mapping 0xB4-1-7
Group DeviceNet Setup
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 302 ➊
Default Value 21
ASSY WORD1 PARAM
This parameter assigns the parameter
value to be placed in Word 1 of Input
Assembly 100.

Parameter Number 62
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type USINT
Object Mapping 0xB4-1-8
Group DeviceNet Setup
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 302 ➊
126 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 Chapter 5 Programmable Parameters
Table 62 - Other DeviceNet Setup Group Parameters Detail ASSY WORD2 PARAM
This parameter assigns the parameter
value to be placed in Word 2 of Input
Assembly 100.

Parameter Number 63
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type USINT
Object Mapping 0xB4-1-9
Group DeviceNet Setup
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 302 ➊
Default Value 2
ASSY WORD3 PARAM
This parameter assigns the parameter
value to be placed in Word 3 of Input
Assembly 100.

Parameter Number 64
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type USINT
Object Mapping 0xB4-1-10
Group DeviceNet Setup
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 302 ➊
Default Value 3
➊ Maximum value of 21 for devices with FRN 1.003 and earlier.

AUTO BAUD ENABLE
When this parameter is enabled, the device
will attempt to determine the network baud
rate and set its baud rate to the same,
provided network traffic exists.

At least one node with an established baud
rate must exist on the network for
autobaud to occur.

Parameter Number 55
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type BOOL
Object Mapping 0xB4-1-15
Group DeviceNet Setup
Units —
Minimum Value 0 = Disabled
Maximum Value 1 = Enabled
Default Value 1

NONVOL BAUD RATE
This parameter allows the installer to
manually set the desired baud rate.

AutoBaud Enable, Parameter 55, must be
disabled when using this parameter.

Parameter Number 56
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type USINT
Object Mapping 0xB4-1-6
Group DeviceNet Setup
Units —
Minimum Value 0 = 125k
1 = 250k
Maximum Value 2 = 500k
Default Value 0

COS MASK
This parameter allows the installer to
define the change-of-state conditions that
will result in a change-of-state message
being produced.
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
Parameter Number 58
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type WORD
Object Mapping 0xB4-1-13
Group DeviceNet Setup
Units —
Minimum Value 0000000000000000
Maximum Value 0000001111111111
Default Value 0000000000000000
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 127 Programmable Parameters Chapter 5
Table 63 - Change of State Mask Bit Function Detail
Output Setup Group
E3 is Normal – No Trip Present
In normal operation, the E3 Overload Relay firmware latches Out A and Out B commands received through Polled I/O and Explicit messaging. The latched states are applied to the outputs until the next command is received.

Bit
Function1 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 9876543210
XT r i p
X Warning
X Output A
X Output B (E3 Plus)
X Input #1
X Input #2
X Input #3 (E3 Plus)
X Input #4 (E3 Plus)
X Motor Current
X Ground Fault Current (E3 Plus)
IMPORTANT The parameters in the Output Setup Group provide great flexibility in terms of output relay(s) operation under the conditions of Protection Faults, Comm Fault, and Comm Idle. It is important, therefore, that the installer fully understands the use of these parameters, their interaction with Trip Enable, Parameter 24, and the order of priority.

Order of Priority
The Out_Pr FltState parameter settings take priority over the other settings.

If Comm Fault and Comm Idle are enabled (set to 1) in Trip Enable, the state that the output(s) assumes is first determined by the settings in the Out_Pr FltState and Out_PrFltValue parameters.

If Out_Pr FltState is set to 1 = ignore fault, the state of the output(s) will be determined by the Out_DN FltState and Out_DN FltValue, and Out_DN IdlState and Out_DN IdlValue settings.

If Comm Fault and Comm Idle are disabled (set to 0) in Trip Enable, the state that the output(s) assumes will be determined by the Out_DN FltState and Out_DN Flt Value, and Out_DN IdlState and Out_DN IdleValue settings.

IMPORTANT The following information addresses the behavior variation between Series A and Series B and later products in relation to the Output Setup parameters.
128 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 Chapter 5 Programmable Parameters
E3 is Tripped
In the event of a protection trip, the state of an E3 Overload Relay output is determined by the programmed settings of the corresponding Out_ Pr FltState and Out_ Pr FltV alue parameters.

When Out_ Pr FltState is set to “Ignore Fault” , output operation continues to respond to message commands. When Out_ Pr FltState is set to “Go to FltV alue” , the output commanded states are determined by the settings of the Out_ Pr FltV alue parameters, regardless of the state of the firmware latch.

Series A product continues to update the firmware latch as new commands are received while the E3 Overload Relay is in a tripped state.

Series B and later product sets the firmware latch to the Out_ Pr FltV alue when Out_ Pr FltState is set to “Go to FltV alue” while the E3 Overload Relay is in a tripped state.

E3 is Reset from Trip
After an E3 Overload Relay is returned to normal following a trip reset, operation of Out A and Out B is determined by the state of the firmware latch. The output state matrix below details this.

Table 64 - Output State Matrix for Output Setup Parameters Out X Output State
Commanded
Output State
Prior to Trip
PR FltState
Setting
PR FltValue
Setting
with
Active
Trip
Last
Commanded
During Trip
Following Trip Reset
(before any new command)
Series A Series B & Later
Open 0 = Go to FltValue 0 = Open Open Open Open Open
Close Closed Open
-none - Open Open
1 = Closed Closed Open Open Closed
Close Closed Closed
-none - Open Closed
1 = Ignore Fault — As Commanded
Close 0 = Go to FltValue 0 = Open Open Open Open Open
Close Closed Open
-none - Closed Open
1 = Closed Closed Open Open Closed
Close Closed Closed
-none - Closed Closed
1 = Ignore Fault — As Commanded
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 129 Programmable Parameters Chapter 5
Table 65 - Output A Parameters Detail

OUTA PR FLTSTATE
This parameter, in conjunction with
Parameter 66, defines how Output A will
respond when a trip occurs. When set to
“1”, Output A will continue to operate as
commanded via the network. When set to
“0”, Output A will open or close as
determined by the setting of Parameter 66.

Parameter Number 65
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type BOOL
Object Mapping 0x09-1-113
Group DeviceNet I/O
Units —
Minimum Value 0 = Go to FltValue (#66)
Maximum Value 1 = Ignore Fault
Default Value 0

OUTA PR FLTVALUE
This parameter determines the state that
Output A assumes when a trip occurs and
Parameter 65 is set to “0”.

Parameter Number 66
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type BOOL
Object Mapping 0x09-1-114
Group DeviceNet I/O
Units —
Minimum Value 0 = Open
Maximum Value 1 = Closed
Default Value 0

OUTA DN FLTSTATE
This parameter, in conjunction with
Parameter 68, defines how Output A will
respond when a DeviceNet network fault
occurs. When set to “1”, Output A will hold
the state prior to trip occurrence. When set
to “0”, Output A will open or close as
determined by the setting of Parameter 68.

Output A can be configured to go to a
desired state in the event of a DeviceNet
network fault independent from enabling
CommFault in Parameter 24, Trip Enable.

Parameter Number 67
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type BOOL
Object Mapping 0x09-1-5
Group DeviceNet I/O
Units —
Minimum Value 0 = Go to FltValue (#68)
Maximum Value 1 = Hold Last State
Default Value 0

OUTA DN FLTVALUE
This parameter determines the state that
Output A assumes when a DeviceNet
network fault occurs and Parameter 67 is
set to “0”.

Parameter Number 68
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type BOOL
Object Mapping 0x09-1-6
Group DeviceNet I/O
Units —
Minimum Value 0 = Open
Maximum Value 1 = Closed
Default Value 0

OUTA DN IDLSTATE
This parameter, in conjunction with
Parameter 70, defines how Output A will
respond when the DeviceNet network is
idle. When set to “1”, Output A will hold
the state prior to trip occurrence. When set
to “0”, Output A will open or close as
determined by the setting in Parameter 70.

The Dn Flt parameters supersede the Dn Idl
parameters.

Parameter Number 69
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type BOOL
Object Mapping 0x09-1-7
Group DeviceNet I/O
Units —
Minimum Value 0 = Go to IdlValue (#70)
Maximum Value 1 = Hold Last State
Default Value 0
130 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 Chapter 5 Programmable Parameters
Table 66 - Output B Parameters Detail — E3 Plus

OUTA DN IDLVALUE
This parameter determines the state that
Output A assumes when the network is idle
and Parameter 69 is set to “0”.

Parameter Number 70
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type BOOL
Object Mapping 0x09-1-8
Group Advanced Setup
Units —
Minimum Value 0 = Open
Maximum Value 1 = Closed
Default Value 0

OUTB PR FLTSTATE
This parameter, in conjunction with
Parameter 72, defines how Output B will
respond when a trip occurs. When set to
“1”, Output B will continue to operate as
commanded via the network. When set to
“0”, Output B will open or close as
determined by the setting in Parameter 72.

Parameter Number 71
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type BOOL
Object Mapping 0x09-2-113
Group DeviceNet I/O
Units —
Minimum Value 0 = Go to FltValue (#72)
Maximum Value 1 = Ignore Fault
Default Value 0

OUTB PR FLTVALUE
This parameter determines the state that
Output B assumes when a trip occurs and
Parameter 71 is set to “0”.

Parameter Number 72
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type BOOL
Object Mapping 0x09-2-114
Group DeviceNet I/O
Units —
Minimum Value 0 = Open
Maximum Value 1 = Closed
Default Value 0

OUTB DN FLTSTATE
This parameter, in conjunction with
Parameter 74, defines how Output B will
respond when a DeviceNet network fault
occurs. When set to “1”, Output B will hold
the state prior to trip occurrence. When set
to “0”, Output B will open or close as
determined by the setting in Parameter 74.

Output B can be configured to go to a
desired state in the event of a DeviceNet
network fault independent from enabling
CommFault in Parameter 24, Trip Enable.

Parameter Number 73
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type BOOL
Object Mapping 0x09-2-5
Group DeviceNet I/O
Units —
Minimum Value 0 = Go to FltValue (#74)
Maximum Value 1 = Hold Last State
Default Value 0

OUTB DN FLTVALUE
This parameter determines the state that
Output B assumes when a comm fault
occurs and Parameter 73 is set to “0”.

Parameter Number 74
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type BOOL
Object Mapping 0x09-2-6
Group DeviceNet I/O
Units —
Minimum Value 0 = Open
Maximum Value 1 = Closed
Default Value 0
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 131 Programmable Parameters Chapter 5
DeviceLogix Group — E3 Plus
Table 67 - Override Parameters Detail

OUTB DN IDLSTATE
This parameter, in conjunction with
Parameter 76, defines how Output B will
respond when the DeviceNet network is
idle. When set to “1”, Output B will hold
the state prior to trip occurrence. When set
to “0”, Output B will open or close as
determined by the setting in Parameter 76.

The Dn Flt parameters supersede the Dn Idl
parameters.

Parameter Number 75
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type BOOL
Object Mapping 0x09-2-7
Group DeviceNet I/O
Units —
Minimum Value 0 = Go to IdlValue (#76)
Maximum Value 1 = Hold Last State
Default Value 0

OUTB DN IDLVALUE
This parameter determines the state that
Output B assumes when the network is idle
and Parameter 75 is set to “0”.

Parameter Number 76
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type BOOL
Object Mapping 0x09-2-8
Group DeviceNet I/O
Units —
Minimum Value 0 = Open
Maximum Value 1 = Closed
Default Value 0

COMM OVERRIDE
This parameter is used to enable
DeviceLogix programs to override normal
output behavior in the event of a
communication status change. These
events include all states where the E3 Plus
is without an I/O connection (I/O
Connection does not exist, has timed out,
has been deleted, or is currently idle)
Parameter Number 79
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type BOOL
Object Mapping 0x1E-1-105
Group DeviceLogix
Units —
Minimum Value 0 = Disabled
Maximum Value 1 = Enabled
Default Value 0

NETWORK OVERRIDE
This parameter is used to enable
DeviceLogix programs to override normal
output behavior in the event of a network
fault. Network faults include duplicate
MAC ID failures and bus off conditions.

Parameter Number 80
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type BOOL
Object Mapping 0x1E-1-104
Group DeviceLogix
Units —
Minimum Value 0 = Disabled
Maximum Value 1 = Enabled
Default Value 0
132 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 Chapter 5 Programmable Parameters
Table 68 - Net Outputs Parameter Detail
Table 69 - Net Outputs Bit Function Detail
Table 70 - Net Outputs Change-of-State (COS) Mask Parameter Detail

NET OUTPUTS
This parameter monitors network outputs
controlled through DeviceLogix programs.

Parameter Number 81
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type WORD
Object Mapping 0x04-1-3
Group DeviceLogix
Units —
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Bits
Function1 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 9876543210
XN e t O u t p u t 0
XN e t O u t p u t 1
XN e t O u t p u t 2
XN e t O u t p u t 3
XN e t O u t p u t 4
XN et Output 5
XN et Output 6
XN et Output 7
XN et Output 8
XN et Output 9
X Net Output 10
X Net Output 11
X Net Output 12
X Net Output 13
X Net Output 14
X DLogix Enabled

NET OUT COS MASK
This parameter allows the installer to select
the events for which a COS message is
produced.
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
Parameter Number 82
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type WORD
Object Mapping 0xB4-1-50
Group DeviceLogix
Units —
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 133 Programmable Parameters Chapter 5
Table 71 - Net Outputs Change of State Mask Bit Function Detail Bits
Function1 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 9876543210
X Net Output 0
X Net Output 1
X Net Output 2
X Net Output 3
X Net Output 4
X Net Output 5
X Net Output 6
X Net Output 7
X Net Output 8
X Net Output 9
X Net Output 10
X Net Output 11
X Net Output 12
X Net Output 13
X Net Output 14
134 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 Chapter 5 Programmable Parameters
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 135 Chapter 6
Monitoring Parameters
Introduction This chapter provides information for the current monitoring and diagnostic parameters of the E3 Overload Relay.

Phase Current Reporting Current Range
The E3 Overload Relay utilizes a true RMS algorithm to calculate the RMS value of the current passing through phase L1, L2, and L3. The relay is capable of sensing currents ranging from 0%…720% of the maximum FLA Setting.

The following chart illustrates the reporting current precision, the minimum and maximum reporting current values, and the 720% maximum FLA value for each current range.

IMPORTANT The E3 Overload Relay will report 0 A or 0% FLA if the current is below 30% of the minimum FLA Setting.

IMPORTANT The E3 Overload Relay is capable of reporting values greater than 720% of the maximum FLA Setting, but the accuracy of the value may be compromised.
136 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 Chapter 6 Monitoring Parameters
➊ 0 A is reported when the actual current is below the indicated minimum reporting current. ➋ The E3 is capable of reporting higher currents, but reporting accuracy is compromised.

Reporting Accuracy
Table 1: Current Reporting Summary (with indicated precision) FLA Setting Range
[A]
CT Ratio Min. Reporting
Current [A] ➊
Max Reporting
Current [A] ➋

0.4…2.0 — 0.15 14.40
1…5 — 0.30 36.00
3…15 — 0.90 108.00
5…25 — 1.50 180.00
9…45 — 3.0 360.0
18…90 — 6.0 720.0
9…45 50:5 3 360
18…90 100:5 6 720
28…140 150:5 9 1080
42…210 200:5 12 1440
60…302 300:5 18 2160
84…420 500:5 30 3600
125…630 600:5 36 4320
172…860 800:5 48 5760
240…1215 1200:5 72 8640
450…2250 2500:5 150 18000
1000…5000 5000:5 300 32767
Table 2: Current Reporting Accuracy
FLA Setting Range Operating Range
100% Min. FLA Setting…
720% Max. FLA Setting
50% Min. FLA Setting…
100% Min. FLA Setting

0.4…2.0 A ±10% —
All others ±6% ±10%
IMPORTANT The accuracy specified above is only applicable to non-distorted sinusoidal currents.

Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 137 Monitoring Parameters Chapter 6
Ground Fault Current
Reporting
Current Range
The following chart illustrates the minimum and maximum reporting ground fault current values for a given ground fault current range. ➊ The E3 Plus Overload Relay will report 0 A if the ground fault current is below 50% of the minimum ground fault current setting for a given range.
➋ The E3 Plus Overload Relay is capable of reporting values greater than the maximum values shown, but the accuracy of the value is compromised.
➌ The accuracy specified is only applicable to non-distorted sinusoidal currents. ➍ 20…100 mA for resistive loads only. For motor loads, consult your local Rockwell Automation sales office or Allen-Bradley distributor.Frequency Range
The E3 Plus Overload Relay is capable of sensing variable frequency ground fault currents ranging from 20…250 Hz.

Exception: Any E3 Plus Overload Relay using an external ground fault sensor is limited to 50/60 Hz detection.

Diagnostic Parameters The E3 Overload relay provides a number of motor diagnostic parameters to assist maintenance personnel with information to minimize unplanned down time. The relay also provides a number of preventative maintenance diagnostics to maximize the life of an electric motor.

Table 3: Ground Fault Current Reporting Summary
Ground Fault
Current Range
Minimum
Reporting
Current ➊➌
Maximum
Reporting
Current ➋➌
E3 Plus Cat. No. /Series
20…100 mA➍ 10 mA 180 mA 193/592-EC3 and -EC5 — Series C and later
100…500 mA 50 mA 900 mA 193/592-EC3 and -EC5 — Series C and later
200 mA…1.0 A 100 mA 1.80 A 193/592-EC3 and -EC5 — Series C and later

1.0…5.0 A 500 mA 9.00 A 193/592-EC2 and -EC5 — Series A and later
138 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 Chapter 6 Monitoring Parameters
Monitor Group L1 CURRENT
This parameter provides the L1 phase
current
measurement in amperes.

Parameter Number 1
Access Rule Get
Data Type INT
Object Mapping 2Chex-1-231
2Chex-1-8
2Chex-1-227
Group Monitor
Units Amps
Minimum Value See Table 1:

Maximum Value See Table 1:

Default Value None
L2 CURRENT
This parameter provides the L2 phase
current
measurement in amperes.

Parameter Number 2
Access Rule Get
Data Type INT
Object Mapping 2Chex-1-232
2Chex-1-9
2Chex-1-228
Group Monitor
Units Amps
Minimum Value See Table 1:

Maximum Value See Table 1:

Default Value None
L3 CURRENT
This parameter provides the L3 phase
current
measurement in amperes.

Parameter Number 3
Access Rule Get
Data Type INT
Object Mapping 2Chex-1-233
2Chex-1-10
2Chex-1-229
Group Monitor
Units Amps
Minimum Value See Table 1:

Maximum Value See Table 1:

Default Value None

AVERAGE CURRENT
This parameter provides the average
current measurement in amperes.

Parameter Number 4
Access Rule Get
Data Type INT
Object Mapping 2Chex-1-230
2Chex-1-5
2Chex-1-226
Group Monitor
Units Amps
Minimum Value See Table 1:

Maximum Value See Table 1:

Default Value None
L1 %FLA
This parameter provides the L1 phase
current
measurement as a percentage of the
motor’s full load current rating (Parameter
28, FLA Setting).

Parameter Number 5
Access Rule Get
Data Type UINT
Object Mapping 2Chex-1-105
Group Monitor
Units % FLA
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1000
Default Value None
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 139 Monitoring Parameters Chapter 6
L2 %FLA
This parameter provides the L2 phase
current
measurement as a percentage of the
motor’s full load current rating (Parameter
28, FLA Setting).

Parameter Number 6
Access Rule Get
Data Type UINT
Object Mapping 2Chex-1-106
Group Monitor
Units % FLA
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1000
Default Value None
L3 %FLA
This parameter provides the L3 phase
current measurement as a percentage of
the motor’s full load current rating
(Parameter 28, FLA Setting).

Parameter Number 7
Access Rule Get
Data Type UINT
Object Mapping 2Chex-1-107
Group Monitor
Units % FLA
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1000
Default Value None
AVERAGE %FLA
This parameter provides the average
current measurement as a percentage of
the motor’s full load current rating
(Parameter 28, FLA Setting).

Parameter Number 8
Access Rule Get
Data Type UINT
Object Mapping 2Chex-1-108
Group Monitor
Units % FLA
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1000
Default Value None
% THERM UTILIZED
This parameter reports the calculated
percent thermal capacity utilization of the
connected motor.

Parameter Number 9
Access Rule Get
Data Type USINT
Object Mapping 2Chex-1-109
Group Monitor
Units %
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 100
Default Value None
GF CURRENT (E3 Plus)
This parameter provides the ground fault
current measurement in amperes.

Parameter Number 10
Access Rule Get
Data Type INT
Object Mapping 2Chex-1-110
Group Monitor
Units Amps
Minimum Value 0.00
Maximum Value 12.75 (approx.)
Default Value None
140 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 Chapter 6 Monitoring Parameters

CURRENT IMBAL
This parameter provides the percent
current imbalance measurement.
%CI = 100 (Id/Ia)
where,
CI: Current imbalance
Id: Maximum deviation from the average
current
I
a: Average current
Parameter Number 11
Access Rule Get
Data Type USINT
Object Mapping 2Chex-1-111
Group Monitor
Units %
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 200
Default Value None

TIME TO TRIP
This parameter provides an estimated
time for an overload trip to occur when
the measured motor current exceeds the
trip rating. When the measured current is
below the trip rating, the value 9,999
seconds is reported.

Parameter Number 12
Access Rule Get
Data Type UINT
Object Mapping 2Chex-1-112
Group Monitor
Units Seconds
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 9999
Default Value 9999

TIME TO RESET
This parameter reports the time until an
overload trip may be reset either manually
or automatically. After an overload trip is
reset, the value 9,999 seconds is reported.

Parameter Number 13
Access Rule Get
Data Type UINT
Object Mapping 2Chex-1-113
Group Monitor
Units Seconds
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 9999
Default Value 9999
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 141 Monitoring Parameters Chapter 6
➊ Series C and later

TRIP STATUS
This parameter provides trip
identification.
1 = Trip
0 = No Trip
Parameter Number 14
Access Rule Get
Data Type WORD
Object Mapping 0x29-1-114
Group Monitor
Units —
Minimum Value —
Maximum Value —
Default Value None
Bits Function:
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
XT e s t T r i p
XO v e r l o a d
X Phase Loss
X Ground Fault (E3 Plus)
XS tall
XJ am
XU nderload
XP TC (E3 Plus)
X Current Imbalance
X Comm Fault
X Comm Idle
XN onvolatile Memory Fault
X Hardware Fault
—
XR emote Trip
X Blocked Start/Start Inhibit ➊
142 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 Chapter 6 Monitoring Parameters
➊ Series C and later

WARNING STATUS
This parameter provides warning
identification.

Parameter Number 15
Access Rule Get
Data Type WORD
Object Mapping 0x29-1-115
Group Monitor
Units —
Minimum Value —
Maximum Value —
Default Value None
Bit Function:
1 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 9876543210
—
XO v e r l o a d
—
X Ground Fault (E3 Plus)
—
XJ am
XU nderload
XP TC (E3 Plus)
XC urrent Imbalance
X Comm Fault
X Comm Idle
—
XC onfig Fault
XP M - # Starts
➊
XP M – Oper. Hours➊
TRIP LOG 0
This parameter records the latest trip.

Parameter Number 16
Access Rule Get
Data Type WORD
Object Mapping 0x29-1-116
Group Monitor
Units —
Minimum Value See Trip Status table
Maximum Value See Trip Status table
Default Value None
TRIP LOG 1
This parameter records the trip previous to
Trip Log 0.

Parameter Number 17
Access Rule Get
Data Type WORD
Object Mapping 0x29-1-117
Group Monitor
Units —
Minimum Value See Trip Status table
Maximum Value See Trip Status table
Default Value None
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 143 Monitoring Parameters Chapter 6
TRIP LOG 2
This parameter records the trip previous to
Trip Log 1.

Parameter Number 18
Access Rule Get
Data Type WORD
Object Mapping 0x29-1-118
Group Monitor
Units —
Minimum Value See Trip Status table
Maximum Value See Trip Status table
Default Value None
TRIP LOG 3
This parameter records the trip previous to
Trip Log 2.

Parameter Number 19
Access Rule Get
Data Type WORD
Object Mapping 0x29-1-119
Group Monitor
Units —
Minimum Value See Trip Status table
Maximum Value See Trip Status table
Default Value None
TRIP LOG 4
This parameter records the trip previous to
Trip Log 3.

Parameter Number 20
Access Rule Get
Data Type WORD
Object Mapping 0x29-1-120
Group Monitor
Units —
Minimum Value See Trip Status table
Maximum Value See Trip Status table
Default Value None

DEVICE STATUS
This parameter provides status
information of the E3 Overload Relay as
outlined in the table below.
1 = On or Present
0 = Off or Not Present
Parameter Number 21
Access Rule Get
Data Type WORD
Object Mapping 0x29-1-121
Group Monitor
Units —
Minimum Value —
Maximum Value —
Default Value None
Bit Function:
1 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 9876543210
XT r i p
XW a r n i n g
XO u t p u t A
XO utput B (E3 Plus)
XI nput #1
XI nput #2
XI nput #3 (E3 Plus)
XI nput #4 (E3 Plus)
X Motor Current
X Ground Fault Current (E3
Plus)
144 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 Chapter 6 Monitoring Parameters
Firmware

This parameter allows the installer to read
the firmware revision number (FRN) of the
E3 Overload Relay.

Parameter Number 22
Access Rule Get
Data Type UINT
Object Mapping B4hex-01-0C
Group Monitor
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 65535
Default Value —
Dev Config
This parameter allows the installer to read
which features are enabled in the E3
Overload Relay as outlined in the table
below:
1 = On or Present
0 = Off or Not Present
Parameter Number 23
Access Rule Get
Data Type UINT
Object Mapping B4hex-01-14
Group Monitor
Units —
Minimum Value —
Maximum Value —
Default Value —
Bit Function:
1 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 9876543210
X4 i n / 2 o u t
X PTC Hardware
X GF Hardware
XE xternal GF
XH eat Trace
XV oltage Hdw
Warn Log 0 (Series C and later)
This parameter records the latest warning.

Parameter Number 90
Access Rule Get
Data Type WORD
Object Mapping 29hex-1-109
Group Monitor
Units —
Minimum Value See Warning Status Table
Maximum Value See Warning Status Table
Default Value 0
Warn Log 1 (Series C and later)
This parameter records the warning
previous to Warn Log 0.

Parameter Number 91
Access Rule Get
Data Type WORD
Object Mapping 29hex-1-110
Group Monitor
Units —
Minimum Value See Warning Status Table
Maximum Value See Warning Status Table
Default Value 0
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 145 Monitoring Parameters Chapter 6
Warn Log 2 (Series C and later)
This parameter records the warning
previous to Warn Log 1.

Parameter Number 92
Access Rule Get
Data Type WORD
Object Mapping 29hex-1-111
Group Monitor
Units —
Minimum Value See Warning Status Table
Maximum Value See Warning Status Table
Default Value 0
Warn Log 3 (Series C and later)
This parameter records the warning
previous to Warn Log 2.

Parameter Number 93
Access Rule Get
Data Type WORD
Object Mapping 29hex-1-112
Group Monitor
Units —
Minimum Value See Warning Status Table
Maximum Value See Warning Status Table
Default Value 0
Warn Log 4 (Series C and later)
This parameter records the warning
previous to Warn Log 3.

Parameter Number 94
Access Rule Get
Data Type WORD
Object Mapping 29hex-1-113
Group Monitor
Units —
Minimum Value See Warning Status Table
Maximum Value See Warning Status Table
Default Value 0
Elapsed Time (Series C and later)
This parameter records the hours of motor
operation - the time period that the E3 is
sensing motor current present (motor
current must be greater than 30% of the
minimum Full Load Current (FLA) setting).

Parameter Number 95
Access Rule Get
Data Type UINT
Object Mapping 29hex-1-100
Group Monitor
Units Hours
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 65535
Default Value 0
Starts Counter (Series C and later)
This parameter records the number of
starts - motor current transitions from zero
to non-zero values (motor current must be
greater than 30% of the minimum Full
Load Current (FLA) setting).

Parameter Number 96
Access Rule Get
Data Type UINT
Object Mapping 29hex-1-101
Group Monitor
Units -
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 65535
Default Value 0
146 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 Chapter 6 Monitoring Parameters
Starts Available (Series C and later)
This parameter reports the number of
starts currently available based on the
Start Inhibit settings (parameter 99,
Starts/Hour).

Parameter Number 97
Access Rule Get
Data Type USINT
Object Mapping 29hex-1-102
Group Monitor
Units -
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 120
Default Value 0
Time to Start (Series C and later)
This parameter reports the timed non-zero
value when a Start Inhibit trip is in effect
(parameter 100, Starts Interval).

Parameter Number 98
Access Rule Get
Data Type UINT
Object Mapping 29hex-1-103
Group Monitor
Units Seconds
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 3600
Default Value 0
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 147 Chapter 7
Voltage Parameters
Introduction The E3 Plus model EC5 has the capability to protect against poor voltage quality by offering voltage based protection. The user can prevent a contactor from energizing if the voltage is either too high or too low. This model also provides maintenance personnel with voltage based diagnostic information when investigating an unplanned shut down. This chapter provides information for the voltage monitoring and setup parameters for the E3 Plus Overload Relay model EC5.

Phase Voltage Reporting Voltage Range
The E3 Plus model EC5 utilizes a true RMS algorithm to calculate the RMS value of the voltage that exists on L1, L2, and L3. The relay is capable of sensing voltages ranging from 0V L-L to 690V L-L for frequencies ranging from 20 Hz to 250 Hz. The relay supports the following voltage systems:
Single Phase (2 Wire)
Delta (Direct Connection)
W ye (Direct Connection or with 3 Potential T ransformers) Open Delta (with 2 Potential T ransformers)
Delta with PT (with 3 Potential T ransformers)
The following chart illustrates the reported voltage parameters based on the chosen voltage mode. Parameters that do not have an "X" will report 0.

IMPORTANT The E3 Plus model EC5 will report 0 V if the voltage is below 50V L-L .

IMPORTANT The E3 Plus model EC5 is capable of reporting values greater than 690V L-L and for frequencies less than 40 Hz or greater than 80 Hz, but the accuracy of the value may be
compromised.

IMPORTANT The E3 Plus model EC5 calculates frequency based on the voltage signal on L1.
148 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 Chapter 7 Voltage Parameters
X
Voltage Accuracy
Voltage Monitor Group
Table 4: Voltage Reporting Summary
Parameter Name Single Phase Delta Wye Open Delta Delta with PT L1-L2 Voltage X X X X X
L2-L3 Voltage X X X X X
L3-L1 Voltage X X X X
Ave Voltage L-L X X X X X
L1-N Voltage X X
L2-N Voltage X X
L3-N Voltage X
Ave Voltage L-N X X
Voltage Unbalance X X X X X
Voltage Frequency X X X X X
V Phase Rot X X X X
Table 5: Voltage Reporting Accuracy
Operating Range Parameter Accuracy
50 V L-L … 690V L-L
40 Hz … 80Hz
Line to Line Voltage 3%
Line to Neutral Voltage 3%
Voltage Frequency 1%
V Trip Status
This parameter provides voltage based trip
identification as outlined in the table
below:
1 = Trip
0 = No TrIp
Parameter Number
Access Rule Get
Data Type UINT
Object Mapping
Group Voltage monitor
Units —
Minimum Value —
Maximum Value —
Default Value —
Bit Function:
1 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 9876543210
XV o l t a g e H a r d w a r e F a u l t
XU n d e r V o l t L - L
XO v e r V o l t L - L
XV oltage Unbalance
X Phase Rotation
X Under Frequency
XO ver Frequency
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 149 Voltage Parameters Chapter 7
V Warn Status
This parameter provides voltage based
warning identification as outlined in the
table below:
1 = Warning
0 = No Warning
Parameter Number 161
Access Rule Get
Data Type UINT
Object Mapping 0Fhex-A1-01
Group Voltage monitor
Units —
Minimum Value —
Maximum Value —
Default Value —
Bit Function:
1 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 9876543210
XV o l t a g e H a r d w a r e F a u l t
XU n d e r V o l t L - L
XO v e r V o l t L - L
XV oltage Unbalance
XP hase Rotation
X Under Frequency
XO ver Frequency
L1-L2 Voltage
This parameter provides the L1-L2 voltage
measurement in Volts.

Parameter Number 162
Access Rule Get
Data Type UINT
Object Mapping 0Fhex-A2-01
Group Voltage Monitor
Units Volt
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 65545
Default Value —
L2-L3 Voltage
This parameter provides the L2-L3 voltage
measurement in Volts.

Parameter Number 163
Access Rule Get
Data Type UINT
Object Mapping 0Fhex-A3-01
Group Voltage Monitor
Units Volt
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 65545
Default Value —
L3-L1 Voltage

This parameter provides the L3-L1 voltage
measurement in Volts.

Parameter Number 164
Access Rule Get
Data Type UINT
Object Mapping 0Fhex-A4-01
Group Voltage Monitor
Units Volt
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 65545
Default Value —
150 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 Chapter 7 Voltage Parameters
Ave Voltage L-L
This parameter provides the average line
to line voltage measurement in Volts.

Parameter Number 165
Access Rule Get
Data Type UINT
Object Mapping 0Fhex-A5-01
Group Voltage Monitor
Units Volt
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 65545
Default Value —
L1-N Voltage
This parameter provides the L1-N voltage
measurement in Volts.

Parameter Number 166
Access Rule Get
Data Type UINT
Object Mapping 0Fhex-A6-01
Group Voltage Monitor
Units Volt
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 65545
Default Value —
L2-N Voltage
This parameter provides the L2-L3 voltage
measurement in Volts.

Parameter Number 167
Access Rule Get
Data Type UINT
Object Mapping 0Fhex-A7-01
Group Voltage Monitor
Units Volt
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 65545
Default Value —
L3-N Voltage

This parameter provides the L3-N voltage
measurement in Volts.

Parameter Number 168
Access Rule Get
Data Type UINT
Object Mapping 0Fhex-A8-01
Group Voltage Monitor
Units Volt
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 65545
Default Value —
Ave Voltage L-N

This parameter provides the average line
to neutral voltage measurement in Volts.

Parameter Number 169
Access Rule Get
Data Type UINT
Object Mapping 0Fhex-A9-01
Group Voltage Monitor
Units Volt
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 65545
Default Value —
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 151 Voltage Parameters Chapter 7
Voltage Setup Group
Volt Unbalance
This parameter provides the percent
current unbalance measurement.
%VU = 100 (Vd/Va)
where,
VU: Voltage Unbalance
Vd: Maximum deviation from the average
voltage
Va: Average voltage
Parameter Number 170
Access Rule Get
Data Type USINT
Object Mapping 0Fhex-AA-01
Group Voltage Monitor
Units %
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 255
Default Value —
Volt Frequency
This parameter provides the frequency
based on the incoming voltage signal.

Parameter Number 171
Access Rule Get
Data Type USINT
Object Mapping 0Fhex-AB-01
Group Voltage Monitor
Units Hz
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 250
Default Value —
V Phase Rot
This parameter provides the rotation of the
three phase voltage system.

Parameter Number 172
Access Rule Get
Data Type USINT
Object Mapping 0Fhex-AC-01
Group Voltage Monitor
Units 0 = No Rotation
1 = ABC
2 = ACB
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 2
Default Value —
Volt Mode

This parameter selects the voltage system
that the relay is monitoring.

Open Delta and Delta with PT is only valid
for the 193-EC5ZZ (9…5000 A)
Parameter Number 156
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type USINT
Object Mapping 0Fhex-AC-01
Group Voltage Setup
Units 0 = Delta
1 = Wye
2 = Open Delta
3 = Delta with PT
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 3
Default Value 0
V Trip Enable

This parameter allows the installer to
enable or disable voltage based trip
functions separately.
1 = Trip
0 = No TrIp
Parameter Number 158
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type UINT
Object Mapping 0Fhex-9E-01
Group Voltage Setup
Units —
Minimum Value 0000000000000000
Maximum Value 0000000000111111
Default Value 0000000000000000
152 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 Chapter 7 Voltage Parameters
Bit Function:
1 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 9876543210
XV o l t a g e H a r d w a r e F a u l t
XU n d e r V o l t L - L
XO v e r V o l t L - L
XV o l t a g e U n b a l a n c e
X Phase Rotation
X Under Frequency
XO v e r F r e q u e n c y
V Warn Enable
This parameter allows the installer to
enable or disable voltage based warning
functions separately.
1 = Warning
0 = No Warning
Parameter Number 159
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type UINT
Object Mapping 0Fhex-9F-01
Group Voltage Setup
Units —
Minimum Value 0000000000000000
Maximum Value 0000000000111111
Default Value 0000000000000001
Bit Function:
1 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 9876543210
XV o l t a g e H a r d w a r e F a u l t
XU n d e r V o l t L - L
XO v e r V o l t L - L
XV oltage Unbalance
X Phase Rotation
X Under Frequency
XO ver Frequency
UV Inhibit Time
This parameter defines the amount of time
for which an under voltage detection is
inhibited during a motor starting
sequence.

Parameter Number 215
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type USINT
Object Mapping 0Fhex-D7-01
Group Voltage Setup
Units Seconds
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 250
Default Value 10
UV Trip Delay
This parameter allows the installer to
program a time duration for which an
under voltage condition must exist prior to
the device tripping.

Parameter Number 216
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type USINT
Object Mapping 0Fhex-D8-01
Group Voltage Setup
Units Seconds
Minimum Value 0.1
Maximum Value 25.0
Default Value 1.0
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 153 Voltage Parameters Chapter 7
UV Trip Level

This parameter sets the under voltage trip
level.

Parameter Number 217
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type UINT
Object Mapping 0Fhex-D9-01
Group Voltage Setup
Units Volts
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 65535
Default Value 100
UV Warn Level
This parameter sets the under voltage
warning level.

Parameter Number 218
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type UINT
Object Mapping 0Fhex-DA-01
Group Voltage Setup
Units Volts
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 65535
Default Value 400
OV Inhibit Time

This parameter defines the amount of time
for which an over voltage detection is
inhibited during a motor starting
sequence.

Parameter Number 219
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type USINT
Object Mapping 0Fhex-DB-01
Group Voltage Setup
Units Seconds
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 250
Default Value 10
OV Trip Delay
This parameter allows the installer to
program a time duration for which an over
voltage condition must exist prior to the
device tripping.

Parameter Number 220
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type USINT
Object Mapping 0Fhex-DC-01
Group Voltage Setup
Units Seconds
Minimum Value 0.1
Maximum Value 25.0
Default Value 1.0
OV Trip Level
This parameter sets the over voltage trip
level.

Parameter Number 221
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type UINT
Object Mapping 0Fhex-DD-01
Group Voltage Setup
Units Volts
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 65535
Default Value 500
154 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 Chapter 7 Voltage Parameters
OV Warn Level
This parameter sets the over voltage
warning level.

Parameter Number 222
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type UINT
Object Mapping 0Fhex-DE-01
Group Voltage Setup
Units Volts
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 65535
Default Value 490
Ph Rot Inhibit Time
This parameter defines the amount of time
for which an improper phase rotation
detection is inhibited during a motor
starting sequence.

Parameter Number 223
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type USINT
Object Mapping 0Fhex-DF-01
Group Voltage Setup
Units Seconds
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 250
Default Value 10
Ph Rot Trip
This parameter sets the rotation trip and
warning direction.

Parameter Number 224
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type USINT
Object Mapping 0Fhex-E0-01
Group Voltage Setup
Units 1 = ABC
2 = ACB
Minimum Value 1
Maximum Value 2
Default Value 1
V UnbalInhib Time
This parameter defines the amount of time
for which voltage unbalance detection is
inhibited during a motor starting
sequence.

Parameter Number 229
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type USINT
Object Mapping 0Fhex-E5-01
Group Voltage Setup
Units Seconds
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 250
Default Value 10
V UnbalTripDelay

This parameter allows the installer to
program a time duration for which a
voltage unbalance condition must exist
prior to the device tripping.

Parameter Number 230
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type USINT
Object Mapping 0Fhex-E6-01
Group Voltage Setup
Units Seconds
Minimum Value 0.1
Maximum Value 25.0
Default Value 1.0
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 155 Voltage Parameters Chapter 7
V UnbalTripLevel
This parameter sets the voltage unbalance
trip level.

Parameter Number 231
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type USINT
Object Mapping 0Fhex-E7-01
Group Voltage Setup
Units %
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 100
Default Value 75
V UnbalWarnLevel
This parameter sets the voltage unbalance
warning level.

Parameter Number 232
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type USINT
Object Mapping 0Fhex-E8-01
Group Voltage Setup
Units Volts
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 100
Default Value 85
UF Inhibit Time

This parameter defines the amount of time
for which an under frequency detection is
inhibited during a motor starting
sequence.

Parameter Number 233
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type USINT
Object Mapping 0Fhex-E9-01
Group Voltage Setup
Units Seconds
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 250
Default Value 10
UF Trip Delay
This parameter allows the installer to
program a time duration for which an
under frequency condition must exist prior
to the device tripping.

Parameter Number 234
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type USINT
Object Mapping 0Fhex-EA-01
Group Voltage Setup
Units Seconds
Minimum Value 0.1
Maximum Value 25.0
Default Value 1.0
UF Trip Level
This parameter sets the under frequency
trip level.

Parameter Number 235
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type USINT
Object Mapping 0Fhex-EB-01
Group Voltage Setup
Units Hz
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 250
Default Value 57
156 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 Chapter 7 Voltage Parameters
UF Warn Level
This parameter sets the under frequency
warning level.

Parameter Number 236
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type USINT
Object Mapping 0Fhex-EC-01
Group Voltage Setup
Units Hz
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 250
Default Value 58
OF Inhibit Time
This parameter defines the amount of time
for which an over frequency detection is
inhibited during a motor starting
sequence.

Parameter Number 237
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type USINT
Object Mapping 0Fhex-ED-01
Group Voltage Setup
Units Seconds
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 250
Default Value 10
OF Trip Delay

This parameter allows the installer to
program a time duration for which an over
frequency condition must exist prior to the
device tripping.

Parameter Number 238
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type USINT
Object Mapping 0Fhex-EE-01
Group Voltage Setup
Units Seconds
Minimum Value 0.1
Maximum Value 25.0
Default Value 1.0
OF Trip Level

This parameter sets the over frequency trip
level.

Parameter Number 239
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type USINT
Object Mapping 0Fhex-EF-01
Group Voltage Setup
Units Hz
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 250
Default Value 63
OF Warn Level

This parameter sets the over frequency
warning level.

Parameter Number 240
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type USINT
Object Mapping 0Fhex-F0-01
Group Voltage Setup
Units Hz
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 62
Default Value 58
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 157 Voltage Parameters Chapter 7
PT Pri
This parameter sets the primary winding
value of the potential transformer being
used to step down a voltage signal that is
being measured.

Only used on the 193-EC5ZZ (9…5000 A)
Parameter Number 289
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type UINT
Object Mapping 0Fhex-121-01
Group Voltage Setup
Units Volts
Minimum Value 1
Maximum Value 65535
Default Value 480
PT Sec
This parameter sets the secondary winding
value of the potential transformer being
used to step down a voltage signal that is
being measured.

Only used on the 193-EC5ZZ (9…5000 A)
Parameter Number 290
Access Rule Get/Set
Data Type UINT
Object Mapping 0Fhex-122-01
Group Voltage Setup
Units Volts
Minimum Value 1
Maximum Value 540
Default Value 480
158 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 Chapter 7 Voltage Parameters
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 159 Chapter 8
Power Parameters
Introduction The E3 Plus model EC5 offers power based motor protection. This model also provides maintenance personnel with power based diagnostic information when investigating an unplanned shut down or performing energy management. This chapter provides information for the power monitoring and setup parameters for the E3 Plus Overload Relay model EC5.

Phase Power Reporting Power Range
The E3 Plus model EC5 provides power based diagnostic information that includes real power (kW), reactive power (kVAR), apparent power (kVA), and power factor (PF). The relay also provides energy based diagnostic information that includes kWh, kVARh, kVAh, kW Demand, kVAR Demand, and kVA Demand. The relay is capable of sensing power and energy ranging from 0V L-L to 690V L-L for frequencies ranging from 20 Hz to 250 Hz. The relay supports the following voltage systems:
Single Phase (2 Wire)
Delta (Direct Connection)
W ye (Direct Connection)
Open Delta (with 2 Potential T ransformers)
Delta with PT (with 3 Potential T ransformers)
The E3 Plus model EC5 is intended to be used in applications that represent quadrants I and IV of the power circle shown in Explanation of Power Parameter Signs
160 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 Chapter 8 Power Parameters
Figure 1: Explanation of Power Parameter Signs
The following chart illustrates the reported power parameters based on the chosen voltage mode. Parameters that do not have an "X" will report 0.

IMPORTANT The E3 Plus model EC5 will report 0 for all power based parameters if the voltage is below 50V L-L .

IMPORTANT The E3 Plus model EC5 is capable of reporting power values when the voltage is greater than 690V L-L and for frequencies less than 40 Hz or greater than 80 Hz; however, the accuracy of the value may be compromised.

Table 6: Power Reporting Summary
Parameter Name Single Phase Delta Wye Open Delta ➊ Delta with PT L1 Real Power (kW) X X
L2 Real Power (kW) X X
L3 Real Power (kW) X
Total Real Power (kW ) X X X X
L1 Reactive Power (kVAR) X X
L2 Reactive Power (kVAR) X X
L3 Reactive Power (kVAR) X
Total Reactive Power (kVAR) X X X X
L1 Apparent Power (kVA) X X
L2 Apparent Power (kVA) X X
L3 Apparent Power (kVA) X
Total Apparent Power (kVA) X X X X X
L1 Power Factor (PF) X X
L2 Power Factor (PF) X X
L3 Power Factor (PF) X
Total Power Factor (PF) X X X X
kWh X X X
kVARh Consumed X X X X
kVARh Generated X X X
I
IV
II
III
90°
270°
0°180°
Pf = 0
+kVAR (Consumed)
Pf = 0
-kVAR (Generated)
Pf = 100%
+kW (Consumed)
Pf = 100%
-kW (Generated)
(Power Factor
Lagging)
(-)
(Power Factor
Leading)
(+)
(Power Factor
Lagging)
(-)
(Power Factor
Leading)
(+)
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM002I-EN-P - December 2011 161 Power Parameters Chapter 8
➊ Open Delta mode only calculates reactive power consumed.

Carlsbad City CouncilSeptember 29, 2026

Carlsbad City Council
September 29, 2026